Owner's Manual Contents for Vehicle A-Z The Ultimate Driving Machine®
THE BMW 4 SERIES CONVERTIBLE. OWNER'S MANUAL.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17
4 Series Owner's Manual for the vehicle Thank you for choosing a BMW. The more familiar you are with your vehicle, the better control you will have on the road. We therefore strongly suggest: Read this Owner's Manual before starting off in your new BMW. Also use the Integrated Owner's Manual in your vehicle. It con‐ tains important information on vehicle operation that will help you make full use of the technical features available in your BMW. The manual also contains information designed to en‐ hance operating reliability and road safety, and to contribute to maintaining the value of your BMW. Any updates made after the editorial deadline can be found in the appendix of the printed Owner's Manual for the vehicle. Supplementary information can be found in the additional bro‐ chures in the onboard literature. We wish you a safe and enjoyable trip.
The Owner's Manual is available in many countries as an app. Additional information on the Internet: www.bmw.com/bmw_drivers_guide
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 © 2017 Bayerische Motoren Werke Aktiengesellschaft Munich, Germany Reprinting, including excerpts, only with the written consent of BMW AG, Munich. US English ID5 II/17, 03 17 490 Printed on environmentally friendly paper, bleached without chlorine, suitable for recycling.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Contents
The fastest way to find information on a partic‐ Mobility ular topic or item is by using the index, refer to 210 Refueling page 262. 212 Fuel 214 Wheels and tires 231 Engine compartment 6 Information 233 Engine oil At a glance 237 Coolant 14 Cockpit 239 Maintenance 18 iDrive 241 Replacing components 26 Voice activation system 246 Breakdown assistance 29 General settings 252 Care 41 Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle Reference Controls 258 Technical data 46 Opening and closing 261 Appendix 65 Settings 262 Everything from A to Z 75 Transporting children safely 79 Driving 93 Displays 111 Lights 117 Safety 142 Driving stability control systems 148 Driving comfort 171 Climate control 180 Interior equipment 190 Storage compartments
Driving tips 196 Things to remember when driving 199 Loading 201 Saving fuel
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 6
Information
Information
Using this Owner's Manual Additional sources of information Orientation The fastest way to find information on a partic‐ Dealer’s service center ular topic is by using the index. A dealer’s service center will be glad to answer An initial overview of the vehicle is provided in questions at any time. the first chapter. Internet Updates made after the editorial The Owner's Manual and general information deadline on BMW, for example on technology, are avail‐ Due to updates after the editorial deadline, dif‐ able on the Internet: www.bmwusa.com. ferences may exist between the printed Own‐ er's Manual and the following Owner's Man‐ BMW Driver’s Guide App uals: ▷ Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle. ▷ Online Owner's Manual. ▷ BMW Driver’s Guide app. Notes on updates can be found in the appen‐ The Owner's Manual is available in many coun‐ dix of the printed Owner's Manual for the vehi‐ tries as an app. Additional information on the cle. Internet: Owner's Manual for Navigation, www.bmw.com/bmw_drivers_guide Entertainment, Communication The Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertain‐ ment, and Communication can be obtained as Symbols and displays printed book from the service center. Symbols in the Owner's Manual The topics of Navigation, Entertainment, and Communication can be called up via the fol‐ Indicates precautions that must be followed lowing Owner's Manuals: precisely in order to avoid the possibility of personal injury and serious damage to the ▷ Integrated Owner's Manual on the Control vehicle. Display in the vehicle. ◄ Marks the end of a specific item of ▷ Online Owner's Manual. information. ▷ BMW Driver’s Guide app. Refers to measures that can be taken to help protect the environment. "..." Identifies display texts in vehicle used to select individual functions. ›...‹ Verbal instructions to use with the voice activation system.
6 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 7
Information
››...‹‹ Identifies the answers generated by the the features and options applicable to your ve‐ voice activation system. hicle.
Action steps Action steps to be carried out are presented as Status of the Owner's numbered list. The steps must be carried out Manual in the defined order. Basic information 1. First action step. The manufacturer of your vehicle pursues a 2. Second action step. policy of constant development that is con‐ ceived to ensure that our vehicles continue to Enumerations embody the highest quality and safety stan‐ Enumerations without mandatory order or al‐ dards. In rare cases, therefore, the features de‐ ternative possibilities are presented as list with scribed in this Owner's Manual may differ from bullet points. those in your vehicle. ▷ First possibility. ▷ Second possibility. Updates made after the editorial deadline Symbols on vehicle components Due to updates after the editorial deadline, dif‐ Indicates that you should consult the ferences may exist between the printed Own‐ relevant section of this Owner's Manual for er's Manual and the following Owner's Man‐ information on a particular part or assembly. uals: ▷ Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle. ▷ Online Owner's Manual. Vehicle features and options ▷ BMW Driver’s Guide app. This Owner's Manual describes all models and Notes on updates can be found in the appen‐ all standard, country-specific and optional dix of the printed Owner's Manual for the vehi‐ equipment that is offered in the model series. cle. Therefore, this Owner's Manual also describes and illustrates features and functions that are not available in your vehicle, for example be‐ For Your Own Safety cause of the selected optional features or the country-specific version. Intended use This also applies to safety-related functions Observe the following when using the vehicle: and systems. ▷ Owner's Manual. When using these functions and systems, the ▷ Information on the vehicle. Do not remove applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ stickers. served. ▷ Technical vehicle data. For any options and equipment not described in this Owner's Manual, refer to the Supple‐ ▷ The traffic, speed, and safety laws where mentary Owner's Manuals. the vehicle is driven. Your BMW dealer’s service center is happy to ▷ Vehicle documents and statutory docu‐ answer any questions that you may have about ments.
7 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 8
Information
Warranty BMW does not evaluate whether each individ‐ Your vehicle is technically configured for the ual product from another manufacturer can be operating conditions and registration require‐ used with BMW vehicles without presenting a ments applying in the country of first delivery, safety hazard, even if a country-specific official also known as homologation. If your vehicle is approval was issued. BMW does not evaluate to be operated in a different country it might be whether these products are suitable for BMW necessary to adapt your vehicle to potentially vehicles under all usage conditions. differing operating conditions and permit re‐ quirements. If your vehicle does not comply California Proposition 65 Warning with the homologation requirements in a cer‐ California laws require us to state the following tain country you may not be able to lodge war‐ warning: ranty claims for your vehicle there. Further in‐ Engine exhaust and a wide variety of automo‐ formation on warranty is available from a bile components and parts, including compo‐ dealer’s service center. nents found in the interior furnishings in a vehi‐ cle, contain or emit chemicals known to the Maintenance and repairs State of California to cause cancer and birth Advanced technology, e. g. the use of modern defects and reproductive harm. In addition, materials and high-performance electronics, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain requires suitable maintenance and repair work. products of component wear contain or emit The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends chemicals known to the State of California to that you entrust corresponding procedures to cause cancer and birth defects or other repro‐ a BMW dealer’s service center. If you choose ductive harm. Battery posts, terminals and re‐ to use another service facility, BMW recom‐ lated accessories contain lead and lead com‐ mends use of a facility that performs work, for pounds. Wash your hands after handling. Used instance maintenance and repair, according to engine oil contains chemicals that have caused BMW specifications with properly trained per‐ cancer in laboratory animals. Always protect sonnel, referred to in this Owner's Manual as your skin by washing thoroughly with soap and "another qualified service center or repair water. shop". Service and warranty If work is performed improperly, for instance maintenance and repair, there is a risk of sub‐ We recommend that you read this publication sequent damage and related safety risks. thoroughly. Your vehicle is covered by the fol‐ lowing warranties: Parts and accessories ▷ New Vehicle Limited Warranty. BMW recommends the use of parts and ac‐ ▷ Rust Perforation Limited Warranty. cessory products approved by BMW. ▷ Federal Emissions System Defect War‐ Approved parts and accessories, and advice ranty. on their use and installation are available from ▷ Federal Emissions Performance Warranty. a BMW dealer's service center. ▷ California Emission Control System Lim‐ BMW parts and accessories have been tested ited Warranty. by BMW for their safety and suitability in BMW Detailed information about these warranties is vehicles. listed in the Service and Warranty Information BMW warrants genuine BMW parts and acces‐ Booklet for US models or in the Warranty and sories. Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models.
8 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 9
Information
Your vehicle has been specifically adapted and ▷ Status messages for the vehicle and from designed to meet the particular operating con‐ its individual components, e.g., wheel rota‐ ditions and homologation requirements in your tion speed, wheel speed, deceleration, country and continental region in order to de‐ transverse acceleration. liver the full driving pleasure while the vehicle ▷ Malfunctions and faults in important sys‐ is operated under those conditions. If you wish tem components, e.g., lights and brakes. to operate your vehicle in another country or ▷ Responses by the vehicle to special situa‐ region, you may be required to adapt your ve‐ tions such as airbag deployment or en‐ hicle to meet different prevailing operating gagement of the stability control systems. conditions and homologation requirements. You should also be aware of any applicable ▷ Ambient conditions, such as temperature. warranty limitations or exclusions for such This data is purely technical in nature and is country or region. In such case, please contact used to detect and correct faults and to opti‐ Customer Relations for further information. mize vehicle functions. Motion profiles over routes traveled cannot be created from this Maintenance data. When service offerings are used, e.g., re‐ Maintain the vehicle regularly to sustain the pair services, service processes, warranty road safety, operational reliability and the New claims, quality assurance, this technical infor‐ Vehicle Limited Warranty. mation can be read out from the event and fault memories by employees of a dealer’s Specifications for required maintenance meas‐ service center or another qualified service cen‐ ures: ter or repair shop, including the manufacturer, ▷ BMW Maintenance system using special diagnostic tools. You can obtain ▷ Service and Warranty Information Booklet further information there if you need it. After an for US models error is corrected, the information in the fault ▷ Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for memory is deleted or overwritten on a continu‐ Canadian models ous basis. If the vehicle is not maintained according to With the vehicle in use there are situations these specifications, this could result in seri‐ where you can associate this technical data ous damage to the vehicle. Such damage is with individuals if combined with other infor‐ not covered by the BMW New Vehicle Limited mation, e.g., an accident report, damage to the Warranty. vehicle, eye witness accounts — possibly with the assistance of an expert. Additional functions that are contractually Data memory agreed with the customer — such as vehicle emergency locating — allow certain vehicle Many electronic components on your vehicle data to be transmitted from the vehicle. are equipped with data memories that tempo‐ rarily or permanently store technical informa‐ tion about the condition of the vehicle, events Event Data Recorder EDR and faults. This technical information generally records the state of a component, a module, a This vehicle is equipped with an event data re‐ system or the environment: corder EDR. The main purpose of an EDR is to ▷ Operating states of system components, record, in certain crash or near crash-like situa‐ e.g., fill levels. tions, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in under‐
9 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 10
Information
standing how a vehicle’s systems performed. Vehicle identification The EDR is designed to record data related to number vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as: ▷ How various systems in your vehicle were operating. ▷ Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were fastened. ▷ How far, if at all, the driver was depressing The vehicle identification number can be found the accelerator and/or brake pedal. in the engine compartment, on the right-hand ▷ How fast the vehicle was traveling. side of the vehicle.. This data can help provide a better under‐ standing of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. Reporting safety defects EDR data is recorded by your vehicle only if a nontrivial crash situation occurs; no data is re‐ For US customers corded by the EDR under normal driving condi‐ The following only applies to vehicles owned tions and no personal data, e.g., name, gender, and operated in the US. age, and crash location, are recorded. If you believe that your vehicle has a defect However, other parties, such as law enforce‐ which could cause a crash or could cause in‐ ment, could combine the EDR data with the jury or death, you should immediately inform type of personally identifying data routinely ac‐ the National Highway Traffic Safety Adminis‐ quired during a crash investigation. tration NHTSA, in addition to notifying BMW of To read data recorded by an EDR, special North America, LLC, P.O. Box 1227, West‐ equipment is required, and access to the vehi‐ wood, New Jersey 07675-1227, Telephone cle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the ve‐ 1-800-831-1117. hicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may enforcement, that have the special equipment, open an investigation, and if it finds that a can read the information if they have access to safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it the vehicle or the EDR. may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or BMW of North America, LLC. To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http:// www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washing‐ ton, DC 20590. You can also obtain other in‐
10 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 11
Information
formation about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
For Canadian customers Canadian customers who wish to report a safety-related defect to Transport Canada, De‐ fect Investigations and Recalls, may call the toll-free hotline 1-800-333-0510. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety.
11 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 At a glance
This chapter shows the arrangement of the buttons, switches and displays. Moreover, you will become familiar with the available control concepts and options quickly.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 14
At a glance Cockpit
Cockpit
Vehicle features and options to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions This chapter describes all standard, country- and systems. When using these functions and specific and optional features offered with the systems, the applicable laws and regulations series. It also describes features that are not must be observed. necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
In the vicinity of the steering wheel
1 Power windows, all 59 Active Blind Spot Detec‐ 2 Power windows, individual 59 tion 138 3 Exterior mirror operation 72 Intelligent Safety 128 4 Glove compartment on the driver's side 191 Lane departure warning 137 Driver assistance systems
5 Lights
14 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 15
Cockpit At a glance
Front fog lights 114 Cruise control: resume speed
Light switch 111 Active Cruise Control: reduce distance
Lights off Active Cruise Control: increase Daytime running lights 113 distance Parking lights 111 Cruise control rocker switch 8 Instrument cluster 93 Low beams 111 9 Steering wheel buttons, right Entertainment source, see Own‐ Automatic headlight con‐ er's Manual for Navigation, Enter‐ trol 112 tainment and Communication 6 Adaptive Light Control 113 Volume, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertainment and High-beam Assistant 114 Communication 6 Instrument lighting 115 Voice activation 26
6 Steering column stalk, left Telephone, see Owner's Manual Turn signal 83 for Navigation, Entertainment and Communication 6 Thumbwheel for selection lists 104 High beams, head‐ light flasher 83 10 Steering column stalk, right Wiper 84 High-beam Assistant 114
Rain sensor 85 Canada: roadside parking light 111 Clean the windshield and head‐ Onboard Computer 105 lights 86
11 Start/stop the engine and switch 7 Steering wheel buttons, left the ignition on/off 80 Cruise control on/off, inter‐ rupt 154 Auto Start/Stop function 81
Active Cruise Control on/off, in‐ terrupt 148 12 Horn, entire surface Cruise control: store speed
15 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 16
At a glance Cockpit
13 Heated steering wheel 74 14 Adjust steering wheel 74 15 Unlock hood 232
In the vicinity of the center console
1 Control Display 18 10 Parking brake 83 2 Ventilation 177 11 PDC Park Distance Control 157 3 Hazard warning system 246 Rearview camera 160 Parking assistant 167 Central locking system 51 Surround View 160
Side View 163 4 Glove compartment 190 5 Radio/CD/multimedia, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertainment and Commu‐ 12 Driving Dynamics Control 144 nication 6 6 Climate control 171 DSC Dynamic Stability Con‐ 7 Controller with buttons 18 trol 142 8 Air collar 67 13 Steptronic transmission selector 9 Hardtop 60 lever 88
16 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 17
Cockpit At a glance
In the vicinity of the roofliner
1 Emergency Request, SOS 246 3 Interior lights 115
2 Reading lights 115 4 Indicator light, front-seat passen‐ ger airbag 119
17 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 18
At a glance iDrive
iDrive
Vehicle features and options Operation This chapter describes all standard, country- Overview specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.
The concept 1 Control Display The iDrive combines the functions of many 2 Controller with buttons and, depending on switches. These functions can be operated via the equipment version, with touchpad the Controller. Control Display
Safety information General information WARNING To clean the Control Display, follow the care Operating the integrated information instructions, refer to page 255. systems and communication devices while Do not place objects close to the Control Dis‐ driving can distract from traffic. It is possible to play; otherwise, the Control Display can be lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an damaged. accident. Only use the systems or devices In the case of very high temperatures on the when the traffic situation allows. If necessary, Control Display, for instance due to intense so‐ stop and use the systems and devices while lar radiation, the brightness may be reduced the vehicle is stationary.◀ down to complete deactivation. Once the tem‐ perature is reduced, for instance through shade or air conditioning, the normal functions are restored.
Switching on 1. Switch on the ignition. 2. Press the Controller.
Switching off
1. Press button.
18 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 19
iDrive At a glance
2. "Turn off control display"
Buttons on the Controller Controller with navigation system Button Function
General information Press once: call up main menu. The buttons can be used to open the menus Press twice: display all menu items directly. The Controller can be used to select of the main menu. menu items and enter the settings. Open the Communication menu. Some iDrive functions can be operated using the touchpad on the Controller, refer to page 22. Open the Media/Radio menu.
Operation Open destination input menu for ▷ Turn. navigation. Open navigation map.
Press and hold: open the menus used last.
Open the Options menu.
Controller without navigation system ▷ Press. General information The buttons can be used to open the menus directly. The Controller can be used to select menu items and enter the settings.
Operation ▷ Turn.
▷ Move in four directions.
19 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 20
At a glance iDrive
Button Function
Press and hold: open the menus used last.
Open the Options menu.
Operating with the Controller ▷ Press. Opening the main menu Press button.
▷ Move in two directions.
The main menu is displayed. All iDrive functions can be called up via the main menu.
Adapting the main menu
1. Press the button twice. Buttons on the Controller All menu items of the main menu are dis‐ played. Button Function 2. Select a menu item. Press once: call up main menu. 3. To move the menu item to the desired po‐ sition, tilt the Controller to the right or left. Press twice: display all menu items of the main menu.
Open the Communication menu.
Open the Media/Radio menu.
20 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 21
iDrive At a glance
Selecting menu items Opening recently used menus Highlighted menu items can be selected. The recently used menus can be displayed. 1. Turn the Controller until the desired menu Press and hold this button. item is highlighted.
Opening the Options menu Press button.
The "Options" menu is displayed.
2. Press the Controller.
Menu items in the Owner's Manual In the Owner's Manual, menu items that can be selected are set in quotation marks, for exam‐ ple "iDrive settings". The Options menu consists of various areas: ▷ Screen settings, for instance "Split Changing between displays screen". After a menu item is selected, for instance ▷ Control options for the selected main "iDrive settings", a new display appears. menu, for instance for "Media/Radio". ▷ Move the Controller to the left. ▷ If applicable, further operating options for Closes the current display and shows the the selected menu, for instance "Save previous display. station".
▷ Press button. Changing settings The previous display opens. 1. Select a field. ▷ Move the Controller to the right. 2. Turn the Controller until the desired set‐ New display is opened. ting is displayed.
The arrow indicates that additional displays 3. Press the Controller. can be opened.
21 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 22
At a glance iDrive
Activating/deactivating the functions Entry comparison Several menu items are preceded by a check‐ When entering names and addresses, the box. The checkbox indicates whether the func‐ choice is narrowed down with every letter en‐ tion is activated or deactivated. Selecting the tered and letters may be added automatically. menu item activates or deactivates the func‐ Entries are continuously compared with data tion. stored in the vehicle. Function is activated. ▷ Only those letters are offered during entry Function is deactivated. for which data is available. ▷ Destination search: place names can be Entering letters and numbers entered in all languages that are available in iDrive. General information Letters and numbers can be entered via the Using alphabetical lists controller. For alphabetical lists with more than 30 en‐ The keyboard's display changes automatically. tries, the letters for which there is an entry are displayed at the left edge. Entering 1. Turn the Controller to the left or right 1. Turn the controller: select letters or num‐ quickly. bers. All letters for which there are entries are 2. : confirm entry. displayed on the left side. 2. Select the first letter of the desired entry. Symbol Function The first entry of the selected letter is dis‐ Press the controller: delete the let‐ played. ters or number.
Hold the controller down: delete all letters or numbers. Touchpad
General information Switching between upper/lower case, numbers and characters Some iDrive functions can be operated using the touchpad on the Controller. Depending on the menu, you can switch be‐ tween entering upper and lower case, letters Selecting functions and numbers. 1. "My Vehicle" Symbol Function 2. "iDrive settings" Enter the letters. 3. "Touchpad"
Enter the numbers. 4. Select the desired setting. ▷ "Speller": enter letters and numbers. or Change between capital and lower-case letters. ▷ "Map": using the map. ▷ "Search fields": write letters without selecting the list field.
22 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 23
iDrive At a glance
▷ "Audio feedback": pronounces entered Split screen letters and numbers. General information Entering letters and numbers Additional information can be displayed in sev‐ Entering letters requires some practice at the eral menus on the right side of the split screen, beginning. When entering, pay attention to the for example information from the onboard following: computer. ▷ The system distinguishes between upper In the divided screen view, the so-called split and lower-case letters and numbers. To screen, this information remains visible even make entries, it may be necessary to when you change to another menu. change between upper and lower-case let‐ ters, numbers and characters, refer to Switching the split screen on/off page 22. ▷ Enter characters as they are displayed on 1. Press button. the Control Display. 2. "Split screen" ▷ Always enter associated characters, such as accents or periods so that the letter can Selecting the display be clearly recognized. The set language The display can be selected in menus, where determines what input is possible. Where the split screen is supported. necessary, enter special characters via the Controller. 1. Move the Controller to the right until the split screen is selected. ▷ To delete a character, swipe to the left on the touchpad. 2. Press the Controller. ▷ To enter a blank space, swipe to the right in the center of the touchpad. ▷ To enter a hyphen, swipe to the right in the upper area of the touchpad. ▷ To enter an underscore, swipe to the right in the lower area of the touchpad.
Using the map The map in the navigation system can be 3. Select the desired setting. moved via the touchpad. Function Operation Specifying the number of displays Move map. Swipe in the appropriate di‐ It is possible to specify the number of displays. rection. 1. Move the Controller to the right until the Enlarge/shrink Drag in or out on the touch‐ split screen is selected. map. pad with fingers. 2. Press the Controller. 3. "Personalize menu" Display menu. Tap once. 4. Select desired setting. 5. Move the Controller to the left.
23 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 24
At a glance iDrive
Status information Entertainment
General information Symbol Meaning The status field can be found in the upper area CD/DVD player. of the Control Display. Status information is displayed in the form of symbols. Music collection. Bluetooth audio. Status field symbols USB audio interface. Radio Mobile phone audio interface.
Symbol Meaning WiFi.
HD Radio station is being received. iPod. Satellite radio is switched on. Additional symbols Telephone Symbol Meaning
Symbol Meaning Check Control message.
Incoming or outgoing call. The sound output has been switched off. Missed call. Encrypted connection not active. Signal strength of cellular network. Request for the current vehicle po‐ Network search. sition. Cellular network is not available. Checking the current vehicle posi‐ The critical charge state of the mo‐ tion. bile phone has been reached.
Roaming is active. Programmable memory SMS text message received. buttons Message received. General information Reminder. The iDrive functions can be stored on the pro‐ Sending not possible. grammable memory buttons and called up di‐ rectly, e.g., radio stations, navigation destina‐ Contacts are loaded. tions, phone numbers and menu entries. Settings are stored for the driver profile cur‐ rently used.
Saving a function 1. Select function via iDrive.
24 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 25
iDrive At a glance
2. Press and hold the desired button until a signal sounds.
Running a function Press button.
The function will work immediately. This means, for example, that the number is dialed when a phone number is selected.
Displaying the key assignment Touch buttons with finger. Do not wear gloves or use objects. The button assignment is displayed at the top edge of screen.
Deleting the button assignments 1. Press buttons 1 and 8 simultaneously for approx. 5 seconds. 2. "OK"
25 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 26
At a glance Voice activation system
Voice activation system
Vehicle features and options so that the spoken commands can be identi‐ fied. This chapter describes all standard, country- To set the language, refer to page 29. specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. Using voice activation This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and Activating the voice activation system systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed. 1. Press button on the steering wheel. 2. Wait for the signal. Concept 3. Say the command. Most functions displayed on the Control Dis‐ This symbol in the instrument cluster indi‐ play can be operated by voice commands via cates that the voice activation system is active. the voice activation system. The system sup‐ If no other commands are possible, operate ports you with announcements during input. the function via iDrive.
Terminating the voice activation General information system ▷ Functions that can only be used when the Briefly press the button on the steer‐ vehicle is stationary can only be operated ing wheel or ›Cancel‹. via the voice activation system to a limited extent. ▷ The system uses a special microphone on Possible commands the driver's side. Most menu items on the Control Display can ▷ ›...‹ in the Owner's Manual denotes verbal be voiced as commands. instructions to use with the voice activation system. Commands from other menus can also be spo‐ ken. ▷ Say the commands, numbers, and letters smoothly and with normal volume, empha‐ You may select list entries such as phone list sis, and speed. entries via voice activation. Read these list en‐ tries out loud exactly as they are shown in the ▷ Always say commands in the language of respective list. the voice activation system. Displaying possible commands Requirements The following is displayed in the top area of the Control Display: Via the Control Display, set a language that is ▷ Some possible commands for the current also supported by the voice activation system menu.
26 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 27
Voice activation system At a glance
▷ Some possible commands from other me‐ Selecting the input language nus. For some languages, the input language can ▷ Status of the voice recognition. be selected. ▷ Encrypted connection is not available. About iDrive: 1. "My Vehicle" Help on the voice activation system 2. "iDrive settings" ▷ To have information on the operating prin‐ ciple of the voice activation system read 3. "Language" out loud: ›General information on voice 4. "Voice control:" control‹. 5. Select desired setting. ▷ To have help for the current menu read out loud: ›Help‹. Activating voice recognition via the server The voice recognition feature via the server One example: opening the provides a dictation function and a natural tone settings method of entering destinations while improv‐ ing the quality of voice recognition. To use the The commands of the menu items are spoken functions, data is transmitted to a service pro‐ just as they are selected via the Controller. vider and locally stored there. 1. Turn on the Entertainment sound output if Using iDrive: needed. 1. "My Vehicle" 2. Press button on the steering 2. "iDrive settings" wheel. 3. "Language" 3. ›Media and radio‹ 4. "Server speech recognition" 4. ›Tone‹ Speaking during voice output It is possible to answer during inquiries of the Adjusting voice activation system. The function can be deactivated if inquiries are often undesirably Setting the voice dialog interrupted, for instance due to background Set system to standard dialog or use a short noise or talking. version. Using iDrive:
The short version of the voice dialog plays 1. "My Vehicle" back short messages in abbreviated form. 2. "iDrive settings" About iDrive: 3. "Language" 1. "My Vehicle" 4. "Speaking during voice output" 2. "iDrive settings" 3. "Language" 4. "Speech mode:" Adjusting the volume 5. Select desired setting. Turn the volume button during the spoken in‐ structions until the desired volume is set.
27 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 28
At a glance Voice activation system
▷ The volume remains constant even if the volume of other audio sources is changed. ▷ The volume is stored for the drive profile currently used.
Information on Emergency Requests Do not use the voice activation system to ini‐ tiate an Emergency Request. In stressful situa‐ tions, the voice and vocal pitch can change. This can unnecessarily delay the establish‐ ment of a phone connection. Instead, use the SOS button, refer to page 246, close to the interior mirror.
Environmental conditions ▷ Keep the doors, windows, and convertible top closed to prevent noise interference. ▷ Avoid making other noise in the vehicle while speaking.
28 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 29
General settings At a glance
General settings
Vehicle features and options The setting is stored for the drive profile cur‐ rently used. This chapter describes all standard, country- specific and optional features offered with the Setting the time series. It also describes features that are not About iDrive: necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. 1. "My Vehicle" This also applies to safety-related functions 2. "iDrive settings" and systems. When using these functions and 3. "Date and time" systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed. 4. "Time:" 5. Turn the Controller until the desired hours are displayed. Language 6. Press the Controller. 7. Turn the Controller until the desired mi‐ Setting the language nutes are displayed. About iDrive: 8. Press the Controller. 1. "My Vehicle" The setting is stored for the drive profile cur‐ 2. "iDrive settings" rently used. 3. "Language" Setting the time format 4. "Language:" About iDrive: 5. Select desired setting. The setting is stored for the drive profile cur‐ 1. "My Vehicle" rently used. 2. "iDrive settings" 3. "Date and time" Setting the voice dialog 4. "Time format:" Voice dialog for the voice activation system, 5. Select desired setting. refer to page 27. The setting is stored for the drive profile cur‐ rently used. Time Automatic time setting Setting the time zone Depending on your vehicle's optional features, About iDrive: the time, date and, if needed, the time zone are updated automatically. 1. "My Vehicle" About iDrive: 2. "iDrive settings" 1. "My Vehicle" 3. "Date and time" 2. "iDrive settings" 4. "Time zone:" 5. Select desired setting.
29 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 30
At a glance General settings
3. "Date and time" Via iDrive: 4. "Automatic time setting" 1. "My Vehicle" The setting is stored for the drive profile cur‐ 2. "iDrive settings" rently used. 3. "Units" 4. Select the desired menu item. Date 5. Select the desired setting. The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐ Setting the date rently used. Using iDrive: 1. "My Vehicle" Activating/deactivating the 2. "iDrive settings" display of the current vehicle 3. "Date and time" position 4. "Date:" 5. Turn the Controller until the desired day is Concept displayed. If vehicle location has been activated, the cur‐ 6. Press the Controller. rent vehicle position can be displayed in the 7. Make the settings for the month and year. corresponding ConnectedDrive app or in the ConnectedDrive customer portal. The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐ rently used. Activating/deactivating Setting the date format Using iDrive: About iDrive: 1. "My Vehicle"
1. "My Vehicle" 2. "Vehicle settings" 2. "iDrive settings" 3. "Vehicle tracking" 3. "Date and time" 4. "Vehicle tracking" 4. "Date format:" 5. Select desired setting. Activating/deactivating The setting is stored for the drive profile cur‐ popup windows rently used. For some functions, popup windows are dis‐ played automatically on the Control Display. Setting the units of Some of these popup windows can be acti‐ measurement vated or deactivated. 1. "My Vehicle" You can set the units of measurement for some values, for example, fuel consumption, 2. "iDrive settings" distances and temperature. 3. "Pop-ups" 4. Select the desired setting.
30 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 31
General settings At a glance
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐ 2. "Contents of main menu" rently used. 3. Select the desired menu and the desired content. The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐ Control Display rently used. Brightness Via iDrive: Messages 1. "My Vehicle" Concept 2. "iDrive settings" The menu centrally displays all messages ar‐ 3. "Displays" riving in the vehicle in list form. 4. "Control display" 5. "Brightness" General information 6. Turn the controller until the desired bright‐ The following messages can be displayed: ness is set. ▷ Traffic messages. 7. Press the controller. ▷ Check Control messages. The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐ ▷ Communication messages, for example e- rently used. mails, SMS text messages or reminders. Depending on the light conditions, the bright‐ ▷ Service requirements messages. ness settings may not be clearly visible. Messages are additionally displayed in the sta‐ tus field. Screen saver If no settings are made via iDriver, after a time Retrieving messages that can be set, a screen saver is displayed. About iDrive: About iDrive: 1. "Notifications" 1. "My Vehicle" 2. Select the desired message. 2. "iDrive settings" The respective menu is opened, where the 3. "Displays" message is displayed. 4. "Control display" 5. "Screensaver" Deleting messages 6. Select desired setting. All messages, except Check Control mes‐ sages, can be deleted from the list. Check The setting is stored for the drive profile cur‐ Control messages are displayed as long as rently used. they are relevant. Selecting the contents of the main About iDrive: menu 1. "Notifications" For some menu items of the main menu, the 2. Select the desired message. displayed contents can be selected.
1. Press button.
31 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 32
At a glance General settings
4. "Data privacy" 3. Press button. 5. Select the desired setting. 4. "Delete this notification" or "Delete all notifications" Deleting personal in the vehicle
Settings The concept The following settings can be adjusted: Depending on the usage, the vehicle saves ▷ Select the applications, from which mes‐ personal data, such as stored radio stations. sages will be permitted. These personal data can be permanently de‐ ▷ Sort the messages according to date or leted through iDrive. priority. General information Via iDrive: Depending on the equipment package, the fol‐ 1. "My Vehicle" lowing data can be deleted: 2. "iDrive settings" ▷ Profile settings. 3. "Notifications" ▷ Stored radio stations. 4. Select the desired setting. ▷ Stored Favorites buttons. ▷ Travel and onboard computer information. Data protection ▷ Music collection. ▷ Navigation, for example stored destina‐ Data transfer tions. ▷ Phone book. Concept ▷ Online data, for example Favorites, cook‐ The vehicle offers different functions, whose ies. use requires a data transfer to BMW or a serv‐ ▷ Office data, for example voice notes. ice provider. The data transfer can be deacti‐ vated for some functions. ▷ Login accounts. Altogether, the deletion of the data can take up General information to 15 minutes. With data transfer deactivated, the respective function cannot be used. Functional requirement Only make these settings while stationary. Data can only be deleted while stationary.
Activating/deactivating the data Deleting data transfer Heed and follow the instructions on the Con‐ Follow the instructions on the Control Display. trol Display. Using iDrive: Using iDrive:
1. Switch on the ignition. 1. Switch on the ignition. 2. "My Vehicle" 2. "My Vehicle" 3. "iDrive settings" 3. "iDrive settings" 4. "Data privacy"
32 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 33
General settings At a glance
5. "Delete personal data" Connection type Function 6. "Delete personal data" Mobile device via Using the Internet. 7. "OK" the Internet hot‐ 8. Exit and lock the vehicle. spot.
After 15 minutes, the deletion process is com‐ USB memory de‐ Exporting and importing pleted. vice via USB port. driver profiles. If not all of the data was deleted, repeat the de‐ Performing software up‐ letion. dates. Canceling deletion Exporting and importing stored trips. Start the engine to cancel deletion of the data. Playing music.
Apple iPhone via Use Apple CarPlay apps Connections Apple CarPlay via iDrive and voice oper‐ ation, see the Owner's Concept Manual for Navigation, Mobile devices, such as mobile phones or lap‐ Entertainment and Com‐ tops, can be connected to the vehicle in differ‐ munication. ent ways and used. Safety information General information WARNING The following connection types require one- time pairing with the vehicle: Operating the integrated information systems and communication devices while ▷ Bluetooth. driving can distract from traffic. It is possible to ▷ Internet hotspot. lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an ▷ Apple CarPlay accident. Only use the systems or devices when the traffic situation allows. If necessary, Paired devices are automatically recognized stop and use the systems and devices while later on and connected to the vehicle. the vehicle is stationary.◀ The following functions are possible: Connection type Function Displaying the device list Mobile phone via Making calls. All devices paired and/or connected with the vehicle are displayed in the device list. Bluetooth. Office functions. Using iDrive: Audio player/ Playing music. smartphone via 1. "My Vehicle" Bluetooth or USB 2. "iDrive settings" port. 3. "Mobile devices" Smartphone via Using apps. A symbol indicates, for which function a device Bluetooth or USB is used. port.
33 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 34
At a glance General settings
Symbol Function ▷ The device is ready for operation. ▷ Bluetooth is activated on the device and in "Telephone" the vehicle, refer to page 34. "Additional telephone" ▷ Bluetooth pre-settings may be required on the device, for instance visibility, refer to "Bluetooth® audio" the owner's manual of the device. "Apps" ▷ A number with at least four and a maximum of 16 digits should be defined as the Blue‐ "Internet hotspot" tooth passkey. Required for one-time pair‐ "Apple CarPlay" ing only.
Activating Bluetooth Bluetooth connection About iDrive: Compatible devices 1. "My Vehicle"
General information 2. "iDrive settings" Details on which mobile devices with a Blue‐ 3. "Mobile devices" tooth interface are supported can be obtained 4. "Settings" from www.bmwusa.com/bluetooth. 5. "Bluetooth®" Malfunctions may occur with devices not listed or deviating software versions. Activating/deactivating telephone functions Displaying the vehicle identification To use all supported functions of a mobile number and software part number phone, the following functions must be acti‐ The vehicle identification number and software vated prior to pairing. part number are needed to determine which Using iDrive: devices are supported. The software version of the mobile phone may also be required. 1. "My Vehicle" About iDrive: 2. "iDrive settings" 3. "Mobile devices" 1. "My Vehicle" 4. "Settings" 2. "iDrive settings" 5. Select desired setting: 3. "Mobile devices" ▷ "Office" 4. "Settings" Activate function to transmit short 5. "Bluetooth® info" messages, e-mails, calendars, tasks, 6. "System information" notes, and reminders to the vehicle. A software update, refer to page 38, can be Costs can be incurred by transmitting performed, if needed. all data to the vehicle. ▷ "Contact images" Functional requirements Activate function to show the contact ▷ The remote control is in the vehicle. pictures. ▷ Compatible device, refer to page 34. 6. Move the Controller to the left.
34 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 35
General settings At a glance
Pairing the mobile device with the ▷ Mobile phones supported by the USB in‐ vehicle terface. Using iDrive: The snap-in adapter features a separate USB port that is automatically connected 1. "My Vehicle" when a compatible mobile phone is in‐ 2. "iDrive settings" serted. 3. "Mobile devices" ▷ Audio devices with USB port, for instance 4. "Connect new device" MP3 player. 5. Select the functions for which the device is ▷ USB storage devices. to be used: Common file systems are supported. ▷ "Telephone" FAT32 and exFAT are the recommended ▷ "Bluetooth® audio" formats. ▷ "Apps" Information about compatible USB media can be found at www.bmwusa.com/bluetooth. ▷ "Apple CarPlay" Malfunctions may occur with devices not listed The Bluetooth name of the vehicle is dis‐ or deviating software versions. played on the Control Display. The following applications are possible: 6. Search for Bluetooth devices in the vicinity of the mobile device. ▷ Exporting and importing driver profiles, re‐ fer to page 54. The Bluetooth name of the vehicle appears on the mobile device display. ▷ Playing music files via USB audio. Select the Bluetooth name of the vehicle. ▷ Playing videos via USB video. 7. Depending on the mobile device, a control ▷ Loading of software updates, refer to number is displayed or the control number page 38. must be entered. Observe the following when connecting: ▷ Compare the control number displayed ▷ Do not use force when plugging the con‐ on the Control Display with the control nector into the USB interface. number on the display of the device. ▷ Use a flexible adapter cable. Confirm the control number on the de‐ ▷ Protect the USB storage device against vice and on the Control Display. mechanical damage. ▷ Enter and confirm the same control ▷ Due to the large number of USB media number on the device and via iDrive. available on the market, it cannot be guar‐ The device is connected and displayed in anteed that every device is operable on the the device list. vehicle. If connection was not successful: Frequently ▷ Do not expose USB media to extreme envi‐ Asked Questions, refer to page 39. ronmental conditions, such as very high temperatures; refer to the owner's manual USB connection of the device. ▷ Due to the many different compression General information techniques, proper playback of the media Mobile devices with USB port can be con‐ stored on the USB storage device cannot nected to the USB interface. be guaranteed in all cases.
35 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 36
At a glance General settings
▷ A connected USB storage device will be Activating the Internet hotspot supplied with charging current via the USB Using iDrive: interface if the device supports this. At higher temperatures, the USB storage de‐ 1. "My Vehicle" vice may cause a reduction in the charging 2. "iDrive settings" current. 3. "Mobile devices" ▷ To ensure proper transmission of the 4. "Settings" stored data, do not charge a USB storage device via the onboard socket, when it is 5. "Internet hotspot" connected to the USB interface. Connecting device with Internet ▷ Depending on how the USB storage device hotspot is being used, settings may be required on the USB storage device, refer to the own‐ Using iDrive: er's manual of the device. 1. "My Vehicle" Not compatible USB media: 2. "iDrive settings" ▷ USB hard drives. 3. "Mobile devices" ▷ USB hubs. 4. "Connect new device" ▷ USB memory card readers with multiple in‐ 5. "Internet hotspot" serts. Hotspot name and hotspot code are dis‐ ▷ HFS-formatted USB media. played on the Control Display. ▷ Devices such as fans or lamps. 6. Search for WiFi networks on the device. Select network name on the device. Connecting the device 7. Enter hotspot code on the device and con‐ Connect the USB storage device using a suita‐ nect. ble adapter cable to a USB interface, refer to With the first Internet usage via the Internet page 186. hotspot, data volume must be purchased from The USB storage device is connected to the a service provider. vehicle and displayed in the device list. All devices connected via the Internet hotspot use this data volume. Internet connection If necessary, data volume can be purchased General information from the ConnectedDrive Store. Up to 8 devices can be connected with the In‐ Settings ternet hotspot. The network name and hotspot code can be Functional requirements changed. In addition, the network name can be hidden so that it cannot be found by other de‐ ▷ ConnectedDrive contract. vices. ▷ Data contract with a service provider. Via iDrive: ▷ WiFi-capable device. 1. "My Vehicle" ▷ WiFi activated on the device. 2. "iDrive settings" ▷ Internet hotspot activated in the vehicle. 3. "Mobile devices" ▷ The ignition is switched on.
36 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 37
General settings At a glance
Connecting a specific device 4. Press button. About iDrive: 5. ▷ "Change hotspot key" 1. "My Vehicle" Enter the desired hotspot code. 2. "iDrive settings" ▷ "Change hotspot name" 3. "Mobile devices" Enter the desired network name. 4. Select device. ▷ "Hide hotspot" 5. "Connect device" Activate or deactivate the function. The functions that were assigned to the device 6. To confirm entry of the hotspot code or the before disconnecting are assigned to the de‐ name of the network: vice when it is reconnected. If the device is al‐ Select the symbol. ready connected, these functions are deacti‐ vated. Additional functions Disconnecting the device Following the initial pairing The connection of the device to the vehicle is ▷ The device is connected with the vehicle disconnected. within a short period of time if the engine is The device remains paired and can be con‐ running or ignition is switched on. nected again, refer to page 37. ▷ The data stored on the SIM card or in the Via iDrive: mobile phone are transferred to the vehicle after recognition. 1. "My Vehicle" ▷ For some devices, certain settings may be 2. "iDrive settings" necessary, e.g., authorization, see owner's 3. "Mobile devices" manual of the device. 4. Select device. ▷ After one-time pairing, the devices are au‐ 5. "Disconnect device" tomatically recognized and reconnected when the ignition is switched on. Deleting the device Configuring the device The device is disconnected and removed from the device list. Functions can be activated or deactivated for paired and connected devices. About iDrive: Via iDrive: 1. "My Vehicle" 1. "My Vehicle" 2. "iDrive settings" 2. "iDrive settings" 3. "Mobile devices" 3. "Mobile devices" 4. Select device. 4. Select the desired device. 5. "Delete device" 5. Select the desired setting. If a function is assigned to a device, the func‐ tion will be deactivated where appropriate for a device that is already connected and the de‐ vice will be disconnected.
37 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 38
At a glance General settings
Swapping the telephone and About iDrive: additional phone 1. Store the file for the software update in the If two mobile phones are connected to the ve‐ main directory of a USB flash drive. hicle, the functions of the phone and additional 2. Connect the USB data storage to an USB phone can be switched. interface. Using iDrive: 3. "My Vehicle" 1. "My Vehicle" 4. "iDrive settings" 2. "iDrive settings" 5. "Software update" 3. "Mobile devices" 6. "Update software" 4. "Settings" 7. "USB" 5. "Swap telephone/additional tel." 8. "Install software" 9. "OK" Software update 10. Await the updating. General information 11. Confirm system restart. The vehicle supports a large number of mobile devices, e.g., mobile phones and MP3 players. Updating software via BMW Software updates are available for many of the Teleservices supported devices. The vehicle is maintained Updating software via BMW Teleservices is up-to-date via regular vehicle software up‐ country-specific and may not be available. dates. The software is first transferred into the vehicle Updates and related current information is and can then be installed. The software can be available at www.bmw.com/update. installed at a time different from the time of transfer. Displaying the installed software The software can be transferred while driving, version and if the trip is interrupted it will resume auto‐ The software version installed in the vehicle is matically the next time the vehicle is driven. All displayed. other functions remain available during the About iDrive: transfer. Cellular network reception must be available for the transfer to take place. 1. "My Vehicle" The software may only be updated when the 2. "iDrive settings" vehicle is stationary. 3. "Software update" Using iDrive: 4. "Show current version" 1. "My Vehicle" If an update has been carried out before, select 2. "iDrive settings" the desired version to display additional infor‐ mation. 3. "Software update" 4. "Update software" Updating software via USB 5. "Teleservices" The software may only be updated when the 6. "Load update" vehicle is stationary. The update is loaded but not installed.
38 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 39
General settings At a glance
7. Install or delete the update. that, the mobile device does not function as ▷ "Install software" expected. The loaded update is installed. In this case, the following explanations can help: This step can be carried out at a later point in time. Why could the mobile phone not be paired or connected? ▷ "Remove update" ▷ Check that WiFi is activated in the vehicle. The loaded update is removed. Activate WiFi in the vehicle. The following steps are omitted. ▷ There are too many Bluetooth devices 8. "OK" connected to the mobile phone or vehicle. 9. Wait for the update to complete. Delete connections with other devices, if 10. Confirm system restart. needed. ▷ Delete all known Bluetooth connections Restoring the software version from the device list on the mobile phone The software version before the last software prior to connecting. update and the version before the first soft‐ Start new device search. ware update can be restored. ▷ The mobile phone is in power-save mode The software may only be restored when the or has only a limited remaining battery life. vehicle is stationary. Charge the mobile phone in the snap-in About iDrive: adapter, wireless charging tray or via the 1. "My Vehicle" charging cable. 2. "iDrive settings" ▷ Depending on the mobile phone, it is pos‐ 3. "Software update" sible that only one mobile phone can be connected to the vehicle. 4. "Restore software" Unpair the connected mobile phone from 5. ▷ "Previous version" the vehicle and pair and connect only one The previous software version is re‐ mobile phone. stored. Why does the mobile phone no longer react? ▷ "Default software settings" ▷ The applications on the mobile phone do The first software version is restored. not function anymore. 6. "Remove software" Switch the mobile phone off and on again. 7. "OK" ▷ Possibly too high or too low ambient tem‐ 8. Wait for restore. peratures for mobile phone operation. 9. Confirm system restart. Do not subject the mobile phone to ex‐ treme ambient temperatures. Frequently asked questions Why are no telephone functions available? Information on compatible mobile phones, re‐ ▷ The mobile phone may not be properly fer to page 34. configured, e.g., as Bluetooth audio device. All requirements are met and all required steps Connect the mobile phone with the tele‐ were completed in the specified order. Despite phone or additional phone function.
39 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 40
At a glance General settings
Why are no or not all phone book entries dis‐ played or why are they incomplete? ▷ Transmission of the phone book entries is not yet complete. ▷ It is possible that only the phone book en‐ tries of the mobile phone or the SIM card are transmitted. ▷ It may not be possible to display phone book entries with special characters. ▷ It may not be possible to transmit contacts from social networks. ▷ The number of phone book entries to be stored is too high. ▷ Data volume of the contact too large, e.g., due to stored information such as notes. Reduce the data volume of the contact. ▷ A mobile phone can only be connected as audio source or as telephone. Configure the mobile phone and connect it with the telephone or additional phone function. Why is the phone connection quality poor? ▷ The strength of the Bluetooth signal on the mobile phone can be adjusted, depending on the mobile phone. ▷ Insert the mobile phone into the snap-in adapter or place it in the area of the center console. ▷ Insert mobile phone into the wireless charging tray. ▷ Adjust the volume of the microphone and loudspeakers separately. If all points in this list have been checked and the required function is still not available, con‐ tact the hotline, a dealer’s service center or an‐ other qualified service center or repair shop.
40 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 41
Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle At a glance
Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle
Vehicle features and options Keyword search Search for information and descriptions by en‐ This chapter describes all standard, country- tering terms selected from the index. specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not Videos necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. The basic functions of selected systems are This also applies to safety-related functions explained in the videos. and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations Select components must be observed. 1. Press button. 2. "My Vehicle" Integrated Owner's Manual 3. "Owner's Manual" in the vehicle 4. Select desired setting.
Concept Scrolling through the owner's manual The Integrated Owner's Manual specifically Turn Controller, until the next or previous con‐ describes features and functions found in the tents are displayed. vehicle. The Integrated Owner's Manual can be displayed on the Control Display. Context help - Owner's Manual to the temporarily selected function Components of the Integrated You may open the relevant information di‐ Owner's Manual rectly. The Integrated owner's manual consists of four parts, which offer various levels of infor‐ Opening via iDrive mation or possible access. Change directly to the Options menu from the function on the Control Display: Quick Reference Guide The Quick Reference Guide provides informa‐ 1. Press button. tion how to operate the car, how to use basic vehicle functions and what to do in case of a 2. "Owner's Manual" breakdown. This information can also be dis‐ played while driving. Opening when a Check Control message is displayed Search by images Directly from the Check Control message on Image search provides information and de‐ the Control Display: scriptions. This is helpful when the terminol‐ "Owner's Manual" ogy for a feature is not at hand.
41 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 42
At a glance Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle
Changing between a function and the operating instructions To switch from a function, for instance radio, to the Owner's Manual on the Control Display and to alternate between the two displays:
1. Press button. 2. "Owner's Manual" 3. Select the desired page in the Owner's Manual.
4. Press button again to return to last displayed function.
5. Press button to return to the page of the Owner's Manual displayed last. To alternate continuously between the last dis‐ played function and the last displayed page of the Owner's Manual, repeat steps 4 & 5. Opens a new display every time.
Programmable memory buttons
General information The jumps into the Owner's Manual can be stored on the Programmable memory buttons, refer to page 24, and called up directly.
Storing 1. Select the desired entry point via iDrive: ▷ "Quick reference" ▷ "Search by pictures" ▷ "Keyword search" ▷ "Animations"
2. Press desired button and hold for more than 2 seconds.
Executing Press the corresponding button. The owner's manual is directly dis‐ played via the selected entry point.
42 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 43
Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle At a glance
43 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Controls
The information in this chapter helps you in confidently operating your vehicle. All features and accessories that are useful for driving and your safety, comfort and convenience are described here.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 46
Controls Opening and closing
Opening and closing
Vehicle features and options WARNING Unlocking from the inside is only possi‐ This chapter describes all standard, country- ble with special knowledge. specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not Persons who spend a lengthy time in the vehi‐ necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due cle while being exposed to extreme tempera‐ to the selected options or country versions. tures are at risk of injury or death. Do not lock This also applies to safety-related functions the vehicle from the outside when there are and systems. When using these functions and people in it.◀ systems, the applicable laws and regulations WARNING must be observed. Unattended children or animals can cause the vehicle to move and endanger them‐ Remote control selves and traffic, e.g., due to the following ac‐ tions: General information ▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button. The vehicle is supplied with two remote con‐ ▷ Releasing the parking brake. trols with integrated key. ▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐ Each remote control contains a replaceable dows. battery. Replace the battery, refer to ▷ Engaging selector lever position N. page 48. ▷ Using vehicle equipment. You may set the key functions depending on There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not the optional features and country-specific ver‐ leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐ sion. Settings, refer to page 56. hicle. Take the remote control with you when The vehicle stores personal settings for every exiting and lock the vehicle.◀ remote control. Driver profile, refer to page 54. Overview The remote controls hold information about re‐ quired maintenance. Service data in the re‐ mote control, refer to page 239.
Safety information WARNING People or animals in the vehicle can lock the doors from the inside and lock themselves in. In this case, the vehicle cannot be opened from the outside. There is a risk of injury. Take 1 Unlocking the remote control with you so that the vehicle 2 Locking can be opened from the outside.◀ 3 Unlocking the tailgate 4 Panic mode
46 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 47
Opening and closing Controls
Unlocking The windows are opened, as long as the but‐ ton on the remote control is pressed. Press button on the remote control. With Comfort Access: Depending on the settings, refer to page 56, If close to the vehicle, the hardtop is also the following access points are unlocked. opened. ▷ Driver's door and fuel filler flap. Press and hold this button on the re‐ Press the button of the remote control mote control until the hardtop is fully again to unlock the other vehicle access opened and the hardtop well storage cover is points. fully closed. ▷ All doors, tailgate, and fuel filler flap. Leaving the vicinity of the vehicle stops the In addition, the following functions are exe‐ motion. cuted: ▷ The settings stored in the driver profile, re‐ Locking fer to page 54, are applied. 1. Close the driver's door. ▷ The interior lights are switched on, unless they were manually switched off. Switching 2. Press button on the remote control. the interior lights on and off manually, refer ▷ All doors, the tailgate, and the fuel filler flap to page 115. are being locked. ▷ The exterior lighting activated in the set‐ ▷ The alarm system, refer to page 57, is tings, refer to page 56, is switched on. switched on. ▷ Automatically folded in exterior mirrors are If the engine or ignition is still switched on folded open. This function must be acti‐ when you lock the vehicle, the vehicle horn vated in the settings. honks twice. In this case, the engine or ignition ▷ The alarm system, refer to page 57, is must be switched off by means of the Start/ switched off. Stop button. The light functions may depend on the ambi‐ With Comfort Access: convenient ent brightness. closing Convenient opening Safety information Safety information WARNING WARNING With convenient closing, body parts can be jammed. There is a risk of injury. Make sure Body parts can be jammed when open‐ that the area of movement of the doors is clear ing and closing the hardtop. There is a risk of during convenient closing.◀ injury. When opening and closing the hardtop, observe the movement and keep the area of WARNING movement clear.◀ Body parts can be jammed when open‐ ing and closing the hardtop. There is a risk of Opening injury. When opening and closing the hardtop, Press and hold this button on the re‐ observe the movement and keep the area of mote control. movement clear.◀
47 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 48
Controls Opening and closing
Closing Safety information Press and hold this button on the remote WARNING control in the area close to the vehicle. Body parts can be jammed when operat‐ ing the tailgate. There is a risk of injury. Make The windows and hardtop close. sure that the area of movement of the tailgate Press and hold the button of the remote con‐ is clear during opening and closing.◀ trol, until the hardtop and the hardtop well storage cover are fully closed. NOTE Releasing the button or leaving the vicinity of During opening, the tailgate pivots back the vehicle stops the motion. and up. There is a risk of property damage. Make sure that the area of movement of the Switching on interior lights and tailgate is clear during opening and closing.◀ courtesy light Press button on the remote control with Opening the vehicle locked. Press button on the remote control for approx. 1 second. This function is not available, if the interior lights were switched off manually. The tailgate is unlocked and can be swung up‐ The light functions may depend on the ambi‐ ward. ent brightness. After locking, wait 10 seconds before pressing Panic mode the button again. You can trigger the alarm system if you find yourself in a dangerous situation. Tailgate ▷ Press button on the remote con‐ trol and hold for at least 3 sec‐ General information onds. To avoid locking it in the vehicle, do not place ▷ Briefly press the button on the remote con‐ the remote control in the cargo area. trol three times in succession. Depending on your vehicle's equipment and the country version, it is possible to specify To switch off the alarm: press any button. whether the doors are also unlocked when un‐ locking with the remote control. Adjusting the Replacing the battery settings, refer to page 56. 1. Remove the integrated key from the re‐ The tailgate can normally not be opened if the mote control, refer to page 50. hardtop is not fully opened or closed. If the tail‐ 2. Place the integrated key underneath the gate can be opened, make sure it does not col‐ battery compartment cover, arrow 1, and lide with the hardtop well storage cover.
48 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 49
Opening and closing Controls
lift the cover with a lever movement of the Malfunction integrated key, arrow 2. General information A Check Control message is displayed. Remote control detection by the vehicle may malfunction under the following circumstan‐ ces: ▷ The battery of the remote control is dis‐ charged. Replacing the battery, refer to page 48. ▷ Interference of the radio connection from 3. Push battery in the direction of the arrow transmission towers or other equipment using a pointed object and lift it out. with high transmitting power. ▷ Shielding of the remote control due to metal objects. Do not transport the remote control to‐ gether with metal objects. ▷ Interference of the radio connection from mobile phones or other electronic devices in direct proximity to the remote control. Do not transport the remote control to‐ gether with electronic devices. 4. Insert a type CR 2450 battery with the pos‐ itive side facing up. ▷ Interference of radio transmission by a charging process of mobile devices, for in‐ 5. Press the cover closed. stance charging of a mobile phone. 6. Push the integrated key into the remote ▷ The remote control is in direct proximity of control until it engages. the wireless charging tray. Have old batteries disposed of by a Place the remote control down at a differ‐ dealer’s service center or another ent location. qualified service center or repair shop In the case of interference, the vehicle can be or take them to a collection point. unlocked and locked from the outside with the integrated key, refer to page 50. Additional remote controls Additional remote controls are available from a dealer’s service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.
Loss of the remote controls A lost remote control can be blocked and re‐ placed by a dealer’s service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.
49 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 50
Controls Opening and closing
Starting the engine via emergency NOTE detection of the remote control The door lock is permanently joined with the door. The door handle can be moved. When pulling the door handle with the integrated key inserted, paint or key can be damaged. There is a risk of property damage. Remove the integrated key before pulling the outside door handle.◀
Removing
1. Hold the remote control with its back against the marked area on the steering column. 2. Start the engine within 10 seconds. If the remote control is not detected, slightly change the position of the remote control and repeat the procedure.
Press the button, arrow 1, and pull out the Integrated key integrated key, arrow 2.
General information Locking/unlocking via the door lock The driver's door can be locked and unlocked without remote control using the integrated key. The integrated key can also be used for the glove compartment on the front passenger side.
Safety information WARNING Unlocking from the inside is only possi‐ Unlock or lock the driver's door via the door ble with special knowledge. lock using the integrated key. Persons who spend a lengthy time in the vehi‐ The other doors must be unlocked or locked cle while being exposed to extreme tempera‐ from the inside. tures are at risk of injury or death. Do not lock the vehicle from the outside when there are Alarm system people in it.◀ The alarm system is not switched on if the ve‐ hicle is locked with the integrated key.
50 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 51
Opening and closing Controls
The alarm system is triggered when the door is door, the second time opens it. The other opened, if the vehicle has been unlocked via doors remain locked. the door lock. In order to stop the alarm, unlock the vehicle with the remote control or switch on the igni‐ Comfort Access tion, if needed, through emergency detection of the remote control, refer to page 50. Concept The vehicle can be accessed without activat‐ ing the remote control. Button for central locking All you need to do is to have the remote con‐ system trol with you, such as in your pants pocket. The vehicle automatically detects the remote General information control when it is in close proximity or in the In the event of a severe accident, the vehicle is vehicle's interior. automatically unlocked. The hazard warning system and interior lights come on. General information Comfort Access supports the following func‐ Overview tions: ▷ Unlocking and locking the vehicle. ▷ Opening tailgate.
Functional requirements ▷ To lock the vehicle, the remote control must be located outside of the vehicle near the doors. ▷ The next unlocking and locking cycle is not possible until after approx. 2 seconds. Button for the central locking system. Unlocking Unlocking and locking Press button. For locking, the doors must be closed. ▷ The fuel filler flap remains unlocked. ▷ The vehicle is not secured against theft when locking.
Opening
▷ Press button to unlock the doors Grasp the door handle on the driver's or front together, and then pull the door handle passenger door completely. above the armrest. This corresponds with pressing the button ▷ On the door to be opened, pull the door on the remote control. handle twice: the first time unlocks the
51 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 52
Controls Opening and closing
Locking Opening
Touch the surface on the door handle of the Press button on the tailgate. driver's or front passenger door with your fin‐ This corresponds with pressing the button ger for approx. 1 second without grasping the on the remote control. door handle. This corresponds with pressing the button The tailgate is unlocked and can be swung up‐ on the remote control. ward.
Malfunction Open tailgate Remote control detection by the vehicle may malfunction under the following circumstan‐ General information ces: If you open the tailgate via Comfort Access, ▷ The battery of the remote control is dis‐ locked doors will not be unlocked. charged. Replace the battery, refer to To avoid locking it in the vehicle, do not place page 48. the remote control in the cargo area. ▷ Interference of the radio connection from transmission towers or other equipment Safety information with high transmitting power. WARNING ▷ Shielding of the remote control due to Body parts can be jammed when operat‐ metal objects. ing the tailgate. There is a risk of injury. Make Do not transport the remote control to‐ sure that the area of movement of the tailgate gether with metal objects. is clear during opening and closing.◀ ▷ Interference of the radio connection from NOTE mobile phones or other electronic devices During opening, the tailgate pivots back in direct proximity to the remote control. and up. There is a risk of property damage. Do not transport the remote control to‐ Make sure that the area of movement of the gether with electronic devices. tailgate is clear during opening and closing.◀ In the case of a malfunction, unlock and lock the vehicle using the buttons of the remote control or using the integrated key, refer to page 50.
52 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 53
Opening and closing Controls
Tailgate Press button on the tailgate. ▷ Press button on the remote con‐ General information trol for approx. 1 second. To avoid locking it in the vehicle, do not place Depending on the setting, the doors may the remote control in the cargo area. also be unlocked. Unlocking with the re‐ Depending on your vehicle's equipment and mote control, refer to page 48. the country version, it is possible to specify The tailgate opens slightly and can be swung whether the doors are also unlocked when un‐ upward. locking with the remote control. Adjusting the settings, refer to page 56. Opening from the inside The tailgate can normally not be opened if the hardtop is not fully opened or closed. If the tail‐ With the vehicle stationary, press the gate can be opened, make sure it does not col‐ button in the driver's floor area. lide with the hardtop well storage cover. Closing Safety information WARNING Body parts can be jammed when operat‐ ing the tailgate. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the area of movement of the tailgate is clear during opening and closing.◀
NOTE During opening, the tailgate pivots back and up. There is a risk of property damage. Grasp the recess grip and pull tailgate down. Make sure that the area of movement of the tailgate is clear during opening and closing.◀ The loading aid, refer to page 187, can be operated us‐ Opening and closing ing the tailgate buttons.
Opening from the outside
Trunk emergency unlocking
▷ Without Comfort Access: unlock vehicle. With Comfort Access: unlock the vehicle or Pull the handle inside the cargo area. have the remote control with you.
53 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 54
Controls Opening and closing
The tailgate unlocks. ▷ The driver is only carrying his or her own remote control. ▷ The driver unlocks the vehicle. Driver profile ▷ The driver gets into the vehicle through the driver's door. Concept In the driver profiles, individual settings for Settings several drivers can be stored and called up The settings for the following systems and again when required. functions are stored in the active profile. The scope of storable settings depends on country General information and equipment. There are three driver profiles with which per‐ ▷ Unlocking and locking. sonal vehicle settings can be stored. Every re‐ ▷ Lights. mote control has one of these driver profiles ▷ Climate control. assigned. ▷ Radio. If the vehicle is unlocked using a remote con‐ trol, the assigned personal driver profile will be ▷ Instrument cluster. activated. All settings stored in the driver pro‐ ▷ Programmable memory buttons. file are automatically applied. ▷ Volumes, tone. If several drivers use their own remote control, ▷ Control Display. the vehicle will adjust the personal settings ▷ Navigation. during unlocking. These settings are also re‐ stored, if the vehicle has been used in the ▷ PDC Park Distance Control. meantime by a person with a different remote ▷ Rearview camera. control. ▷ Side View. Changes to the settings are automatically ▷ Top View. stored in the driver profile currently activated. ▷ Head-up Display. If another driver profile is selected via iDrive, the settings stored in it will be applied auto‐ ▷ Driving Dynamics Control. matically. The new driver profile is assigned to ▷ Intelligent Safety. the remote control currently used. ▷ Active Blind Spot Detection. There is an additional guest profile available that is not assigned to any remote control. It Profile management can be used to apply settings in the vehicle without changing the personal driver profiles. Selecting a driver profile Regardless of the remote control in use, a dif‐ Functional requirements ferent driver profile may be activated. This al‐ For the system to be able to identify the driver lows you to call up personal vehicle settings, profile associated to a particular driver, the de‐ even if you did not unlock the vehicle with your tected remote control must be clearly allo‐ own remote control. cated to the driver. This is the case when:
54 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 55
Opening and closing Controls
Using iDrive: Resetting a driver profile 1. "My Vehicle" The settings of the driver profile currently in use are reset to their factory settings. 2. "Driver profiles" Using iDrive: 3. Select driver profile. 4. "OK" 1. "My Vehicle" ▷ All settings stored in the called-up driver 2. "Driver profiles" profile are automatically applied. 3. Select driver profile. ▷ The called-up driver profile is assigned to The driver profile marked with this sym‐ the remote control being used at the time. bol can be reset. ▷ If the driver profile is already assigned to a 4. "Reset driver profile" different remote control, this driver profile 5. "OK" will apply to both remote controls. Exporting driver profiles Using a guest profile Most settings of the active driver profile can be The guest profile is for individual settings that exported. are stored in none of the three personal driver Exporting can be helpful for storing and re‐ profiles. trieving personal settings, for instance before Using iDrive: delivering the vehicle to a workshop. The 1. "My Vehicle" stored driver profiles can be taken into another vehicle. 2. "Driver profiles" Using iDrive: 3. "Drive off (guest)" 4. "OK" 1. "My Vehicle" The guest profile cannot be renamed. It is not 2. "Driver profiles" assigned to the current remote control. 3. Select driver profile. The driver profile marked with this sym‐ Renaming a driver profile bol can be exported. A personal name can be assigned to the active 4. "Export driver profile" driver profile to avoid confusion between the 5. Select a storage device for exporting the driver profiles. driver profile. Using iDrive: ▷ "USB device" 1. "My Vehicle" Select USB storage device, as needed, 2. "Driver profiles" refer to page 35. 3. Select driver profile. ▷ Online. The driver profile marked with this sym‐ bol can be renamed. Importing driver profiles 4. "Change driver profile name" The existing settings of the active driver profile are overwritten with the settings of the im‐ 5. Enter profile name. ported driver profile. 6. Select the symbol.
55 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 56
Controls Opening and closing
Using iDrive: Settings 1. "My Vehicle" General information 2. "Driver profiles" Depending on your vehicle's equipment and 3. Select the driver profile to be overwritten. the country version, various settings for open‐ The driver profile marked with this sym‐ ing and closing are possible. bol can be overwritten. These settings are stored for the driver profile, 4. "Import driver profile" refer to page 54, currently used. 5. Select a storage device for importing the driver profile. Unlocking ▷ USB storage device: "USB device" Doors Select USB storage device as needed. Using iDrive: ▷ Online. 1. "My Vehicle" 6. Select the driver profile to be imported. 2. "Vehicle settings" Displaying driver profiles during start 3. "Doors/Key" The driver profiles can be displayed during 4. "Driver's door" or "All doors" each start to select the desired profile. 5. Select desired setting: Via iDrive: ▷ "Driver's door only" 1. "My Vehicle" Only the driver's door and the fuel filler 2. "Driver profiles" flap are unlocked. Pressing again un‐ locks the entire vehicle. 3. "Show driver profiles at startup" ▷ "All doors" System limits The entire vehicle is unlocked. A clear assignment between the remote con‐ trol and driver may not be possible in the fol‐ Tailgate lowing cases, for example. Depending on optional features and country ▷ The passenger unlocks the vehicle with his version, this setting is not offered in some or her own remote control, but another cases. person is driving. Using iDrive: ▷ The driver unlocks the vehicle via Comfort 1. "My Vehicle" Access and has multiple remote controls with him or her. 2. "Vehicle settings" ▷ The driver changes, but the vehicle is not 3. "Doors/Key" locked and unlocked. 4. "Tailgate" or "Tailgate and ▷ Multiple remote controls are located out‐ door(s)" side of the vehicle. 5. Select desired setting: ▷ "Tailgate" The tailgate unlocks. ▷ "Tailgate and door(s)"
56 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 57
Opening and closing Controls
The tailgate and the doors are un‐ After the engine is switched off by pressing locked. the Start/Stop button, the locked vehicle is automatically unlocked. Confirmation signals from the vehicle Using iDrive: Adjusting the last seat and mirror position 1. "My Vehicle" When the vehicle is unlocked, the driver's seat 2. "Vehicle settings" and exterior mirrors resume their last set posi‐ 3. "Doors/Key" tions. 4. Deactivate or activate the desired confir‐ Using iDrive: mation signals. 1. "My Vehicle" ▷ "Flash for lock/unlock" 2. "Driver profiles" Unlocking is signaled by two flashes, 3. Select driver profile. locking by one. The setting can be made for the driver ▷ With alarm system: profile marked with this symbol. "Acoustic signal for lock/unlock" 4. "Last seat position automatic" Unlocking is signaled by one honk of the horn. Alarm system Automatic locking Using iDrive: General information 1. "My Vehicle" When the vehicle is locked, the vehicle alarm system reacts to the following changes: 2. "Vehicle settings" ▷ Unauthorized opening of a door, the hood 3. "Doors/Key" or the tailgate. 4. Select desired setting: ▷ Movements in the car's interior. ▷ "Lock automatically" ▷ Changes in the vehicle tilt, e. g., during at‐ The vehicle locks automatically after a tempts at stealing a wheel or when towing short period of time if no door is the vehicle. opened after unlocking. ▷ Disconnected battery voltage. ▷ "Lock after starting to drive" The alarm system signals these changes visu‐ The vehicle locks automatically after ally and acoustically: you drive off. ▷ Acoustic alarm. Automatic unlocking Depending on local regulations, the acous‐ tic alarm may be suppressed. Using iDrive: ▷ By switching on the hazard warning sys‐ 1. "My Vehicle" tem. 2. "Vehicle settings" ▷ By flashing the daytime running lights. 3. "Doors/Key" 4. "Unlock at end of trip"
57 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 58
Controls Opening and closing
Switching on and off are not correctly closed. Correctly closed When you lock and unlock the vehicle with the access points are secured. remote control or with Comfort Access, the When the still open access points are alarm system is switched on and off at the closed, interior motion sensor and tilt alarm same time. sensor will be switched on. ▷ The indicator light goes out after unlock‐ Opening the doors with the alarm ing: system switched on The vehicle has not been tampered with. The alarm system is triggered when a door is ▷ The indicator light flashes after unlocking opened if the door was unlocked using the until the engine ignition is switched on, but integrated key in the door lock. no longer than approx. 5 minutes: Switching off the alarm, refer to page 59. An alarm has been triggered. Panic mode You can trigger the alarm system if you find Tilt alarm sensor yourself in a dangerous situation. The tilt of the vehicle is monitored. ▷ Press button on the remote con‐ The alarm system responds in situations such trol and hold for at least 3 sec‐ as attempts to steal a wheel or when the vehi‐ onds. cle is towed. ▷ Briefly press the button on the remote con‐ Interior motion sensor trol three times in succession. The car's interior is monitored to the height of To switch off the alarm: press any button. the seats. The alarm system is switched on to‐ gether with the interior motion sensor even Indicator light on the interior mirror when the hardtop is open. Falling objects such as leaves can trigger the alarm unintentionally.
Avoiding unintentional alarms
General information The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sen‐ sor can trigger an alarm, although no unauthor‐ ized action occurred. Possible situations for an unwanted alarm: ▷ The indicator light flashes briefly every ▷ In automatic vehicle washes. 2 seconds: ▷ In duplex garages. The alarm system is switched on. ▷ During transport on trains carrying vehi‐ ▷ Indicator light flashes for approx. 10 sec‐ cles, at sea or on a trailer. onds, then it flashes briefly every 2 sec‐ ▷ With animals in the vehicle. onds: The tilt alarm sensor and the interior motion Interior motion sensor and tilt alarm sensor sensor can be switched off in such situations. are not active, as doors, hood, or tailgate
58 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 59
Opening and closing Controls
Switching off the tilt alarm sensor and ▷ Engaging selector lever position N. interior motion sensor ▷ Using vehicle equipment. Press the remote control button again There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not within 10 seconds as soon as the vehicle leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐ is locked. hicle. Take the remote control with you when The indicator lamp lights up for approx. 2 sec‐ exiting and lock the vehicle.◀ onds and then continues to flash. The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sen‐ Overview sor are turned off until the vehicle is locked again.
Switching off the alarm ▷ Unlock the vehicle with the remote control or switch on the ignition, if needed through emergency detection of remote control, re‐ fer to page 49. ▷ With Comfort Access: Power windows If you are carrying the remote control on your person, grasp the door handle on the driver's or front passenger door com‐ Opening individually pletely.
▷ Press the switch to the resistance Power windows point. The window opens while the switch is be‐ Safety information ing held.
WARNING ▷ Press the switch beyond the resist‐ When operating the windows, body parts ance point. and objects can be jammed. There is a risk of The window opens automatically. Pressing injury or risk of property damage. Make sure the switch again stops the motion. that the area of movement of the windows is Convenient opening via the remote control, re‐ clear during opening and closing.◀ fer to page 47. WARNING Opening together Unattended children or animals can cause the vehicle to move and endanger them‐ ▷ Press the switch to the resistance selves and traffic, e.g., due to the following ac‐ point. tions: All windows open while the switch is being ▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button. held. ▷ Releasing the parking brake. ▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐ ▷ Press the switch beyond the resist‐ dows. ance point.
59 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 60
Controls Opening and closing
All windows open automatically. Closing without the jam protection Pressing the switch again stops the mo‐ system tion. In case of danger from the outside or if ice might prevent normal closing, proceed as fol‐ Closing individually lows:
▷ Pull the switch to the resistance 1. Pull the switch past the resistance point. point and hold it there. The window closes while the switch is be‐ The window closes with limited jam pro‐ ing held. tection . If the closing force exceeds a spe‐ cific threshold, closing is interrupted. ▷ Pull the switch beyond the resistance point. 2. Pull the switch past the resistance With the door closed, the front windows point again within approx. 4 seconds and close automatically. Pulling the switch hold it there. again stops the motion. The rear windows The window closes without jam protec‐ close while the switch is being held. tion . Convenient closing via the remote control, re‐ fer to page 47. Hardtop Closing together Pull the switch to or beyond the resist‐ General information ance point. The hardtop can be opened and closed at All windows are closed while the switch is be‐ walking speed. ing held. If the vehicle is accelerated while the hardtop is in motion, the movement is stopped. Pinch protection system Observe the following information: ▷ The tailgate can normally not be opened if General information the hardtop is not fully opened or closed. If If closing force exceeds a specific threshold as the tailgate can be opened, make sure it a window closes, closing is interrupted. does not collide with the convertible top well storage cover. The window opens slightly. ▷ Close the hardtop when the vehicle is Safety information parked. A closed hardtop protects vehicle from weather-related damage and against WARNING theft. Accessories on the windows such as an‐ ▷ It is not possible to start the engine and tennas can impact jam protection. There is a operate the hardtop simultaneously. When risk of injury. Do not install accessories in the the engine is started using the Start/Stop area of movement of the windows.◀ button or using the Auto Start/Stop func‐ tion, the hardtop movement is briefly inter‐ rupted.
60 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 61
Opening and closing Controls
▷ Opening a door interrupts closure of the WARNING hardtop. When operating the hardtop while driv‐ ▷ Observe the information on loading the ing, the view to the rear may be limited. There cargo area, refer to page 186. is a danger of accidents and property damage. ▷ In order to protect the battery, move the When operating the hardtop while driving, ob‐ hardtop only when the engine is running if serve traffic attentively and if necessary, re‐ possible. duce speed. Do not operate while backing up or with wind.◀ ▷ Before closing the hardtop, remove any foreign objects from the windshield frame; WARNING otherwise, closing may be prevented. The hardtop is not suitable for the mounting of roof carrier systems. The roof car‐ Safety information rier could come loose. There is risk of an acci‐ NOTE dent. Do not attach any roof carrier systems to Incorrect operation can damage the the hardtop.◀ hardtop and other parts of the vehicle. NOTE There is a risk of property damage. During op‐ With a mounted bicycle carrier on the eration, heed the following points: trailer hitch, the tailgate can hit the bicycle car‐ ▷ Keep the area of movement of the hardtop rier while operating the hardtop. There is a risk clear because the hardtop swivels out up‐ of property damage. Do not open or close the ward. Area of movement: 79 Inches/2 me‐ hardtop when a bicycle carrier is mounted on ters. the trailer hitch.◀ ▷ Fully close the tailgate. NOTE ▷ Do not place objects on the hardtop. Objects on the cargo area partition or ▷ Do not open the hardtop, if it is wet, cov‐ pieces of luggage in the side area of the cargo ered in snow, iced up, or dirty. area can limit the area of movement of the ▷ The rollover protection system may not be hardtop and the loading aid. There is a risk of triggered. property damage. Make sure that the move‐ ▷ Do not operate hardtop on uneven sec‐ ment area of the hardtop and loading aid is tions of road. clear during operation.◀ ▷ Always open or close the hardtop com‐ pletely. The hardtop is only locked in the fi‐ Overview nal positions.◀ WARNING When opening and closing the hardtop, body parts can be jammed, for example by the mechanism. There is risk of injuries. Make sure that the area of movement of the hardtop is clear during operation.◀
Hardtop buttons
61 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 62
Controls Opening and closing
Functional requirements well storage cover is completely closed. Only if The following requirements must be fulfilled in the hardtop is completely open or closed, will order to be able to move the hardtop. the hardtop and hardtop well storage cover be locked. ▷ The ignition or radio-ready state must be switched on. The hardtop movement is interrupted if the switch is released. The sequence can be con‐ ▷ The cargo area partition, refer to tinued in the desired direction using the page 186, is folded down. switch. ▷ The loading aid, refer to page 186, is shut down. Operating from the outside ▷ The tailgate is closed. With Comfort Access: ▷ The external temperature is above The hardtop can also be operated from outside 14 ℉/-10 ℃. via Comfort Access. ▷ The voltage of the vehicle electrical system ▷ Convenient opening with remote opera‐ is sufficient. tion, refer to page 47. ▷ The hardtop drive is not overheating. ▷ Convenient closing with the remote con‐ ▷ The vehicle speed is not too high. trol, refer to page 47. ▷ The lateral tilt of the vehicle is not too great. Cargo area partition ▷ The windows can be lowered. If this requirement is not met, a check control message is displayed.
Operating from the inside
Opening Push the switch and hold it. Fold down cargo area partition in the back so The windows are rolled down, and the hardtop that the hardtop can be opened. opens as long as the switch is pulled. Fold down cargo area partition in the front in order to enlarge the cargo area capacity when Closing the hardtop is closed. Pull the switch and hold it.
The windows are lowered, the hardtop closes Wind deflector and the windows are raised again as long as the switch is pressed. The concept The wind deflector reduces the air movement Preventing an interruption in the vehicle interior when driving with the Push or pull the switch until the hardtop is hardtop down. completely open or closed and the end of the procedure is indicated by a Check Control message. Always make sure that the hardtop
62 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 63
Opening and closing Controls
Safety information Fold the rear seat backrest rearward. NOTE When moving the front seats back, the wind deflector can be damaged. There is a risk of property damage. Make sure that the area of movement is clear prior to moving the front seats back.◀
WARNING Body parts can be jammed on operating the wind deflector. There is risk of injuries. 3. Fold open the wind deflector. Make sure that the area of movement around the wind deflector is clear when installing and removing it and folding it up.◀
WARNING Objects placed on the installed wind de‐ flector can be thrown into the car's interior or endanger other traffic participants, for instance in case of an accident, braking or evasive ma‐ neuver. The objects can damage the wind de‐ flector. There is a risk of injury or risk of dam‐ 4. Insert wind deflector from one side of the age to property. Do not place any objects on vehicle with the pins in the corresponding the installed wind deflector.◀ fixing points on the opposite side of the ve‐ hicle. Installation 1. Unlock the rear seat backrest on the left or right side, arrow 1, and fold forward, ar‐ row 2.
5. Lift the wind deflector in the center, ar‐ row 1, until the pins on the installation side
2. Push transport lock, arrow up. Remove wind deflector.
63 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 64
Controls Opening and closing
can be positioned in front of the fixing 2. Place wind deflector in the orientation points, arrows 2. shown in the picture on the lower fixtures, arrow 2, and tilt it back. 3. Push the front transport lock down, ar‐ row 3.
6. Press the wind deflector downward, ar‐ rows 1, while inserting the pins in the cor‐ responding fixing points. Grasp the inner framework of the wind de‐ flector on the recessed grip and fold it up, arrow 2.
Removing Proceed in reverse sequence.
1. On vehicles with a through-loading sys‐ tem: fold rear transport locks down, ar‐ row 1.
64 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 65
Settings Controls
Settings
Vehicle features and options sliding under the safety belt in an accident. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Ad‐ This chapter describes all standard, country- just the seat prior to starting the trip. Adjust specific and optional features offered with the the backrest so that it is in the most upright series. It also describes features that are not position as possible and do not adjust again necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due while driving.◀ to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions WARNING and systems. When using these functions and There is a risk of jamming when moving systems, the applicable laws and regulations the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk of must be observed. property damage. Make sure that the area of movement of the seat is clear prior to any ad‐ justment.◀ Sitting safely An ideal seating position that meets the needs Electrically adjustable seats of the occupants can make a vital contribution to relaxed, fatigue-free driving. General information In the event of an accident, the correct seating The seat setting for the driver's seat is stored position plays an important role. Additionally, for the profile currently used. When the vehicle observe the following chapters for safe driving: is unlocked via the remote control, the position is automatically retrieved if the function, refer ▷ Seats, refer to page 65. to page 57, is activated for this purpose. ▷ Safety belts, refer to page 68. The current seat position can be stored using ▷ Head restraints, refer to page 70. the memory function, refer to page 71. ▷ Airbags, refer to page 117. Overview Seats
Safety information WARNING Seat adjustments while driving can lead to unexpected movements of the seat. Vehicle control could be lost. There is a risk of an acci‐ dent. Only adjust the seat on the driver's side when the vehicle is stationary.◀ 1 Memory function 2 Backrest width WARNING 3 Lumbar support With a backrest inclined too far to the rear, the protective effect of the safety belt 4 Backrest tilt cannot be ensured anymore. There is a risk of 5 Forward/backward, height, seat tilt
65 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 66
Controls Settings
Forward/backward Backrest tilt
Push switch forward or backward. Move switch forward or backward.
Height Thigh support
Push switch up or down. Pull the lever at the front of the seat and adjust the thigh support. Seat tilt Lumbar support The curvature of the seat backrest can be ad‐ justed in a way that it supports the lumbar re‐ gion of the spine. The lower back and the spine are supported for upright posture. ▷ Press the front/rear section of the button: The curvature is increased/ decreased. Move switch up or down. ▷ Press the upper/lower sec‐ tion of the button: The curvature is shifted up/ down.
66 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 67
Settings Controls
Backrest width Switching off Press and hold the button, until the General information LEDs go out. You can change the backrest width by adjust‐ ing the side wings of the backrest. Air collar Settings Concept ▷ Press the front section of The air collar ensures just the right tempera‐ the button: ture for the neck area via supply of warm air. The backrest width de‐ creases. Safety information ▷ Press the rear section of the NOTE button: By covering the vent of the air collar, the The backrest width in‐ heat cannot escape as intended. The heat creases. builds up. There is a risk of property damage. Do not cover the vents, e.g., with covers.◀ Front seat heating WARNING Overview Very hot air can escape from the vents. Thus, there is a risk of burns in the immediate area of the vents. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that sufficient distance from the vents is maintained. If necessary, adjust the air sup‐ ply.◀
Overview
Seat heating
Switching on Press button once for each tempera‐ ture level. The maximum temperature is reached when Air collar three LEDs are lit. If the trip is continued within approx. 15 mi‐ nutes after a stop, seat heating is activated au‐ Switching on tomatically with the temperature selected last. Press button once for each level. When ECO PRO is activated, the heater output is reduced. The maximum temperature and fan output is reached when three LEDs are lit.
67 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 68
Controls Settings
Switching off Overview Press and hold the button, until the LEDs are no longer illuminated.
Entering the rear
Safety information WARNING There is a risk of jamming when moving the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk of property damage. Make sure that the area of Operation movement of the seat is clear prior to any ad‐ Press the upper/lower section of justment.◀ the button: WARNING ▷ Press and hold this button Unexpected movements of the backrest until the seat has moved to while driving may occur due to an unlocked the desired position. Releas‐ backrest. Vehicle control could be lost. There ing the button stops win‐ is a risk of injury. Fold back and lock the back‐ dow/roof movement. rests before driving.◀ ▷ Press button briefly. The seat automati‐ cally moves to the respective end position. Folding down the backrest Pressing again stops the motion. 1. Pull lever up to the stop. Fold back and locking the backrest After entering the rear, fold the backrest back and lock it. Press button. The seat moves to its origi‐ nal position. Pressing again stops the motion.
Safety belts 2. Fold backrest forward. Number of safety belts and safety belt Changing the seat position buckles The vehicle is fitted with four safety belts to Requirements ensure occupant safety. However, they can ▷ Vehicle at a standstill. only offer protection when adjusted correctly. ▷ When the door is open, the seat is accessi‐ ble from the side on which the door is General information open. Always make sure that safety belts are being worn by all occupants before driving off. Al‐ though airbags enhance safety by providing
68 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 69
Settings Controls
added protection, they are not a substitute for accident at the dealer’s service center or an‐ safety belts. other qualified service center or repair shop.◀ The upper shoulder strap's anchorage point will be correct for adult seat occupants of ev‐ Correct use of safety belts ery build if the seat is correctly adjusted. ▷ Wear the safety belt twist-free and tight to your body over your lap and shoulders. Safety information ▷ Wear the safety belt deep on your hips WARNING over your lap. The safety belt may not If the safety belt is used to buckle more press on your stomach. than one person, the protective effect of the ▷ Do not rub the safety belt against sharp safety belt can no longer be ensured. There is edges, or guide it or jam it in across hard or a risk of injuries or danger to life. Do not allow fragile objects. more than one person to wear a single safety ▷ Avoid thick clothing. belt. Infants and children are not allowed on an occupant's lap, but must be transported and ▷ Re-tighten the safety belt frequently up‐ secured in designated child restraint sys‐ ward around your upper body. tems.◀ Buckling the safety belt WARNING 1. Slowly guide the safety belt out of the The protective effect of the safety belts holder when fastening it. can be limited or lost when safety belts are fas‐ 2. Insert the tongue plate into the safety belt tened incorrectly. An incorrectly fastened buckle. The safety belt buckle must en‐ safety belt can cause additional injuries, e.g., in gage audibly. the event of an accident or during braking and evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Make sure that all occupants are wearing safety belts correctly.◀
WARNING The protective effect of the safety belts may not be fully functional or fail in the follow‐ ing situations: ▷ The safety belts or safety belt buckles are damaged, soiled, or changed in any other Unbuckling the safety belt way. 1. Hold the safety belt firmly. ▷ Belt tensioners or belt retractors were modified. 2. Press the red button in the belt buckle. Safety belts can be imperceptibly damaged in 3. Guide the safety belt back into its roll-up the event of an accident. There is a risk of inju‐ mechanism. ries or danger to life. Do not modify safety belts, safety belt buckles, belt tensioners, belt retractors or belt anchors and keep them clean. Have the safety belts checked after an
69 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 70
Controls Settings
Safety belt reminder for driver's and ▷ Do not hang objects, e.g., clothes hangers, passenger's seat directly on the head restraint. ▷ Only use accessories that have been de‐ Display termined to be safe for attachment to a The indicator light lights up and a sig‐ head restraint. nal sounds. Make sure that the safety ▷ Do not use any accessories, e.g., pillows, belts are positioned correctly. The while driving.◀ safety belt reminder is active at speeds above approx. 6 mph/10 km/h. The safety belt re‐ Adjusting the height: basic seat minder can also be activated if objects are placed on the front passenger seat.
Front head restraints
Safety information WARNING A missing protective effect due to re‐ ▷ To raise: push the head restraint up. moved or not correctly adjusted head re‐ straints can cause injuries in the head and ▷ To lower: press button, arrow 1, and push neck area. There is a risk of injury. head restraint down. ▷ Before driving, install the removed head re‐ straints on the occupied seats. Adjusting the height: sport seat ▷ Adjust the head restraint so its center sup‐ The height of the head restraints cannot be ad‐ ports the back of the head at as close to justed. eye level as possible. ▷ Adjust the distance so that the head re‐ Adjusting distance straint is as close as possible to the back of the head. If necessary, adjust the distance by adjusting the tilt of the backrest.◀ WARNING Body parts can be jammed when moving the head restraint. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the area of movement is clear when moving the head restraint.◀
WARNING ▷ Forward: pull the head restraint toward the Objects on the head restraint reduce the front. protective effect in the head and neck area. ▷ Back: press the button and push the head There is a risk of injury. restraint toward the rear. ▷ Do not use seat or head restraint covers.
70 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 71
Settings Controls
Removing: basic seat Safety information Only remove the head restraint if no one will be WARNING sitting in the seat in question. Using the memory function while driving can lead to unexpected movements of the seat. Vehicle control could be lost. There is a risk of an accident. Only retrieve the memory function when the vehicle is stationary.◀
WARNING There is a risk of jamming when moving the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk of property damage. Make sure that the area of 1. Raise the head restraint up against the re‐ movement of the seat is clear prior to any ad‐ sistance. justment.◀ 2. Press the button, arrow 1, and pull the head restraint out completely. Overview
Removing: sport seat The head restraints cannot be removed.
Memory function
Concept The following settings can be stored and, if necessary, retrieved using the memory func‐ Storing tion: 1. Switch on the ignition. ▷ Seat position. 2. Set the desired position. ▷ Exterior mirror position.
▷ Height of the Head-up Display. 3. Press button. The LED in the but‐ ton lights up. General information 4. Press selected button 1 or 2 while the LED Two memory locations with different settings is lit. The LED goes out. can be set for each driver profile, refer to page 54. Button was pressed inadvertently: Depending on the vehicle equipment, the fol‐ Press button again. lowing settings are not stored: The LED goes out. ▷ Backrest width. ▷ Lumbar support. Calling up settings The stored position is called up automatically. Press selected button 1 or 2.
71 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 72
Controls Settings
The procedure stops when a switch for setting Overview the seat or one of the memory buttons is pressed. While driving, the seat position adjustment on the driver's side is interrupted after a short time.
Calling up of a seat position deactivated After a brief period, calling up stored seat posi‐ tions is deactivated to save battery power. 1 Settings To reactivate calling up of a seat position: 2 Selecting a mirror, Automatic Curb Monitor ▷ Open and close the door or tailgate. 3 Folding in and out ▷ Press a button on the remote control. ▷ Press the Start/Stop button. Selecting a mirror To change over to the other mirror: Mirrors Slide the switch.
Exterior mirrors Adjusting electrically
General information Press button. The mirror on the front passenger side is more The mirror movement follows the but‐ curved than the driver's side mirror. ton movement. The mirror setting is stored for the driver pro‐ file currently in use. When the vehicle is un‐ Malfunction locked via the remote control, the position is In case of an electrical malfunction, adjust the automatically retrieved if the function, refer to mirror by pressing the edges of the mirror page 57, is activated for this purpose. glass. The current exterior mirror position can be stored using the memory function, refer to Automatic Curb Monitor, exterior page 71. mirror
Safety information Concept WARNING If reverse gear is engaged, the mirror glass on the front passenger side is tilted downward. Objects reflected in the mirror are closer This improves your view of the curb and other than they appear. The distance to the traffic low-lying obstacles when parking, for instance. behind could be incorrectly estimated, for in‐ stance while changing lanes. There is a risk of Activating an accident. Estimate the distance to the traffic behind by looking over your shoulder.◀ 1. Slide the switch to the driver's side mirror position.
72 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 73
Settings Controls
2. Engage selector lever position R. Interior mirror, manually dimmable
Deactivating Turn knob Slide the switch to the passenger side mirror position.
Folding in and out NOTE Depending on the vehicle width, the ve‐ hicle can be damaged in vehicle washes. There is a risk of property damage. Before washing, fold in the mirrors by hand or with the button.◀ Turn the knob to reduce the blinding effect by Press button. the interior mirror.
Possible at speeds up to approx. Interior mirror, automatic dimming 15 mph/20 km/h. feature Fold the mirrors in and out is advantageous in the following situations: Overview ▷ In vehicle washes. ▷ On narrow roads. ▷ For folding mirrors back out that were folded away manually. Mirrors that were folded in are folded out auto‐ matically at a speed of approx. 25 mph/40 km/h.
Automatic heating Photocells are used for control: Both exterior mirrors are automatically heated whenever the engine is running. ▷ In the mirror glass. ▷ On the back of the mirror. Automatic dimming feature The exterior mirror on the driver's side is auto‐ Functional requirements matically dimmed. Photocells in the interior ▷ Keep the photocells clean. mirror are used to control this. ▷ Do not cover the area between the inside rearview mirror and the windshield.
73 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 74
Controls Settings
Steering wheel Switching on/off Press button. Safety information WARNING ▷ On: the LED lights up. Steering wheel adjustments while driving ▷ Off: the LED goes out. can lead to unexpected steering wheel move‐ ments. Vehicle control could be lost. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust the steering wheel while the vehicle is stationary only.◀
Settings
1. Fold the lever down. 2. Move the steering wheel to the preferred height and angle to suit your seating posi‐ tion. 3. Fold the lever back up.
Heated steering wheel
Overview
Heated steering wheel
74 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 75
Transporting children safely Controls
Transporting children safely
Vehicle features and options to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions This chapter describes all standard, country- and systems. When using these functions and specific and optional features offered with the systems, the applicable laws and regulations series. It also describes features that are not must be observed. necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
The right place for children Safety information system can no longer be used due to their age, weight, and size. WARNING Unattended children or animals can Safety information cause the vehicle to move and endanger them‐ selves and traffic, e.g., due to the following ac‐ WARNING tions: The safety belt cannot be fastened cor‐ ▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button. rectly on children shorter than 5 ft, 150 cm without suitable additional child restraint sys‐ ▷ Releasing the parking brake. tems. The protective effect of the safety belts ▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐ can be limited or lost when safety belts are fas‐ dows. tened incorrectly. An incorrectly fastened ▷ Engaging selector lever position N. safety belt can cause additional injuries, for in‐ ▷ Using vehicle equipment. stance in the event of an accident or during braking and evasive maneuvers. There is a risk There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not of injuries or danger to life. Secure children leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐ shorter than 5 ft, 150 cm using suitable child hicle. Take the remote control with you when restraint systems.◀ exiting and lock the vehicle.◀ Children on the front passenger seat Always transport children in the rear seat General information General information Should it ever be necessary to use a child re‐ straint system in the front passenger seat, Accident research shows that the safest place make sure that the front, knee and side airbags for children is in the rear seat. on the front passenger side are deactivated. Transport children younger than 13 years of Automatic deactivation of front-seat passen‐ age or shorter than 5 ft/150 cm only in the rear ger airbags, refer to page 119. seat in suitable child restraint systems de‐ signed for the age, weight and size of the child. Children 13 years of age or older must wear a safety belt as soon as a suitable child restraint
75 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 76
Controls Transporting children safely
Safety information center or another qualified service center or re‐ pair shop.◀ WARNING Active front-seat passenger airbags can WARNING injure a child in a child restraint system when The stability of the child restraint system the airbags are activated. There is a risk of in‐ is limited or compromised with incorrect seat jury. Make sure that the front-seat passenger adjustment or improper installation of the child airbags are deactivated and that the PASSEN‐ seat. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. GER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp lights up.◀ Make sure that the child restraint system fits securely against the backrest. If possible, ad‐ WARNING just the backrest tilt for all affected backrests The stability of the child restraint system and correctly adjust the seats. Make sure that is limited or compromised with incorrect seat seats and backrests are securely engaged. If adjustment or improper installation of the child possible, adjust the height of the head re‐ seat. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. straints or remove them.◀ Make sure that the child restraint system fits securely against the backrest. If possible, ad‐ On the front passenger seat just the backrest tilt for all affected backrests and correctly adjust the seats. Make sure that Deactivating airbags seats and backrests are securely engaged. If possible, adjust the height of the head re‐ WARNING straints or remove them.◀ Active front-seat passenger airbags can injure a child in a child restraint system when the airbags are activated. There is a risk of in‐ Installing child restraint jury. Make sure that the front-seat passenger systems airbags are deactivated and that the PASSEN‐ GER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp lights up.◀ General information After installing a child restraint system in the Pay attention to the specifications of the child front passenger seat, make sure that the front, restraint system manufacturer when selecting, knee and side airbags on the front passenger installing, and using child restraint systems. side are deactivated. Deactivate the front-seat passenger airbags Safety information automatically, refer to page 119. WARNING Seat position and height The protective effect of damaged child restraint systems or of child restraint systems Before installing a child restraint system, move exposed to an accident and their fastening the front passenger seat as far back as possi‐ systems can be limited or lost. A child can ble and bring it as far up as possible to obtain e.g.,not sufficiently restrained, e.g., in the the best possible position for the belt and to event of an accident or braking and evasive offer optimal protection in the event of an acci‐ maneuvers. There is a risk of injuries or danger dent. to life. Have damaged child restraint systems If the upper anchorage of the safety belt is lo‐ or of child restraint systems exposed to an ac‐ cated in front of the belt guide of the child seat, cident and their fastening systems checked move the passenger seat carefully forward un‐ and possibly replaced by the dealer’s service
76 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 77
Transporting children safely Controls
til the best possible belt guide position is Locking the safety belt reached. 1. Pull out the belt strap completely. 2. Secure the child restraint system with the Backrest width safety belt. Adjustable backrest width: before installing a 3. Allow the belt strap to be pulled in and pull child restraint system in the front passenger it tight against the child restraint system. seat, open the backrest width completely. Do The safety belt is locked. not change the backrest width again and do not call up a memory position. Unlocking the safety belt Child seat security 1. Unbuckle the belt buckle. 2. Remove the child restraint system. 3. Allow the belt strap to be pulled in com‐ pletely.
The rear safety belts and the front passenger safety belt can be permanently locked to fas‐ ten child restraint systems.
LATCH child restraint fixing system General information Safety information LATCH: Lower Anchors and Tether for Chil‐ WARNING dren. If the LATCH child restraint fixing sys‐ Pay attention to the operating and safety infor‐ tems are not correctly engaged, the protective mation of the child restraint system manufac‐ effect of the LATCH child restraint fixing sys‐ turer when installing and using LATCH child tem can be limited. There is a risk of injuries or restraint fixing systems. danger to life. Make sure that the lower an‐ chors are securely engaged and that the Mounts for the lower LATCH anchors LATCH child restraint fixing system fits se‐ The lower anchors may be used to attach the curely against the backrest.◀ CRS to the vehicle seat up to a combined child and CRS weight of 65 lb/30 kg when the child Position is restrained by the internal harnesses. The corresponding symbol shows the mounts for the lower LATCH anchors. Seats equipped with lower anchors are
77 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 78
Controls Transporting children safely
marked with a pair, 2, of LATCH symbols.
Before installing LATCH child restraint fixing systems Pull the safety belt away from the area of the child restraint system.
Assembly of LATCH child restraint fixing systems 1. Install child restraint system, see manufac‐ turer's information. 2. Ensure that both LATCH anchors are prop‐ erly connected.
Upper LATCH retaining strap For Canadian customers Only. The following statement is required by Trans‐ port Canada: This vehicle is not equipped with user-ready tether anchorages. As such neither a child re‐ straint system, nor a booster cushion, requiring the use of a tether strap can be properly se‐ cured in the vehicle.
78 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 79
Driving Controls
Driving
Vehicle features and options To save battery power when the engine is off, switch off the ignition and any unnecessary This chapter describes all standard, country- electronic systems/power consumers. specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not Safety measures necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due When switching off the ignition, the selector to the selected options or country versions. lever position P is selected automatically if the This also applies to safety-related functions selector lever position D or R is selected. and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations The ignition is switched off automatically in the must be observed. following situations while the vehicle is station‐ ary and the engine is off: ▷ When locking the vehicle, and when the Start/Stop button low beams are switched on. ▷ Shortly before the battery is discharged Concept completely, so that the engine can still be Pressing the Start/Stop button started. switches the ignition on or off ▷ When opening or closing the driver door, if and starts the engine. the driver's safety belt is unbuckled and Steptronic transmission: the en‐ the low beams are switched off. gine starts with the brake pedal ▷ While the driver's safety belt is unbuckled pressed when you press the Start/Stop button. with driver's door open and low beams off. The low beams switch to parking lights after Ignition on some minutes of no use. Steptronic transmission: press the Start/Stop Radio-ready state button, and do not press on the brake pedal at the same time. General information All vehicle systems are ready for operation. In the radio-ready state, certain power con‐ Most of the indicator/warning lights in the in‐ sumers remain ready for operation. strument cluster light up for a varied length of time. Activating To save battery power when the engine is off, With the engine running, press the Start/Stop switch off the ignition and any unnecessary button. electronic systems/power consumers. If the engine is not running and the ignition is switched on: the system automatically acti‐ Ignition off vates radio-ready state when the door is Steptronic transmission: press the Start/Stop opened if the lights are switched off or the day‐ button again without stepping on the brake. time running lights are switched on. All indicator lights in the instrument cluster go out.
79 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 80
Controls Driving
The radio-ready state remains active if, for in‐ ▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope, stance the ignition is automatically switched turn the front wheels in the direction of the off for the following reasons: curb. ▷ Opening or closing the driver's door. ▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope, ▷ Unfastening of the driver's safety belt. also secure the vehicle, e.g., with a wheel chock.◀ ▷ When automatically switching from low beams to parking lights. NOTE In the case of repeated starting attempts Switching off automatically or repeated starting in quick succession, the The radio-ready state is switched off automati‐ fuel is not burned or is inadequately burned. cally in the following situations: The catalytic converter can overheat. There is ▷ If the ignition is switched off manually with a risk of property damage. Avoid repeated the Start/Stop button. starting in quick succession.◀ ▷ After approx. 8 minutes. Steptronic transmission ▷ When the vehicle is locked using the cen‐ tral locking system. Starting the engine ▷ Shortly before the battery is discharged 1. Depress the brake pedal. completely, so that the engine can still be started. 2. Press the Start/Stop button. The ignition is activated automatically for a brief time and is stopped as soon as the engine Starting the engine starts.
Safety information Engine stop DANGER If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventila‐ Safety information tion is insufficient, harmful exhaust gases can enter into the vehicle. The exhaust gases con‐ WARNING tain pollutants which are colorless and odor‐ Unattended children or animals can less. In enclosed areas, exhaust gases can also cause the vehicle to move and endanger them‐ accumulate outside of the vehicle. There is selves and traffic, e.g., due to the following ac‐ danger to life. Keep the exhaust pipe free and tions: ensure sufficient ventilation.◀ ▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
WARNING ▷ Releasing the parking brake. An unsecured vehicle can begin to move ▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐ and possibly roll away. There is a risk of an ac‐ dows. cident. Before exiting, secure the vehicle ▷ Engaging selector lever position N. against rolling. ▷ Using vehicle equipment. In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not against rolling away, observe the following: leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐ ▷ Set the parking brake. hicle. Take the remote control with you when exiting and lock the vehicle.◀
80 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 81
Driving Controls
WARNING General information An unsecured vehicle can begin to move Depending on the selected driving mode, the and possibly roll away. There is a risk of an ac‐ system is automatically activated or deacti‐ cident. Before exiting, secure the vehicle vated. against rolling. After every start of the engine using the Start/ In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured Stop button, the Auto Start/Stop function is in against rolling away, observe the following: the last selected state. When the Auto Start/ ▷ Set the parking brake. Stop function is active, it is available when the vehicle is traveling faster than about ▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope, 3 mph/5 km/h. turn the front wheels in the direction of the curb. Engine stop ▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope, The engine is switched off automatically dur‐ also secure the vehicle, e.g., with a wheel ing a stop under the following conditions: chock.◀ Steptronic transmission: Before driving into a vehicle wash ▷ The selector lever is in selector lever posi‐ So that the vehicle can roll into a vehicle wash, tion D. observe instructions for going into an auto‐ ▷ The brake pedal remains depressed while matic vehicle wash, refer to page 252. the vehicle is stopped. ▷ The driver's safety belt is buckled or the Steptronic transmission driver's door is closed. The air flow from the air conditioner is reduced Switching off the engine when the engine is switched off. 1. Engage selector lever position P with the vehicle stopped. Displays in the instrument cluster 2. Press the Start/Stop button. The READY display in the tach‐ The engine is switched off. ometer signals that the Auto The radio-ready state is switched on. Start/Stop function is ready to 3. Set the parking brake. start the engine automatically.
The display indicates that the Auto Start/Stop function conditions for an automatic en‐ gine stop have not been met. Concept The Auto Start/Stop function helps save fuel. The system switches off the engine during a stop, e.g., in traffic congestion or at traffic Functional limitations lights. The ignition remains switched on. The The engine is not switched off automatically in engine starts again automatically for driving the following situations: off. ▷ External temperature too low. ▷ The external temperature is high and auto‐ matic climate control is running.
81 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 82
Controls Driving
▷ The car's interior has not yet been heated Functional limitations or cooled to the required level. Even if driving off was not intended, the deacti‐ ▷ The engine is not yet at operating temper‐ vated engine starts up automatically in the fol‐ ature. lowing situations: ▷ The wheels are at a sharp angle or the ▷ Excessive warming of the car's interior steering wheel is being turned. when the air conditioning is switched on. ▷ After driving in reverse. ▷ The steering wheel is turned. ▷ Fogging of the windows when the auto‐ ▷ Steptronic transmission: change from se‐ matic climate control is switched on. lector lever position D to R, N or M/S. ▷ Vehicle battery is heavily discharged. ▷ Steptronic transmission: change from se‐ ▷ At higher elevations. lector lever position P to N, D, R or M/S. ▷ The hood is unlocked. ▷ Fogging of the windows when the auto‐ matic climate control is switched on. ▷ The parking assistant is activated. ▷ Vehicle battery is heavily discharged. ▷ Air collar is activated. ▷ Excessive cooling of the car's interior when ▷ Stop-and-go traffic. the heating is switched on. ▷ Selector lever in selector lever position N, M/S or R. Activating/deactivating the system ▷ Use of fuel with high ethanol content. manually
Starting the engine Using the button The engine starts automatically under the fol‐ lowing conditions: ▷ Steptronic transmission: by releasing the brake pedal. After the engine starts, accelerate as usual.
Safety mode After the engine switches off automatically, it will not start again automatically if any one of the following conditions are met: Press button. ▷ The driver's safety belt is unbuckled and the driver's door is open. ▷ LED comes on: auto Start/Stop function is deactivated. ▷ The hood was unlocked. The engine is started during an automatic Some indicator lights light up for a varied engine stop. length of time. The engine can only be stopped or started The engine can only be started via the Start/ via the Start/Stop button. Stop button. ▷ LED goes out: auto Start/Stop function is activated.
82 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 83
Driving Controls
Switching off the vehicle during an ▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope, automatic engine stop also secure the vehicle, e.g., with a wheel During an automatic engine stop, the vehicle chock.◀ can be switched off permanently, for instance when leaving it. Applying Steptronic transmission: The lever automatically engages after being pulled up. 1. Press the Start/Stop button. The ignition is switched off. The Auto Start/Stop function The indicator lamp lights up red. The is deactivated. parking brake is set. Selector lever position P is engaged auto‐ Lower lamp: indicator lamp in Canadian matically. models 2. Set the parking brake. If for once use during driving is required, en‐ Engine start as usual via Start/Stop button. gage the parking brake slightly and hold the button down. Automatic deactivation To prevent corrosion and one-sided brake ac‐ In certain situations, the Auto Start/Stop func‐ tion, lightly apply the parking brake periodically tion is deactivated automatically for safety rea‐ while coasting, if traffic conditions permit. sons, e.g., if no driver is detected. The brake lights will not light up if the parking brake is set. Malfunction The Auto Start/Stop function no longer Releasing switches off the engine automatically. A Check Control message is displayed. It is possible to continue driving. Have the system checked by a dealer’s service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.
Parking brake
Safety information Raise lever slightly, press the button and guide WARNING the lever down. An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and possibly roll away. There is a risk of an ac‐ cident. Before exiting, secure the vehicle Turn signal, high beams, against rolling. headlight flasher In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured against rolling away, observe the following: Turn signal ▷ Set the parking brake. ▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope, Turn signal in exterior mirror turn the front wheels in the direction of the When driving and during operation of the turn curb. signals or hazard warning system, do not fold
83 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 84
Controls Driving
in the exterior mirrors, so that the signal lights on the exterior mirror are easy to see.
Using turn signals
▷ High beams on, arrow 1. ▷ High beams off/headlight flasher, arrow 2.
Press the lever past the resistance point. Washer/wiper system
Triple turn signal activation General information Lightly tap the lever up or down. Do not use the wipers if the windshield is dry, as this may damage the wiper blades or cause The turn signal flashes three times. them to become worn more quickly. The function can be activated or deactivated. Using iDrive: Safety information 1. "My Vehicle" WARNING 2. "Vehicle settings" If the wipers start moving in the folded 3. "Lighting" away state, body parts can be jammed or dam‐ age may occur to parts of the vehicle. There is 4. "Exterior lighting" a risk of injury or risk of property damage. 5. "One-touch turn signal" Make sure that the vehicle is switched off 6. Select the desired setting. when the wipers are in the folded away state and the wipers are folded in when switching Settings are stored for the profile currently on.◀ used. NOTE Signaling briefly If the wipers are frozen to the windshield, Press the lever to the resistance point and hold the wiper blades can be torn off and the wiper it there for as long as you want the turn signal motor can overheat when switching on. There to flash. is a risk of damage to property. Defrost the windshield prior to switching the wipers on.◀ Malfunction Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator lamp indicates that a turn signal bulb has failed.
High beams, headlight flasher Push the lever forward or pull it backward.
84 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 85
Driving Controls
Switching on Interval mode or rain sensor
Concept The rain sensor automatically controls the time between wipes depending on the intensity of the rainfall.
General information The sensor is located on the windshield, di‐ rectly in front of the interior mirror. Without the Press the lever up until the desired position is rain sensor, the frequency of the wiper opera‐ reached. tion is preset. ▷ Resting position of the wipers, position 0. Safety information ▷ Intermittent operation or rain sensor, posi‐ tion 1. NOTE ▷ Normal wiper speed, position 2. If the rain sensor is activated, the wipers can accidentally start moving in vehicle The wipers switch to intermittent operation washes. There is a risk of property damage. when the vehicle is stationary. Deactivate the rain sensor in vehicle washes.◀ ▷ Fast wiper speed, position 3. The wipers change to their normal speed Activating/deactivating when the vehicle comes to a standstill. When travel is interrupted with the wiper sys‐ tem switched on: when travel continues, the wipers resume at their previous speed.
Switching off and brief wipe
Press the lever up once from its standard posi‐ tion, arrow 1. Wiping is started. The LED in the wiper lever is illuminated.
Press the lever down. ▷ Switching off: press the lever down until it reaches its standard position. ▷ Brief wipe: press the lever down from the standard position. The lever automatically returns to its initial position when released.
85 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 86
Controls Driving
Setting the frequency or sensitivity of Cleaning the windshield the rain sensor
Pull the lever. Turn the thumbwheel to adjust the frequency The system sprays washer fluid on the wind‐ or sensitivity of the rain sensor. shield and activates the wipers briefly. Up: short interval or high sensitivity of the rain sensor. In addition, the headlights are cleaned at regu‐ lar intervals when the vehicle's lights are Down: long interval or low sensitivity of the rain switched on. sensor. Windshield washer nozzles Windshield and headlight The washer jets are automatically heated washer system whenever the ignition is switched on.
Safety information Fold-away position of the wipers WARNING Concept The washer fluid can freeze onto the win‐ dow at low temperatures and obstruct the The wipers can be folded away from the wind‐ view. There is a risk of an accident. Only use shield in the fold-away position. the washer systems, if the washer fluid cannot freeze. Use antifreeze, if needed.◀ General information Important, e.g., when changing the wiper NOTE blades or when folding out under frosty condi‐ When the washer fluid reservoir is empty, tions. the wash pump cannot work as intended. There is a risk of property damage. Do not use Safety information the washer system when the washer fluid res‐ WARNING ervoir is empty.◀ If the wipers start moving in the folded away state, body parts can be jammed or dam‐ age may occur to parts of the vehicle. There is a risk of injury or risk of property damage. Make sure that the vehicle is switched off when the wipers are in the folded away state and the wipers are folded in when switching on.◀
86 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 87
Driving Controls
NOTE Washer fluid If the wipers are frozen to the windshield, the wiper blades can be torn off and the wiper General information motor can overheat when switching on. There All washer nozzles are supplied from one res‐ is a risk of damage to property. Defrost the ervoir. windshield prior to switching the wipers on.◀ Use a mixture of tap water and windshield washer concentrate. If desired, a windshield Folding away the wipers washer concentrate containing antifreeze can 1. Switch the ignition on and off again. be used. 2. Press and hold the wiper level down, until Recommended minimum fill quantity: the wipers stop in a close to vertical posi‐ 0.2 US gal/1 liter. tion. Safety information WARNING Some antifreeze agents can contain harmful substances and are flammable. There is a risk of fire and a risk of injury. Observe the instructions on the containers. Keep antifreeze away from ignition sources. Do not refill oper‐ ating materials into different bottles. Store op‐ erating materials out of reach of children. 3. Fold the wipers all the way away from the United States: the washer fluid mixture ratio is windshield. regulated by the U.S. EPA and many individual states; do not exceed the allowable washer fluid dilution ratio limits that apply. Follow the usage instructions on the washer fluid con‐ tainer. Use of BMW’s Windshield Washer Concen‐ trate or the equivalent is recommended.◀
WARNING Washer fluid can ignite and catch fire on contact with hot engine parts. There is a risk of Folding down the wipers injury or risk of property damage. Only add washer fluid when the engine is cooled down. After the wipers are folded back down, the Next, fully close the lid of the washer fluid res‐ wiper system must be reactivated. ervoir.◀ 1. Fold the wipers back down onto the wind‐ shield. NOTE 2. Switch on the ignition. Silicon-containing additives in the washer fluid for the water-repelling effect on 3. Push wiper lever down. Wipers return to the windows can lead to damage to the wash‐ their resting position and are ready again ing system. There is a risk of property damage. for operation.
87 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 88
Controls Driving
Do not add silicon-containing additives to the Safety information washer fluid.◀ WARNING NOTE An unsecured vehicle can begin to move Mixing different windshield washer con‐ and possibly roll away. There is a risk of an ac‐ centrates or antifreeze can damage the wash‐ cident. Before exiting, secure the vehicle ing system. There is a risk of damage to prop‐ against rolling. erty. Do not mix different windshield washer In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured concentrates or antifreeze. Observe the infor‐ against rolling away, observe the following: mation and mixing ratios provided on the con‐ ▷ Set the parking brake. tainers.◀ ▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope, turn the front wheels in the direction of the Overview curb. ▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope, also secure the vehicle, e.g., with a wheel chock.◀
Selector lever positions
Drive mode D Selector lever position for normal vehicle oper‐ ation. All gears for forward travel are activated The washer fluid reservoir is located in the en‐ automatically. gine compartment. Reverse R Malfunction Engage selector lever position R only when the vehicle is stationary. The use of undiluted windshield washer con‐ centrate or alcohol-based antifreeze can lead Neutral N to incorrect readings at temperatures below +5 ℉/-15 ℃. In selector lever position N, the vehicle may be pushed or roll without engine power, for in‐ stance in vehicle washes; see the Care chap‐ Steptronic transmission ter.
Concept Parking position P The Steptronic transmission combines the Selector lever position, for instance for parking functions of an automatic transmission with the vehicle. the possibility of manual shifting, if needed. The transmission blocks the drive wheels in selector lever position P. Engage selector lever position P only when the vehicle is stationary. Selector lever position P is engaged automati‐ cally in the following situations:
88 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 89
Driving Controls
▷ After the engine is switched off when the 2. With the driver's safety belt fastened, vehicle is in radio-ready state, refer to briefly push the selector lever in the de‐ page 79, or when the ignition is switched sired direction, past a resistance point, if off, refer to page 79, and when selector needed. The selector lever automatically lever position R or D is set. returns to the center position when re‐ ▷ If, with the vehicle stationary and the selec‐ leased. tor lever in position D or R, the driver's safety belt unbuckled, the driver's door is opened, and the brake pedal is not de‐ pressed.
Engaging selector lever positions
General information To prevent the vehicle from creeping after you select a drive mode, maintain pressure on the brake pedal until you are ready to start. Engaging selector lever position P
Functional requirements Only when the engine is running and the brake pedal is depressed is it possible to change from selector lever position P to another selec‐ tor lever position.
Engaging selector lever position D, N, R A selector lever lock prevents the following Press button P. faulty operation: ▷ Unintentional shifting into selector lever Kickdown position R. Kickdown is used to achieve maximum driving ▷ Unintentional shifting from selector lever performance. position P into another selector lever posi‐ tion. Step on the accelerator pedal beyond the re‐ sistance point at the full throttle position. 1. Press and hold the button to release the selector lever lock. Sport program M/S
Concept The shifting points and shifting times in the Sport program are designed for a sportier driv‐ ing style. The transmission, for instance shifts up later and the shifting times are shorter.
89 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 90
Controls Driving
Activating the sport program Manual mode becomes active and the gear is changed. The engaged gear is displayed in the instru‐ ment cluster, for instance M1.
Shifting To shift down: press the selector lever forward. To shift up: pull the selector lever rearwards. The transmission continues shifting automati‐ cally in certain situations, for instance when Press the selector lever to the left out of selec‐ speed limits are reached. tor lever position D. The engaged gear is displayed in the instru‐ Steptronic Sport transmission: ment cluster, for instance S1. prevent automatic upshifting in M/S The sport program of the transmission is acti‐ manual mode vated. The Steptronic Sport transmission does not automatically upshift in M/S manual mode once the maximum speed is reached, if one of Ending the Sport program the following conditions is met: Push the selector lever to the right. ▷ DSC deactivated. D is displayed in the instrument cluster. ▷ TRACTION activated. Manual mode M/S ▷ SPORT+ activated. In addition, there is no downshifting for kick‐ Concept down. Manual gear-shifting is possible in manual With the respective transmission version, the mode. lowest possible gear can be selected by simul‐ taneously operating the kickdown and the left Activating manual mode shift paddles. This is not possible by switching briefly via the shift paddles from selector lever position D to manual mode M/S.
Ending the manual mode Push the selector lever to the right. D is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Shift paddles
Press the selector lever to the left out of selec‐ Concept tor lever position D, arrow 1. Next, push the se‐ The shift paddles on the steering wheel allow lector lever forward or pull it backward, ar‐ you to shift gears quickly while keeping both row 2. hands on the steering wheel.
90 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 91
Driving Controls
General information Displays in the instrument cluster The selector lever position is dis‐ Shifting played, for example P. The vehicle only shifts at suitable engine and road speeds.
Short-term manual mode Electronic unlocking of the In selector lever position D, actuating a shift transmission lock paddle switches into manual mode tempora‐ rily. General information After conservative driving in manual mode Electronically unlock the transmission lock to without acceleration or shifting via the shift maneuver vehicle from a danger area. paddles for a certain amount of time, the trans‐ Unlocking is possible, if the starter can spin the mission switches back to automatic mode. engine. With some transmission versions it is possible Before unlocking the transmission lock, set the to switch into automatic mode as follows: parking brake to prevent the vehicle from roll‐ ▷ Pull and hold right shift paddle. ing away. ▷ In addition to the briefly pulled right shift paddle, briefly pull the left shift paddle. Engaging selector lever position N 1. Press and hold down brake pedal. Continuous manual mode 2. Press the Start/Stop button. The starter In selector lever position S, actuating a shift must audibly start. paddle switches into manual mode perma‐ 3. Press the button on the selector lever, ar‐ nently. row 1, and press and hold the selector lever into selector lever position N, ar‐ Shifting row N, until selector lever position N is dis‐ played in the instrument cluster. A Check Control message is displayed.
▷ To shift up: briefly pull right shift paddle. ▷ To shift down: briefly pull left shift paddle. ▷ With the respective transmission version, 4. Release the selector lever. the lowest possible gear can be selected 5. Release brake, as soon as the starter by pulling and holding the left shift paddle. stops. The selected gear is briefly displayed in the in‐ 6. Maneuver the vehicle from the danger area strument cluster, followed by the current gear. and secure it against moving on its own.
91 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 92
Controls Driving
For additional information, see the chapter on Repeated use during a trip tow-starting and towing. After Launch Control was used, the transmis‐ sion must cool down for approx. 5 minutes, be‐ Steptronic Sport transmission: fore Launch Control can be used again. Launch Control Launch Control adjusts to the surrounding conditions, when used again. Concept Launch Control enables optimum acceleration After using Launch Control on surfaces with good traction under dry sur‐ To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC Dy‐ rounding conditions. namic Stability Control again. General information System limits The use of Launch Control causes premature An experienced driver may be able to achieve component wear since this function represents better acceleration values in DSC OFF mode. a very heavy load for the vehicle. Do not use Launch Control during the break-in, refer to page 196, period. To start with Launch Control do not steer the steering wheel.
Functional requirements Launch Control is available when the engine is warmed up, that is, after uninterrupted driving of at least 6 miles/10 km.
Start with launch control While the engine is running:
1. Press button or select Sport+ with the Driving Dynamics Control. TRACTION is displayed in the instrument cluster and the indicator light for DSC OFF lights up. 2. Engage selector lever position S. 3. With the left foot, forcefully press down on the brake. 4. Press and hold down the accelerator pedal beyond the resistance point at the full throttle position, kickdown. A flag symbol is displayed in the instru‐ ment cluster. 5. The starting engine speed adjusts. Within 3 seconds, release the brake.
92 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 93
Displays Controls
Displays
Vehicle features and options to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions This chapter describes all standard, country- and systems. When using these functions and specific and optional features offered with the systems, the applicable laws and regulations series. It also describes features that are not must be observed. necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
Overview, instrument cluster
1 Fuel gauge 100 5 Engine oil temperature 100 2 Speedometer 6 Current fuel consumption 3 Messages, for instance Check Control 7 Electronic displays 4 Tachometer 100 8 Reset miles 100
Multifunctional instrument display
Concept The instrument display is a variable display. In rendition adapts to the respective program the event of a program change, the display through the Driving Dynamics Control.
93 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 94
Controls Displays
General information The change of the display type can be deacti‐ Some of the displays in the instrument display vated via iDrive. may differ from the way they are shown in this Owner's Manual.
Overview
1 Fuel gauge 100 Selection lists 104 2 Messages, for instance Check Control ECO PRO displays 202 3 Speedometer 6 Engine oil temperature 100 4 Variable displays 7 Onboard Computer 105 5 Tachometer 100 8 Reset miles 100
Switching the change of display on 4. "Instrument panel" and off 5. "ECO PRO info" You can set whether the instrument display or"Driving mode view" automatically changes to the ECO PRO or SPORT in the display when you switch driving With Professional Navigation System: modes. switching zoom function on/off About iDrive: The current speed can be shown enlarged in 1. "My Vehicle" the speedometer. 2. "iDrive settings" Using iDrive: 3. "Displays" 1. "My Vehicle" 2. "iDrive settings"
94 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 95
Displays Controls
3. "Displays" 4. "Instrument panel" 5. "Magnifier function"
Sport displays
1 Speedometer 5 Performance display, if the vehicle is 2 Tachometer 100 equipped accordingly 3 Transmission display 6 Variable displays 4 Shift lights, when respectively equipped
In the Sport and Sport+ programs the instru‐ General information ment display switches to a sporty view. This Steptronic Sport transmission: shift lights are view supports a sporty driving style with more shown, when the SPORT+ driving program is prominent representation of the tachometer, activated. The M manual mode of the trans‐ the transmission displays, and the vehicle mission must be activated too. speed. Switching on shift lights Shift point indicator Steptronic Sport transmission: The concept 1. Select SPORT+ using the Driving Dynam‐ The shift point indicator indicates the optimum ics Control. shift moment in the tachometer. Thus, with a 2. Activate the M/S manual mode of the sporty driving style, the best possible vehicle transmission. acceleration is achieved.
95 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 96
Controls Displays
Display Indicator/warning lights
General information The indicator and warning lights in the instru‐ ment cluster can light up in a variety of combi‐ nations and colors. Several of the lights are checked for proper functioning and light up temporarily when the engine is started or the ignition is switched on.
▷ Current engine speed is displayed in the Red lights tachometer. Safety belt reminder ▷ Arrow 1: successive yellow illuminated fields indicate an increase in the speed. Safety belt on the driver's side is not ▷ Arrow 2: successive orange illuminated buckled. For some country-specific fields indicate the upcoming shift moment. models: passenger belt is not worn or objects are detected on the front passenger ▷ Arrow 3: fields are illuminated in red. Do seat. not wait any further to shift. Indicator lamp flashes or is illuminated: safety When the maximum possible speed is belt on the driver or passenger side is not reached, the entire display flashes. When the buckled. The safety belt reminder can also be maximum speed is exceeded, the supply of activated if objects are placed on the front pas‐ fuel is interrupted in order to protect the en‐ senger seat. gine. Make sure that the safety belts are positioned correctly. Check Control Airbag system Concept Airbag system and belt tensioner are The Check Control system monitors functions not working. in the vehicle and notifies you of malfunctions Have the vehicle checked immediately in the monitored systems. by a dealer’s service center or another quali‐ fied service center or repair shop. General information A Check Control message is displayed as a Parking brake combination of indicator or warning lights and SMS text messages in the instrument cluster Release the parking brake, refer to and in the Head-up Display. page 83. In addition, an acoustic signal may sound and an SMS text message may appear on the Con‐ trol Display.
96 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 97
Displays Controls
Approach control warning pressing on the brake pedal or accelerator pedal. Indicator light illuminates: advance warning is issued, for example when there is the impending danger of a col‐ Yellow lights lision or the distance to the vehicle ahead is too small. Anti-lock Braking System ABS Increase distance. Braking force boost may not be work‐ Indicator light flashes: acute warning of the im‐ ing. Avoid abrupt braking. Take the lon‐ minent danger of a collision when the vehicle ger braking distance into account. approaches another vehicle at a relatively high Have the system immediately checked differential speed. by a dealer’s service center or another Intervention by braking or make an evasive ma‐ qualified service center or repair shop. neuver. DSC Dynamic Stability Control Person warning The indicator light flashes: DSC con‐ Symbol in the instrument cluster. trols the drive and braking forces. The If a collision with a person detected in vehicle is stabilized. Reduce speed and this way is imminent, the symbol lights adapt driving style to the driving circumstan‐ up and a signal sounds. ces. The indicator light illuminates: DSC has mal‐ Symbol in the instrument display. functioned. If a collision with a person detected in Have the system checked by a dealer’s service this way is imminent, the symbol lights center or another qualified service center or re‐ up and a signal sounds. pair shop. DSC Dynamic Stability Control, refer to Orange lights page 142.
Active Cruise Control DSC Dynamic Stability Control is The number bars shows the selected deactivated or DTC Dynamic Traction distance from the vehicle driving Control is activated ahead. DSC Dynamic Stability Control is deac‐ Active Cruise Control with Stop&Go function, tivated or DTC Dynamic Traction Con‐ ACC, refer to page 148. trol is activated. DSC Dynamic Stability Control, refer to Vehicle detection, Active Cruise Control page 142, and DTC Dynamic Traction Control, refer to page 143. Indicator light illuminates: a vehicle has been detected ahead of you. Flat Tire Monitor FTM Indicator light flashes: the conditions are not adequate for the system to work. The Flat Tire Monitor signals a loss of The system was deactivated but applies the tire inflation pressure in a tire. brakes until you actively resume control by
97 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 98
Controls Displays
Reduce your speed and stop cautiously. Avoid Emissions are deteriorating. Have sudden braking and steering maneuvers. the vehicle checked as soon as Flat Tire Monitor, refer to page 126. possible. ▷ The warning light flashes under certain cir‐ cumstances: Tire Pressure Monitor TPM This indicates that there is excessive mis‐ The indicator light illuminates. firing in the engine. The Tire Pressure Monitor reports a Reduce the vehicle speed and have the low tire inflation pressure or a flat tire. system checked immediately; otherwise, Observe the information in the Check Control serious engine misfiring within a brief pe‐ message. riod can seriously damage emission con‐ The indicator light flashes and then illuminates trol components, in particular the catalytic continuously. converter. No flat tire or loss of tire inflation pressure can Socket for Onboard Diagnosis, refer to be detected. page 240. ▷ Interference caused by systems or devices with the same radio frequency: after leav‐ Lane departure warning ing the area of the interference, the system System is switched on and under cer‐ automatically becomes active again. tain circumstances warns if a detected ▷ TPM was unable to complete the reset. lane is left without flashing beforehand. Reset the system again. Lane departure warning, refer to page 137. ▷ A wheel without TPM electronics is mounted: have it checked by a dealer’s service center or another qualified service Green lights center or repair shop as needed. Turn signal ▷ Malfunction: have the system checked by a dealer’s service center or another qualified Turn signal switched on. service center or repair shop. Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator Tire Pressure Monitor, refer to page 121. light indicates that a turn signal bulb has failed.
Steering system Turn signal, refer to page 83. Steering system in some cases not working. Parking lights, headlight Have the steering system checked by a Parking lights or headlights are dealer’s service center or another qualified switched on. service center or repair shop. Parking lights/low beams, headlight control, refer to page 111. Emissions ▷ The warning light lights up: Front fog lights Front fog lights are switched on. Front fog lights, refer to page 114.
98 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 99
Displays Controls
High-beam Assistant Temporary display High-beam Assistant is switched on. Other Check Control messages are hidden au‐ tomatically after approx. 20 seconds. These High beams are switched on and off Check Control messages are stored and can automatically depending on the traffic be displayed again later. situation. High-beam Assistant, refer to page 114. Displaying stored Check Control messages Cruise control About iDrive: The system is switched on. It maintains 1. "My Vehicle" the speed that was set using the con‐ 2. "Vehicle status" trol elements on the steering wheel. 3. "Check Control" 4. Select the text message. Blue lights Display High beams High beams are switched on. Check Control High beams, refer to page 84. At least one Check Control message is displayed or is stored. Hiding Check Control messages SMS text messages SMS text messages in combination with a symbol in the instrument cluster explain a Check Control message and the meaning of the indicator/warning lights.
Supplementary SMS text messages Additional information, such as on the cause of an error or the required action, can be called up Press and hold button on signal lever. via Check Control. With urgent messages the added text will be Continuous display automatically displayed on the Control Display. Some Check Control messages are displayed continuously and are not cleared until the mal‐ Functions function is eliminated. If several malfunctions Depending on the Check Control message, the occur at once, the messages are displayed following functions can be selected. consecutively. ▷ "Owner's Manual" These messages can be hidden for approx. Display additional information about the 8 seconds. After this time, they are displayed Check Control message in the Integrated again automatically. Owner's Manual. ▷ "Service request"
99 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 100
Controls Displays
Contact a dealer’s service center or an‐ ▷ Hot engine: the pointer is at the high end of other qualified service center or repair the temperature range. In addition, a Check shop. Control message is displayed. ▷ "BMW Roadside Assistance" When the engine oil temperature is too Contact Roadside Assistance. high, a red indicator light is displayed. Messages after trip completion Special messages displayed while driving are displayed again after the ignition is switched Coolant temperature off. If the coolant along with the engine becomes too hot, a Check Control message is displayed. Fuel gauge A red indicator light is displayed. Depending on the equipment version, the arrow beside the Check the coolant level. fuel pump symbol shows which side of the vehicle the fuel filler flap is on. Odometer and trip odometer Vehicle tilt position may cause the display to vary. Display Information on refueling, refer to page 210. ▷ Odometer, arrow 1. ▷ Trip odometer, arrow 2. The yellow indicator light illuminates, once the fuel reserve is reached.
Tachometer Show/reset miles Press the button. Always avoid engine speeds in the red warning ▷ When the ignition is field. In this range, the fuel supply is reduced to switched off, the time, the protect the engine. external temperature and the odometer are displayed. Engine oil temperature ▷ When the ignition is switched on, the trip odometer is reset. ▷ Cold engine: the pointer is at the low temperature end. Drive at moderate engine and vehicle speeds. External temperature ▷ Normal operating tempera‐ WARNING ture: the pointer is in the Even at temperatures above +37 ℉/+3 ℃ middle or in the left half of there can be a risk of icy roads, e.g., on bridges the temperature display. or shady sections of road. There is a risk of an
100 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 101
Displays Controls
accident. Adjust your driving style to the NOTE weather conditions at low temperatures.◀ With a range of less than 30 miles/50 km it is possible that the engine will no longer have If the indicator drops to sufficient fuel. Engine functions are not en‐ +37 ℉/+3 ℃ or lower, a signal sured anymore. There is a risk of property sounds. damage. Refuel promptly.◀ A Check Control message is displayed. Displaying the cruising range There is an increased risk of ice on roads. The range can also be displayed as bar in the instrument cluster. Using iDrive: Time 1. "My Vehicle" The time is displayed at the bot‐ 2. "iDrive settings" tom of the instrument cluster. 3. "Displays" The time can be set on the Con‐ trol Display. 4. "Instrument panel" 5. "Additional indicators" Date Current fuel consumption The date is displayed in the On‐ board Computer. Instrument cluster The date and date format can be set on the Control Display. Displays the current fuel con‐ sumption. Check whether you are currently driving in an effi‐ Range cient and environmentally- friendly manner. Display Instrument cluster with enhanced With a low remaining range: features ▷ A Check Control message is displayed briefly. Displays the current fuel con‐ sumption. Check whether you ▷ The remaining range is are currently driving in an effi‐ shown on the Onboard cient and environmentally- Computer. friendly manner. ▷ With a dynamic driving style, for instance taking curves aggressively, the engine function is not always ensured. Displaying the current fuel consumption The Check Control message appears continu‐ Using iDrive: ously below a range of approx. 30 miles/50 km. 1. "My Vehicle" 2. "iDrive settings"
101 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 102
Controls Displays
3. "Displays" Using iDrive: 4. "Instrument panel" 1. "My Vehicle" 5. "Additional indicators" 2. "Vehicle status" The bar display for the current fuel consump‐ 3. "Service required" tion is displayed in the instrument cluster. Required maintenance procedures and le‐ gally mandated inspections are displayed. Energy recovery 4. Select an entry to call up detailed informa‐ tion. Display Symbols The kinetic energy of the vehicle is converted to electrical energy Symbols Description while the vehicle is coasting. The vehicle battery is partially No service is currently re‐ charged and fuel consumption quired. can be reduced. The deadline for scheduled maintenance or a legally man‐ dated inspection is approach‐ Service requirements ing.
Concept The service deadline has al‐ ready passed. The function displays the service requirements and the corresponding maintenance scopes. Entering appointment dates General information Enter the dates for the mandatory vehicle in‐ After the ignition is turned on the instrument spections. cluster briefly displays available driving dis‐ tance or time to the next scheduled mainte‐ Make sure that the vehicle's date and time are nance. set correctly. A service advisor can read out the current Via iDrive: service requirements from your remote con‐ 1. "My Vehicle" trol. 2. "Vehicle status" Display 3. "Service required" 4. "Vehicle inspection" Detailed information on service 5. "Date:" requirements 6. Select the desired setting. More information on the scope of service re‐ quired can be displayed on the Control Dis‐ 7. Confirm. play. The entered date is stored.
102 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 103
Displays Controls
Automatic Service Request Speed Limit Info Data regarding the service status or legally mandated vehicle inspections are automati‐ Speed Limit Info cally transmitted to your dealer’s service cen‐ ter before a service due date. Concept You can check when your dealer’s service cen‐ Speed Limit Info shows the current maximum ter was notified. permitted speed in the instrument cluster. About iDrive: General information 1. "My Vehicle" The camera in the area of the interior mirror 2. "Vehicle status" detects traffic signs at the edge of the road as 3. "Teleservice Call" well as variable overhead sign posts. Traffic signs with extra symbols for wet road condi‐ tions, etc., are also detected and compared Gear shift indicator with the vehicle's onboard data, such as from the rain sensor, and will be displayed depend‐ Concept ing on the situation. The system takes into ac‐ count the information stored in the navigation The system recommends the most fuel effi‐ system and also displays speed limits present cient gear for the current driving situation. on routes without signs. General information Safety information Depending on the vehicle's features and coun‐ try-specific version, the gear shift indicator is WARNING active in the manual mode of the Steptronic The system does not release from the transmission and with manual transmission. personal responsibility to correctly assess visi‐ Suggestions to shift gear up or down are dis‐ bility and traffic situation. There is a risk of an played in the instrument cluster. accident. Adjust the driving style to the traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively Steptronic transmission: displaying intervene in the respective situations.◀
Example Description Overview
Fuel efficient gear is set. Camera
Shift into fuel efficient gear.
The camera is installed near the interior mirror.
103 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 104
Controls Displays
Keep the windshield in front of the interior mir‐ ▷ When driving toward bright lights or strong ror clean and clear. reflections. ▷ When the windshield in front of the interior Switching on/off mirror is fogged over, dirty or covered by a sticker, etc. Using iDrive: ▷ In the event of incorrect detection by the 1. "My Vehicle" camera. 2. "iDrive settings" ▷ If the speed limits stored in the navigation 3. "Displays" system are incorrect. 4. "Instrument panel" ▷ In areas not covered by the navigation sys‐ 5. "Speed limit information" tem. If Speed Limit Info is switched on, it can be dis‐ ▷ When roads differ from the navigation, played on the Info Display in the instrument such as due to changes in road routing. cluster via the Onboard Computer. ▷ When passing buses or trucks with a speed sticker. Display ▷ If the traffic signs are non-conforming. The following is displayed in the instrument ▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐ cluster: ately after vehicle delivery. ▷ When signs that are valid for a parallel road Speed Limit Info are detected. Current speed limit.
Selection lists
General information Speed Limit Info not available. Depending on your vehicle's equipment, the following can be displayed or operated using the buttons and the thumbwheel on the steer‐ ing wheel as well as the displays in the instru‐ ment cluster and the Head-up Display: Speed Limit Info can also be displayed in the ▷ Current audio source. Head-up Display. ▷ Redial phone feature. System limits ▷ Turn on voice activation system. The system may not be fully functional and It also displays programs of the Driving Dy‐ may provide incorrect information in the fol‐ namics Control. lowing situations: ▷ In heavy fog, rain or snowfall. ▷ When signs are fully or partially concealed by objects, stickers or paint. ▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in front of you.
104 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 105
Displays Controls
Activating a list and adjusting the Calling up information on the Info setting Display
On the right side of the steering wheel, turn Press and hold button on signal lever. the thumbwheel to activate the corresponding Information is displayed in the Info Display of list. the instrument cluster. 1. Turn the thumbwheel and select the de‐ sired setting. Information at a glance 2. Press the thumbwheel. Repeatedly pressing the button on the turn signal lever calls up the following information in Display the Info Display: ▷ Range. ▷ Average consumption, fuel. ▷ Current consumption, fuel. ▷ Average speed. ▷ Date. ▷ Speed Limit Info. ▷ Depending on the equipment, the time of arrival. Depending on your vehicle's optional features, When destination guidance is activated in the list in the instrument cluster can differ from the navigation system. the illustration shown. ▷ Depending on the equipment, the distance to destination. When destination guidance is activated in Onboard Computer the navigation system.
Concept ▷ ECO PRO bonus range. The Onboard Computer displays different ve‐ Selecting information hicle data in the instrument cluster, such as You can select what information from the On‐ average values. board Computer is to be displayed on the Info Display of the instrument cluster.
105 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 106
Controls Displays
Using iDrive: Resetting average values 1. "My Vehicle" 2. "iDrive settings" 3. "Displays" 4. "Instrument panel" 5. Select the desired information.
Indication in the Info Display The information from the On‐ board Computer is shown in the Press and hold button on turn signal lever. Info Display in the instrument cluster. Distance to destination Depending on the vehicle equipment, the dis‐ tance remaining to the destination is displayed Information in detail if a destination is entered in the navigation sys‐ tem before the trip is started. Range The distance to the destination is adopted au‐ Displays the estimated cruising range available tomatically. with the remaining fuel. The range is calculated based on your driving Time of arrival style over the last 20 miles/30 km. Depending on the vehicle equip‐ If there is only enough fuel left for less than ment, the estimated time of ar‐ 45 miles/80 km, the color of the display rival is displayed if a destination changes. is entered in the navigation sys‐ tem before the trip is started. Average fuel consumption The time must be correctly set. The average fuel consumption is calculated for the period while the engine is running. The average fuel consumption is calculated for Speed Limit Info the distance traveled since the last reset by the Further information, see chapter Speed Limit Onboard Computer. Info.
Average speed Onboard Computer on the Control Periods in which the vehicle is parked with the Display engine manually stopped are not included in the calculation of the average speed. Concept The Onboard Computer displays different ve‐ hicle data on the Control Display, such as aver‐ age values.
General information Two types of Onboard Computers are availa‐ ble on the Control Display:
106 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 107
Displays Controls
▷ "Onboard info": average values, such as Displaying sport displays the fuel consumption, are displayed. The Using iDrive: values can be reset individually. 1. "My Vehicle" ▷ "Trip computer": the values deliver an overview of a certain distance and can be 2. "Technology in action" reset as often as necessary. 3. "Sport displays"
Calling up the Onboard Computer or trip computer Speed warning Using iDrive: Concept 1. "My Vehicle" A speed limit can be set that when reached will 2. "Driving information" cause a warning to be issued. 3. "Onboard info" or "Trip computer" General information Resetting the Onboard Computer The warning is repeated if the vehicle speed Using iDrive: drops below the set speed limit once by at least 3 mph/5 km/h. 1. "My Vehicle" 2. "Driving information" Displaying, setting or changing the 3. "Onboard info" speed warning 4. "Consumption" or "Speed" Using iDrive: 5. "OK" 1. "My Vehicle"
Resetting the trip computer 2. "Vehicle settings" 3. "Speed warning" Using iDrive: 4. "Warning at:" 1. "My Vehicle" 5. Turn the Controller until the desired speed 2. "Driving information" is displayed. 3. "Trip computer" 6. Press the Controller. 4. Move the Controller to the left, if needed. ▷ "Reset": all values are reset. Activating/deactivating the speed warning ▷ "Automatic reset": all values are reset approx. 4 hours after the vehicle About iDrive: has come to a standstill. 1. "My Vehicle" 2. "Vehicle settings" Sport displays 3. "Speed warning" 4. "Speed warning" General information 5. Press the Controller. On the Control Display, the current values for performance and torque can be displayed if the vehicle is appropriately equipped.
107 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 108
Controls Displays
Setting your current speed as the ▷ Speed. speed warning ▷ Navigation system. Using iDrive: ▷ Check Control messages. 1. "My Vehicle" ▷ Selection list from the instrument cluster. 2. "Vehicle settings" ▷ Driver assistance systems. 3. "Speed warning" Some of this information is only displayed 4. "Select current speed" briefly as needed. 5. Press the Controller. Selecting displays in the Head-up Display Head-up Display About iDrive: 1. "My Vehicle" Concept 2. "iDrive settings" This system projects important information 3. "Displays" into the driver's field of vision, e.g., the speed. 4. "Head-Up Display" The driver can get information without averting his or her eyes from the road. 5. "Displayed information" 6. Select the desired displays in the Head-up Overview Display. Settings are stored for the profile currently used.
Setting the brightness The brightness is automatically adjusted to the ambient brightness. The basic setting can be adjusted. Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle" Switching on/off 2. "iDrive settings" 1. "My Vehicle" 3. "Displays" 2. "iDrive settings" 4. "Head-Up Display" 3. "Displays" 5. "Brightness" 4. "Head-Up Display" 6. Turn the controller until the desired bright‐ 5. "Head-Up Display" ness is set. 7. Press the controller. Display When the low beams are activated, the bright‐ ness of the Head-up Display can be addition‐ Overview ally influenced using the instrument lighting. The following information is displayed on the Settings are stored for the driver profile cur‐ Head-up Display: rently used.
108 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 109
Displays Controls
Adjusting the height ▷ Unfavorable light conditions. Using iDrive: If the image is distorted, have the basic set‐ tings checked by a dealer’s service center or 1. "My Vehicle" another qualified service center or repair shop. 2. "iDrive settings" Follow the instructions for cleaning the Head- 3. "Displays" up Display, refer to page 255. 4. "Head-Up Display" 5. "Height" Special windshield 6. Turn the Controller until the desired height The windshield is part of the system. is reached. The shape of the windshield makes it possible 7. Press the Controller. to display a precise image. Settings are stored for the profile currently A film in the windshield prevents double im‐ used. ages from being displayed. The height of the Head-up Display can also be For this reason, it is strongly suggested to stored using the memory function, refer to have the special windshield replaced by a deal‐ page 71. er’s service center or another qualified service center or repair shop, if necessary. Setting the rotation The screen of the Head-up Display can be ro‐ Vehicle status tated around its own axis. About iDrive: General information 1. "My Vehicle" The status can be displayed and actions per‐ 2. "iDrive settings" formed for several systems.
3. "Displays" Opening the vehicle status 4. "Head-Up Display" Using iDrive: 5. "Rotation" 1. "My Vehicle" 6. Turn the Controller until the desired set‐ ting is selected. 2. "Vehicle status"
7. Press the Controller. Information at a glance Settings are stored for the profile currently ▷ "Flat Tire Monitor": Status of the Flat used. Tire Monitor, refer to page 126. Display visibility ▷ "Tire Pressure Monitor": Status of the Tire Pressure Monitor, refer to page 122. The visibility of the displays in the Head-up Display is influenced by the following factors: ▷ Resetting the Tire Pressure Monitor, refer to page 122. ▷ Certain sitting positions. ▷ "Engine oil level": Electronic engine ▷ Objects on the cover of the Head-up Dis‐ oil level check, refer to page 233. play. ▷ "Check Control": Check Control mes‐ ▷ Sunglasses with certain polarization filters. sages are stored in the background and ▷ Wet roads. can be displayed on the Control Display.
109 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 110
Controls Displays
Displaying stored Check Control mes‐ sages, refer to page 99. ▷ "Service required": Displaying serv‐ ice requirements, refer to page 102. ▷ "Teleservice Call": service request.
110 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 111
Lights Controls
Lights
Vehicle features and options Symbol Function This chapter describes all standard, country- Low beams specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due Instrument lighting to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed. Parking lights, cornering lights and roadside parking lights Overview General information Switches in the vehicle Position of switch: , , If the driver's door is opened when the ignition is switched off, the exterior lighting is automat‐ ically switched off.
Parking lights Position of switch: The vehicle is illuminated on all sides. Do not use the parking lights for extended pe‐ The light switch element is located next to the riods; otherwise, they might drain the battery steering wheel. and it would then be impossible to start the en‐ gine. Symbol Function Canada: when parking, switch on the one- sided roadside parking light, refer to Front fog lights page 111.
Low beams Automatic headlight control Position of switch: Adaptive Light Control The low beams light up when the ignition is Lights off switched on. Daytime running lights Canada: roadside parking light Parking lights Concept The vehicle can be illuminated on one side.
111 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 112
Controls Lights
Switching on Headlight courtesy delay feature
General information The low beams stay illuminated for a particular time if the high beams are switched on after radio-ready state is switched off.
Setting the duration Using iDrive: 1. "My Vehicle" With the ignition switched off, press the lever 2. "Vehicle settings" either up or down past the resistance point. 3. "Lighting" Switching off 4. "Exterior lighting" Press the lever back into the standard position. 5. "Pathway lighting" 6. Set length of time. The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐ Welcome lamps and rently used. headlamp courtesy delay feature Automatic headlight control Welcome lamps Concept General information The low beams are switched on and off auto‐ Depending on the vehicle equipment and the matically depending on the ambient bright‐ ambient brightness, individual light functions ness, for instance in tunnels, in twilight or if may be switched on briefly when the vehicle is there is precipitation. unlocked. General information Activating/deactivating A blue sky with the sun low on the horizon can Position of switch: , cause the lights to be switched on. Using iDrive: When emerging from a tunnel during the day, the low beams are not switched off immedi‐ 1. "My Vehicle" ately but instead only after approx. 2 minutes. 2. "Vehicle settings" The low beams always stay on when the fog 3. "Lighting" light is switched on. 4. "Exterior lighting" Activating 5. "Welcome lights" Position of switch: The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐ rently used. The indicator light in the instrument cluster is illuminated when the low beams are switched on.
112 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 113
Lights Controls
System limits General information The automatic headlight control cannot serve Depending on the steering angle and other pa‐ as a substitute for your personal judgment of rameters, the light from the headlight follows lighting conditions. the course of the road. For example, the sensors are unable to detect To avoid blinding oncoming traffic, the Adap‐ fog or hazy weather. To avoid safety risks un‐ tive Light Control does not swivel to the driv‐ der these conditions, you should always switch er's side when the vehicle is at a standstill. on the lights manually. Depending on the equipment version, Adap‐ tive Light Control consists of one or several systems: Daytime running lights ▷ Cornering light, refer to page 113.
General information Activating Position of switch: , , Position of switch: The daytime running lights light up when the Adaptive Headlight Control is active when the ignition is switched on. After the ignition is engine is running. switched off, the parking lights light up in posi‐ tion . Cornering light Activating/deactivating In tight curves, for instance on mountainous roads or when turning, an additional, cornering In some countries, daytime running lights are light is switched on that lights up the inside of mandatory, so it may not be possible to deacti‐ the curve better when the vehicle is moving vate the daytime running lights. below a certain speed. Using iDrive: The cornering light is automatically switched 1. "My Vehicle" on depending on the steering angle or the use of turn signals. 2. "Vehicle settings" When driving in reverse, the cornering lights 3. "Lighting" may be automatically switched on regardless 4. "Exterior lighting" of the steering angle. 5. Select the desired setting. Settings are stored for the profile currently used. Adaptive headlight range control Adaptive Light Control The adaptive headlight range control compen‐ sates for acceleration and braking operations in order not to blind the oncoming traffic and to Concept achieve optimum illumination of the roadway. Adaptive Light Control is a variable headlamp control system that enables dynamic illumina‐ tion of the road surface.
113 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 114
Controls Lights
High-beam Assistant The high-beam Assistant is deactivated when manually switching the high beams on and off, Concept refer to page 84. The high-beam Assistant detects other traffic To reactivate the high-beam Assistant, press participants early on and automatically the button on the turn signal lever. switches the high beams on or off depending on the traffic situation. System limits The high-beam Assistant cannot serve as a General information substitute for the driver's personal judgment of The high-beam Assistant ensures that the high when to use the high beams. In situation that beams are switched on, whenever the traffic require this, therefore switch off manually. situation allows. In the low speed range, the The system is not fully functional in the follow‐ high beams are not switched on by the system. ing situations, and driver intervention may be The system responds to light from oncoming necessary: traffic and traffic driving ahead of you, and to ▷ In very unfavorable weather conditions, adequate illumination, for instance in towns such as fog or heavy precipitation. and cities. ▷ When detecting poorly-lit road users such The high beams can be switched on and off at as pedestrians, cyclists, horseback riders any time as usual. and wagons; when driving close to train or ship traffic; and at animal crossings. Activating/deactivating ▷ In tight curves, on hilltops or in depres‐ sions, in cross traffic or half-obscured on‐ coming traffic on highways. ▷ In poorly-lit towns and cities and in the presence of highly reflective signs. ▷ When the windshield in front of the interior mirror is fogged over, dirty or covered with stickers, etc.
Position of switch, depending on the vehicle Fog lights equipment: , Press and hold button on signal lever. Front fog lights
The indicator light in the instrument Concept cluster is illuminated when the low The front fog lights work alongside the low beams are switched on. beams to illuminate a wider area of the road‐ way. The headlights are automatically switched be‐ tween low beams and high beams. Functional requirement The blue indicator light in the instru‐ The low beams must be switched on before ment cluster lights up when the system switching on the front fog lights. switches on the high beams.
114 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 115
Lights Controls
Switching on/off Overview Press button. The green indicator light lights up if the front fog lights are switched on.
If the automatic headlight control, refer to page 112, is activated, the low beams will come on automatically when you switch on the front fog lights. When the high beams or headlight flasher are activated, the front fog lights are not switched 1 Interior lights on. 2 Reading lights
Instrument lighting Switching the interior lights on/off Press button. Functional requirement The parking lights or low beams must be To switch off permanently: press the button switched on to adjust the brightness. and hold for approx. 3 seconds.
Settings Switching the reading lights on/off Adjust the brightness with the Press button. thumbwheel. Depending on the vehicle equipment, the reading lights are located next to the interior lights in the front and rear.
Ambient light Interior lights General information General information Depending on the equipment version, lighting Depending on the equipment, the interior can be adjusted for some lights in the car's in‐ lights, footwell lights, entry lamps, and cour‐ terior. tesy lamps are controlled automatically. Thumb wheel for the instrument lighting con‐ Selecting color scheme trols brightness of some of these features. Using iDrive: 1. "My Vehicle" 2. "Vehicle settings" 3. "Lighting" 4. "Interior lighting" 5. "Ambient lighting" 6. Select the desired setting.
115 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 116
Controls Lights
With a color scheme selected and welcome lights activated they light up in the line's color when vehicle is unlocked.
Setting the brightness Depending on the equipment, the brightness of the ambient light can be adjusted via the thumbwheel for the instrument lighting or on the Control Display. Using iDrive: 1. "My Vehicle" 2. "Vehicle settings" 3. "Lighting" 4. "Interior lighting" 5. "Brightness" 6. Adjust the brightness.
116 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 117
Safety Controls
Safety
Vehicle features and options to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions This chapter describes all standard, country- and systems. When using these functions and specific and optional features offered with the systems, the applicable laws and regulations series. It also describes features that are not must be observed. necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
Airbags
1 Front airbag, driver 3 Side airbag 2 Front airbag, front passenger 4 Knee airbag
Front airbags Knee airbag Front airbags help protect the driver and the The knee airbag supports the legs in a frontal front passenger by responding to frontal im‐ impact. pacts in which safety belts alone would not provide adequate protection. Protective action Airbags are not triggered in every impact situa‐ Side airbag tion, e.g., in less severe accidents or rear-end In a lateral impact, the side airbag supports the collisions. side of the body in the chest, lap, and head area.
117 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 118
Controls Safety
Information on optimum effect of the ▷ Do not hang pieces of clothing, such as airbags jackets, over the backrests. WARNING ▷ Never modify either the individual compo‐ nents or the wiring in the airbag system. If the seat position is incorrect or the de‐ This also applies to steering wheel covers, ployment area of the airbags is impaired, the the dashboard, and the seats. airbag system cannot provide protection as in‐ tended and may cause additional injuries due ▷ Do not remove the airbag system. to triggering. There is a risk of injuries or dan‐ Even when you follow all instructions very ger to life. Follow the information on achieving closely, injury from contact with the airbags the optimum protective effect of the airbag cannot be fully ruled out in certain situations. system.◀ The ignition and inflation noise may lead to ▷ Keep a distance from the airbags. short-term and, in most cases, temporary hearing impairment in sensitive occupants. ▷ Make sure that occupants keep their heads away from the side airbag. Vehicle modifications for a person with disabili‐ ties may affect the air bag system; therefore, ▷ Always grasp the steering wheel on the contact BMW Customer Relations or your au‐ steering wheel rim. Hold your hands at the thorized BMW service center. 3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions, to keep the risk of injury to your hands or arms as Warnings and information on the airbags are low as possible when the airbag is trig‐ also found on the sun visors. gered. Functional readiness of the airbag ▷ Make sure that the front passenger is sit‐ system ting correctly, i.e., keeps his or her feet and legs in the floor area and does not support Safety information them on the dashboard. ▷ There should be no additional persons, an‐ WARNING imals or objects between an airbag and a Individual components can be hot after person. triggering of the airbag system. There is a risk ▷ Do not apply adhesive materials to the air‐ of injury. Do not touch individual compo‐ bag cover panels, do not cover them or nents.◀ modify them in any way. WARNING ▷ Dashboard and windshield on the front Improperly executed work can lead to passenger side must stay clear - do not at‐ failure, malfunction or unintentional triggering tach adhesive labels or coverings and do of the airbag system. In the case of a malfunc‐ not attach brackets or cables, for instance tion, the airbag system might not trigger as in‐ for GPS devices or mobile phones. tended in the event of an accident despite re‐ ▷ Do not use the cover of the front airbag on spective accident severity. There is a risk of the front passenger side as a storage area. injuries or danger to life. Have the airbag sys‐ ▷ Do not place slip covers, seat cushions or tem checked, repaired, dismantled and scrap‐ other objects on the front passenger seat ped by a dealer’s service center or another that are not specifically suited for seats qualified service center or repair shop.◀ with integrated side airbags.
118 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 119
Safety Controls
Correct function Malfunction of the automatic deactivation system When the ignition is switched on, the warning lamp in the instrument cluster When transporting older children and adults, lights up briefly and thereby indicates the front-seat passenger airbags may be deac‐ the operational readiness of the entire airbag tivated in certain sitting positions. In this case, system and the belt tensioner. the indicator lamp for the front-seat passenger airbags lights up. Airbag system malfunctioning In this case, change the sitting position so that the front-seat passenger airbags are activated ▷ Warning lamp does not come on when the and the indicator lamp goes out. ignition is turned on. If it is not possible to activate the airbags, have ▷ The warning lamp lights up continuously. the person sit in the rear. Automatic deactivation of the front- To enable correct recognition of the occupied seat passenger airbags seat cushion ▷ Do not attach covers, cushions, ball mats Concept or other items to the front passenger seat The system reads if the front passenger seat is unless they are specifically determined to occupied by measuring the human body's re‐ be safe for use on the front passenger sistance. seat. Front, knee and side airbag on the front pas‐ ▷ Do not place any electronic devices on the senger's side are either activated or deacti‐ passenger seat if a child restraint system is vated. to be installed on it. ▷ Do not place objects under the seat that General information could press against the seat from below. Before transporting a child on the front pas‐ ▷ No moisture in or on the seat. senger seat, refer to the safety notes and in‐ structions for children on the front passenger Indicator lamp for the front-seat seat, see Children. passenger airbags
Safety information WARNING To ensure the front-seat passenger air‐ bag function, the system must be able to de‐ tect whether a person is sitting in the front passenger seat. The entire seat cushion area must be used for this purpose. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Make sure that the front passenger keeps his or her feet in the The indicator lamp for the front-seat passen‐ floor area.◀ ger airbags indicates the operating state of the front-seat passenger airbags. The lamp indicates whether the airbags are ei‐ ther activated or deactivated.
119 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 120
Controls Safety
▷ The indicator lamp lights up A corresponding message appears on the when a child is properly Control Display. seated in a child restraint fix‐ 1. Press the switch and move the respective ing system or when the seat seat all the way forward, until it stops. is empty. The airbags on the front passenger side are not 2. Press the switch forward again. The seat activated. still moves forward slightly. ▷ The indicator lamp does not light up when, 3. Readjust the seat to the desired position. e.g., a correctly seated person of sufficient The calibration procedure is completed when size is detected on the seat. The airbags the message on the Control Display disap‐ on the front passenger side are activated. pears. If the message continues to be displayed, re‐ Detected child restraint systems peat the calibration. The system generally detects children seated If the message does not disappear after a re‐ in a child restraint system, particularly in child peat calibration, have the system checked as restraint systems required by NHTSA at the soon as possible. point in time when the vehicle was manufac‐ tured. After installing a child restraint system, make sure that the indicator light for the front- Rollover protection system seat passenger airbags lights up. This indi‐ cates that the child restraint system has been The concept detected and the front-seat passenger airbags are not activated. The rollover protection system is automatically activated in the event of a sufficiently serious Strength of the driver's and front-seat accident or if the longitudinal axis is tilted ex‐ passenger airbag cessively. The safety frames located behind the rear headrests extend within fractions of a The explosive power that activates driver's/ second. front-seat passenger airbags very much de‐ pends on the positions of the driver's/front Supplementing the reinforced front windshield passenger seat. frame, the rollover protection system further increases passenger safety. To maintain the accuracy of this function over the long term, calibrate the front seats as soon General information as a respective message appears on the Con‐ trol Display. Do not place any objects on the covers of the rollover protection system. Calibrating the front seats Safety information WARNING WARNING There is a risk of jamming when moving the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk of There can be damage or injuries when property damage. Make sure that the area of the rollover protection system is triggered. movement of the seat is clear prior to any ad‐ There is risk of injuries or risk of property dam‐ justment.◀ age. Make sure that the area of movement of the rollover protection system is clear.◀
120 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 121
Safety Controls
WARNING to close the hardtop. The protective function of Improperly executed work can lead to the system is then restored. failure, malfunction or unintentional triggering 1. Pull the release lever in the safety frame up of the system. In the case of a malfunction, the and hold it, arrow 1. system could not trigger as intended in the event of an accident despite respective acci‐ dent severity. There is a risk of injuries or dan‐ ger to life. Have the system checked, repaired, dismantled and scrapped by a dealer’s service center or another qualified service center or re‐ pair shop.◀
WARNING After triggering or damage, system func‐ tionality is limited or not available anymore. 2. Push the safety frame down, arrow 2. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. 3. Release the release lever only if the safety Have the system checked and replaced by a frame was pushed back almost completely. dealer’s service center or another qualified 4. Push the safety frame down until it notice‐ service center or repair shop in the event of ably engages. To do this, the safety frame triggering of or damage to the system.◀ must be pressed far into its holder; high WARNING levels of force are required. With an extended rollover protection sys‐ WARNING tem, the area of movement of the hardtop is If the safety frame is not engaged limited. There is risk of injuries or risk of prop‐ correctly, it can extend jerkily. There is risk erty damage. When the rollover protection sys‐ of injuries. When pressing down the trig‐ tem is extended, do not move the hardtop.◀ gered rollover protection system, do not bend over the safety frame.◀ Overview Slowly reduce pressure on the safety frame in order to test whether it is latched. 5. Proceed likewise with the second safety frame.
Malfunction A Check Control message is displayed when there is a malfunction.
Covers of the rollover protection system Tire Pressure Monitor TPM Triggered rollover protection system Concept If the rollover protection system was not The system monitors tire inflation pressure in placed under any stress after an automatic the four mounted tires. The system warns you triggering, it can be pushed back by hand, e.g.,
121 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 122
Controls Safety
if there is a significant loss of pressure in one One to four yellow wheels or more tires. For this purpose, sensors in the A flat tire or major drop in the tire inflation tire valves measure the tire inflation pressure pressure has occurred in the indicated tires. and tire temperature. Gray wheels General information It may not be possible to identify tire pressure With use of the system observe further infor‐ losses. mation found under Tire inflation pressure, re‐ Possible causes: fer to page 214. ▷ Malfunction. Functional requirements ▷ The system is being reset. The system must have been reset at the cor‐ rect tire inflation pressure; otherwise, reliable Additonal information signaling of a loss of tire inflation pressure is The status control display additionally shows not assured. the current tire inflation pressures and, de‐ Reset the system after each adjustment of the pending on the model, tire temperatures. It tire inflation pressure and after every tire or shows the actual values read; they may vary wheel change. depending on driving style or weather condi‐ tions. Always use wheels with TPM electronics to ensure that the system will operate properly. Resetting the system Status display General information The system status can be displayed on the A reset must be performed in the following sit‐ Control Display, e.g., whether or not the sys‐ uations: tem is active. ▷ After the tire inflation pressure has been Using iDrive: adjusted. 1. "My Vehicle" ▷ After a tire or wheel replacement. 2. "Vehicle status" 3. "Tire Pressure Monitor" Reset The current status is displayed. Using iDrive: 1. "My Vehicle" Tire conditions 2. "Vehicle status" General information 3. "Tire Pressure Monitor" Tire and system status are indicated by the 4. Start the engine but do not drive off. color of the wheels and a SMS text message 5. Reset tire inflation pressure: "Perform on the Control Display. reset". 6. Drive away. All wheels green The wheels are displayed in gray and the sta‐ System is active and will issue a warning re‐ tus is displayed. lated to the tire inflation pressures stored dur‐ ing the last reset. After driving faster than 19 mph/30 km/h for a short period, the set tire inflation pressures are
122 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 123
Safety Controls
accepted as reference values. The reset is Symbol Possible cause completed automatically while driving. Inflation was not carried out accord‐ After a successfully completed reset, the ing to specifications. wheels on the Control Display are shown in green and "Tire Pressure Monitor active. See The tire inflation pressure has fallen label for recommended pressures." is dis‐ below the level of the last reset. played. You may interrupt this trip at any time. When you continue the reset resumes automatically. Measure 1. Check the tire pressure and correct as Messages needed. 2. Reset the system. General information A low tire inflation pressure may cause the If the tire inflation pressure is too low DSC Dynamic Stability Control to be switched on. Message A yellow warning light is illuminated in Safety information the instrument cluster. WARNING In addition, a symbol with a Check Control A damaged regular tire with low or miss‐ message appears on the Control Display. ing tire inflation pressure impacts handling, such as steering and braking response. Run- Symbol Possible cause flat tires can maintain limited stability. There is a risk of an accident. Do not continue driving if There is a tire inflation pressure the vehicle is equipped with normal tires. Fol‐ loss. low the information on run-flat tires and contin‐ ued driving with these tires.◀ No reset was performed for the sys‐ tem. The system issues a warning based on the tire inflation pressures If a tire inflation pressure check is stored during the last reset. required
Message Measure A symbol with a Check Control message ap‐ 1. Reduce your speed and drive moderately. pears on the Control Display. Do not exceed a speed of 80 mph/130 km/h. Symbol Possible cause 2. At the next opportunity, for instance gas The system has detected a wheel station, check and correct the tire inflation change, but no reset was done. pressure in all four tires, if necessary. 3. Reset the system. No reset was performed for the sys‐ tem. The system issues a warning based on the tire inflation pressures stored during the last reset.
123 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 124
Controls Safety
If there is a significant loss of tire center or another qualified service center inflation pressure or repair shop. 2. Repair the flat tire, for instance with a tire Message repair kit or by changing the tire. A yellow warning light is illuminated in Use of sealant, for instance from the tire repair the instrument cluster. kit, may damage the TPM wheel electronics. In this case, have the electronics checked and re‐ In addition, a symbol with the affected tire ap‐ placed at the next opportunity. pears in a Check Control message on the Con‐ trol Display. Run-flat tires Symbol Possible cause Safety information There is a flat tire or a major loss in WARNING tire inflation pressure. Your vehicle handles differently with a No reset was performed for the sys‐ run-flat with no or low inflation pressure; for in‐ tem. The system issues a warning stance, your lane stability when braking is re‐ based on the tire inflation pressures duced, braking distances are longer and the stored during the last reset. self-steering properties will change. There is a risk of an accident.
Measure Drive moderately and do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.◀ 1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐ vers. Maximum speed 2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with You may continue driving with a damaged tire normal tires or run-flat tires. at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h. Run-flat tires, refer to page 222, are la‐ Continued driving with a flat tire beled with a circular symbol containing the letters RSC marked on the tire's sidewall. If continuing to drive with a damaged tire: 1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐ Actions in the event of a flat tire vers. 2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. Normal tires 3. Check the air pressure in all four tires at 1. Identify the damaged tire. the next opportunity. Check the air pressure in all four tires, for If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires instance using the tire pressure gage of a is correct, the Tire Pressure Monitor may tire repair kit. not have been reset. In this case, perform If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires the reset. is correct, the Tire Pressure Monitor may not have been reset. In this case, perform Possible driving range with a the reset. depressurized tire If identification of flat tire damage is not The possible driving range varies depending possible, please contact a dealer’s service on the how the vehicle is loaded and used, e.g.,
124 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 125
Safety Controls
speed, road conditions, external temperature. Malfunction The driving range may be less but may also be The yellow warning light flashes and is more if an economical driving style is used. then illuminated continuously. A Check If the vehicle is loaded with an average weight Control message is displayed. No flat and used under favorable conditions, its possi‐ tire or loss of tire inflation pressure can be de‐ ble driving range will be up to 50 miles/80 km. tected.
Vehicle handling with damaged tires Examples and recommendations in the follow‐ Vehicles driven with a damaged tire will handle ing situations: differently, potentially leading to conditions ▷ A wheel without TPM electronics is such as the following: mounted: have it checked by a dealer’s ▷ Greater likelihood of swerving off course. service center or another qualified service center or repair shop as needed. ▷ Longer braking distances. ▷ Malfunction: have system checked by a ▷ Changed self-steering properties. dealer’s service center or another qualified Adjust driving style. Avoid abrupt steering ma‐ service center or repair shop. neuvers or driving over obstacles, for instance ▷ TPM was unable to complete the reset. curbs, potholes, etc. Reset the system again.
Final tire failure ▷ Interference caused by systems or devices with the same radio frequency: after leav‐ Vibrations or loud noises while driving can indi‐ ing the area of the interference, the system cate the final failure of a tire. automatically becomes active again. Reduce speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of the tire could come loose and cause an acci‐ Declaration according to NHTSA/ dent. FMVSS 138 Tire Pressure Monitoring Do not continue driving. Contact a dealer’s System service center or another qualified service cen‐ Each tire, including the spare (if provided) ter or repair shop. should be checked monthly when cold and in‐ flated to the inflation pressure recommended System limits by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle The system does not function properly if a re‐ placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your set has not been carried out, for instance a flat vehicle has tires of a different size than the size tire is reported though tire inflation pressures indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation are correct. pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.) The tire inflation pressure depends on the As an added safety feature, your vehicle has tire's temperature. Driving or exposure to the been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring sun will increase the tire's temperature, thus system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pres‐ increasing the tire inflation pressure. The tire sure telltale when one or more of your tires is inflation pressure is reduced when the tire significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when temperature falls again. These circumstances the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you may cause a warning when temperatures fall should stop and check your tires as soon as very sharply. possible, and inflate them to the proper pres‐ The system cannot indicate sudden serious sure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire damage caused by external circumstances. tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to
125 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 126
Controls Safety
tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel ef‐ Functional requirements ficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the The system must have been initialized when vehicle's handling and stopping ability. Please the tire inflation pressure was correct; other‐ note that the TPMS is not a substitute for wise, reliable flagging of a flat tire is not as‐ proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's sured: responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, ▷ After a tire or wheel replacement, an initial‐ even if under-inflation has not reached the ization was performed with the correct tire level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low inflation pressure. tire pressure telltale. Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indi‐ ▷ After the tire inflation pressure was ad‐ cator to indicate when the system is not oper‐ justed to a new value, an initialization was ating properly. The TPMS malfunction indica‐ performed. tor is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunc‐ Status display tion, the telltale will flash for approximately one The current status of the flat tire monitor can minute and then remain continuously illumi‐ be displayed, for example, whether the RPA is nated. This sequence will continue upon sub‐ active. sequent vehicle start-ups as long as the mal‐ About iDrive: function exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to 1. "My Vehicle" detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. 2. "Vehicle status" TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of 3. "Flat Tire Monitor" reasons, including the installation of replace‐ ment or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle The status is displayed. that prevent the TPMS from functioning prop‐ erly. Always check the TPMS malfunction tell‐ Initialization required tale after replacing one or more tires or wheels An initialization must be performed in the fol‐ on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement lowing situations: or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS ▷ After the tire inflation pressure has been to continue to function properly. adjusted. ▷ After a tire or wheel replacement.
FTM Flat Tire Monitor Performing initialization Concept When initializing, the set tire inflation pres‐ sures serve as reference values in order to de‐ The system detects tire inflation pressure loss tect a flat tire. Initialization is started by con‐ on the basis of rotation speed differences be‐ firming the tire inflation pressures. tween the individual wheels while driving. Do not initialize the system when driving with In the event of a tire inflation pressure loss, the snow chains. diameter and therefore the rotational speed of the corresponding wheel changes. The differ‐ Using iDrive: ence will be detected and reported as a flat 1. "My Vehicle" tire. 2. "Vehicle status" The system does not measure the actual infla‐ 3. "Flat Tire Monitor" tion pressure in the tires.
126 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 127
Safety Controls
4. Start the engine but do not drive off. Run-flat tires, refer to page 222, are la‐ 5. Start the initialization with: "Perform reset" beled with a circular symbol containing the letters RSC marked on the tire's sidewall. 6. Drive away. The initialization is completed while driving, System limits which can be interrupted at any time. The system could be delayed or malfunction in The initialization automatically continues when the following situations: driving resumes. ▷ A natural, even tire inflation pressure loss in all four tires will not be recognized. Messages Therefore, check the tire inflation pressure regularly. General information ▷ Sudden serious tire damage caused by ex‐ When a flat tire is indicated, DSC Dynamic Sta‐ ternal circumstances cannot be recognized bility Control is switched on, if needed. in advance. Safety information ▷ When the system has not been initialized. ▷ When driving on a snowy or slippery road WARNING surface. A damaged regular tire with low or miss‐ ▷ Sporty driving style: spinning traction ing tire inflation pressure impacts handling, wheels, high lateral acceleration (drifting). such as steering and braking response. Run- flat tires can maintain limited stability. There is ▷ When driving with snow chains. a risk of an accident. Do not continue driving if the vehicle is equipped with normal tires. Fol‐ Actions in the event of a flat tire low the information on run-flat tires and contin‐ ued driving with these tires.◀ Normal tires 1. Identify the damaged tire. Indication of a flat tire Check the air pressure in all four tires, e.g., A yellow warning light is illuminated in using the tire pressure gage of a tire repair the instrument cluster. kit. If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires In addition, a symbol with a Check Control is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may not message appears on the Control Display. have been initialized. In this case, initialize the system. Symbol Possible cause If identification of flat tire damage is not There is a flat tire or a major loss in possible, please contact a dealer’s service tire inflation pressure. center or another qualified service center or repair shop. Measure 2. Repair the flat tire, e.g., with a tire repair kit or by changing the tire. 1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐ vers. 2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with normal tires or run-flat tires.
127 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 128
Controls Safety
Run-flat tires Vehicle handling with damaged tires Vehicles driven with a damaged tire will handle Safety information differently, potentially leading to conditions WARNING such as the following: Your vehicle handles differently with a ▷ Greater likelihood of swerving off course. run-flat with no or low inflation pressure; for in‐ ▷ Longer braking distances. stance, your lane stability when braking is re‐ ▷ Changed self-steering properties. duced, braking distances are longer and the self-steering properties will change. There is a Adjust driving style. Avoid abrupt steering ma‐ risk of an accident. neuvers or driving over obstacles, for instance curbs, potholes, etc. Drive moderately and do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.◀ Final tire failure Vibrations or loud noises while driving can indi‐ Maximum speed cate the final failure of a tire. You may continue driving with a damaged tire Reduce speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h. the tire could come loose and cause an acci‐ dent. Continued driving with a flat tire Do not continue driving. Contact a dealer’s If continuing to drive with a damaged tire: service center or another qualified service cen‐ 1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐ ter or repair shop. vers. 2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. Intelligent Safety 3. Check the air pressure in all four tires at the next opportunity. Concept If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires Intelligent Safety enables central operation of is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may not the driver assistance system. have been initialized. In this case, initialize the system. Depending on how the vehicle is equipped, In‐ telligent Safety consists of one or more sys‐ Possible driving range with a tems that can help prevent an imminent colli‐ depressurized tire sion. These systems are active automatically every time the engine is started using the The possible driving range varies depending Start/Stop button: on the how the vehicle is loaded and used, e.g., speed, road conditions, external temperature. ▷ Approach control warning, refer to The driving range may be less but may also be page 129. more if an economical driving style is used. ▷ Pedestrian warning, refer to page 135. If the vehicle is loaded with an average weight and used under favorable conditions, its possi‐ Safety information ble driving range will be up to 50 miles/80 km. WARNING Indicators and warnings do not relieve the driver from personal responsibility. Due to system limits, warnings or reactions of the sys‐
128 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 129
Safety Controls
tem may not be output or they may be output Switching on/off too late or incorrectly. There is a risk of an ac‐ The Intelligent Safety systems are automati‐ cident. Adjust the driving style to the traffic cally active after every departure. conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene in the respective situations.◀ Press button: the systems are turned off. The LED goes out. WARNING Press button: the systems are turned on. The Due to system limits, individual functions LED lights up. can malfunction during tow-starting/towing with the Intelligent Safety systems activated, Settings can be made on the Control Display. for instance approach control warning with braking function. There is a risk of an accident. Switch all Intelligent Safety systems off prior to Approach control warning tow-starting/towing.◀ Depending on the equipment, the collision warning system consists of one of the two sys‐ Overview tems: ▷ Approach control warning with City light Button in the vehicle braking function, refer to page 129. ▷ Approach control warning with braking function, refer to page 132
Front-end collision warning with City Braking function
Concept The system can help prevent accidents. If an Intelligent Safety button accident cannot be prevented, the system will help reduce the collision speed. Camera The system sounds a warning before an immi‐ nent collision and actuates brakes independ‐ ently, if needed. The automatic braking intervention is done with limited force and duration. A camera in the area of the rearview mirror controls the system. The approach control warning is available even if cruise control has been deactivated. With the vehicle approaching another vehicle The camera is installed near the interior mirror. intentionally, the approach control warning and Keep the windshield in front of the interior mir‐ braking are delayed in order to avoid false sys‐ ror clean and clear. tem reactions.
129 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 130
Controls Safety
General information Overview The system warns at two levels of an imminent danger of collision at speeds from approx. Button in the vehicle 3 mph/5 km/h. Time of warnings may vary with the current driving situation. Appropriate braking kicks in at speeds of up to 35 mph/60 km/h.
Detection range
Intelligent Safety button
Camera
Objects that the system can detect are taken into account.
Safety information WARNING Indicators and warnings do not relieve the driver from personal responsibility. Due to The camera is installed near the interior mirror. system limits, warnings or reactions of the sys‐ Keep the windshield in front of the interior mir‐ tem may not be output or they may be output ror clean and clear. too late or incorrectly. There is a risk of an ac‐ cident. Adjust the driving style to the traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively Switching on/off intervene in the respective situations.◀ Switching on automatically WARNING The system is automatically active after every Due to system limits, individual functions driving off. can malfunction during tow-starting/towing with the Intelligent Safety systems activated, Switching off for instance approach control warning with braking function. There is a risk of an accident. Press button: the system is switched Switch all Intelligent Safety systems off prior to off. The LED goes out. tow-starting/towing.◀ Re-press button: the system is switched on. The LED lights up.
130 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 131
Safety Controls
Setting the warning time assisted by a minor automatic braking inter‐ The warning time can be set. vention in a possible risk of collision. Using iDrive: Acute warnings can also be triggered without previous forewarning. 1. "My Vehicle" 2. "Vehicle settings" Braking intervention 3. "Intelligent Safety" The warning prompts the driver himself/herself 4. "Warning time" to react. During a warning, the maximum brak‐ ing force is used. Prerequisite for the brake 5. Select the desired setting. booster is sufficiently quick and hard stepping The selected time is stored for the driver pro‐ on the brake pedal. The system can assist with file currently used. some braking intervention if there is a risk of a collision. At low speeds vehicles may thus Warning with braking function come to a complete stop. The braking intervention is executed only if ve‐ Display hicle stability has not been restricted, for in‐ A warning symbol appears in the instrument stance by deactivating the DSC Dynamic Sta‐ cluster and in the Head-up Display if a collision bility Control. with a detected vehicle is imminent. The braking intervention can be interrupted by Symbol Measure stepping on the accelerator pedal or by ac‐ tively moving the steering wheel. Symbol lights up red: prewarning. Object detection can be restricted. Observe Brake and increase distance. the limitations of the detection range and func‐ tional restrictions. Symbol flashes red and an acoustic signal sounds: acute warning. System limits You are requested to intervene by braking or make an evasive maneu‐ Safety information ver. WARNING The system can react incorrectly or not Prewarning at all due to the system limits. There is a risk of This warning is issued, e.g., when there is the accidents or risk of property damage. Observe impending danger of a collision or the distance the information regarding the system limits to the vehicle ahead is too small. and actively intervene, if needed.◀ The driver must intervene actively when there is a prewarning. Detection range The system's detection potential is limited. Acute warning with braking function Thus, a system reaction might not come or Acute warning is displayed in case of the immi‐ might come late. nent danger of a collision when the vehicle ap‐ proaches another object at a high differential E.g., the following situations may not be de‐ speed. tected: The driver must intervene actively when there ▷ Slow moving vehicles when you approach is an acute warning. If necessary, the driver is them at high speed.
131 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 132
Controls Safety
▷ Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of The system sounds a warning before an immi‐ you, or sharply decelerating vehicles. nent collision and actuates brakes independ‐ ▷ Vehicles with an unusual rear appearance. ently, if needed. ▷ Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you. The automatic braking intervention is executed with limited braking force and for a brief period Functional limitations only. The system may not be fully functional in the If the vehicle is equipped with Active Cruise following situations: Control with Stop&Go, the approach control warning is controlled via the cruise control ra‐ ▷ In heavy fog, rain, sprayed water or snow‐ dar sensor. fall. The approach control warning is available even ▷ In tight curves. if cruise control has been deactivated. ▷ If the driving stability control systems are With the vehicle approaching another vehicle limited or deactivated, for instance DSC intentionally, the approach control warning and OFF. braking are delayed in order to avoid false sys‐ ▷ If, depending on the vehicle equipment tem reactions. version, the field of view of the camera in the mirror or the radar sensor is dirty or ob‐ General information scured. The system issues a two-phase warning of a ▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the en‐ possible danger of collision with vehicles at gine via the Start/Stop button. speeds above approx. 3 mph/5 km/h. Time of ▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐ warnings may vary with the current driving sit‐ ately after vehicle delivery. uation. ▷ If there are constant blinding effects be‐ cause of oncoming light, for instance from Detection range the sun low in the sky.
Warning sensitivity The more sensitive the warning settings are, such as the warning time, the more warnings are displayed. However, there may also be an excess of false warnings.
Collision warning with Objects that the system can detect are taken braking function into account.
Concept Safety information The system can help prevent accidents. If an WARNING accident cannot be prevented, the system will help reduce the collision speed. Indicators and warnings do not relieve the driver from personal responsibility. Due to system limits, warnings or reactions of the sys‐ tem may not be output or they may be output
132 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 133
Safety Controls
too late or incorrectly. There is a risk of an ac‐ Switching on/off cident. Adjust the driving style to the traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively Switching on automatically intervene in the respective situations.◀ The system is automatically active after every driving-off. WARNING Due to system limits, individual functions Switching off can malfunction during tow-starting/towing with the Intelligent Safety systems activated, Press button: the system is switched for instance approach control warning with off. The LED goes out. braking function. There is a risk of an accident. Re-press button: the system is switched on. Switch all Intelligent Safety systems off prior to The LED lights up. tow-starting/towing.◀ Setting the warning time Overview The warning time can be set. Button in the vehicle Using iDrive: 1. "My Vehicle" 2. "Vehicle settings" 3. "Intelligent Safety" 4. "Warning time" 5. Select the desired setting. The selected time is stored for the profile cur‐ rently used.
Intelligent Safety button Warning with braking function Display Radar sensor A warning symbol appears in the instrument A radar sensor is located in the front bumper cluster and in the Head-up Display if a collision for detecting vehicles on the road ahead of the with a detected vehicle is imminent. vehicle. Symbol Measure
Symbol lights up red: prewarning. Brake and increase distance.
Symbol flashes red and an acoustic signal sounds: acute warning. You are requested to intervene by braking or make an evasive maneu‐ ver.
Always keep radar sensor clean and unob‐ structed.
133 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 134
Controls Safety
Prewarning System limits This warning is issued, e.g., when there is the impending danger of a collision or the distance Safety information to the vehicle ahead is too small. WARNING The driver must intervene actively when there The system can react incorrectly or not is a prewarning. at all due to the system limits. There is a risk of accidents or risk of property damage. Observe Acute warning with braking function the information regarding the system limits Acute warning in displayed in case of the immi‐ and actively intervene, if needed.◀ nent danger of a collision when the vehicle ap‐ proaches another object at a high differential Detection range speed. The system's detection potential is limited. The driver must intervene actively when there Thus a system reaction might not come or is an acute warning. If necessary, the driver is might come late. assisted by an automatic braking intervention in a possible risk of collision. E. g. the following situations may not be de‐ tected: Acute warnings can also be triggered without previous forewarning. ▷ Slow moving vehicles when you approach them at high speed. Braking intervention ▷ Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of The detection of objects can be influenced by you, or sharply decelerating vehicles. technical system limitations, e.g. pedestrians ▷ Vehicles with an unusual rear appearance. or stationary objects. Limitations of the detec‐ ▷ Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you. tion range and functional restrictions are to be ▷ Pedestrians. considered. ▷ Stationary objects. The warning prompts the driver himself/herself to react. During a warning, the maximum brak‐ Functional limitations ing force is used. Premise for the brake boos‐ ter is sufficiently quick and hard stepping on The system may not be fully functional in the the brake pedal. The system can assist with following situations: automatic braking intervention if there is risk of ▷ In heavy fog, rain, sprayed water or snow‐ a collision. The intervention can bring the vehi‐ fall. cle to a complete stop. ▷ In tight curves. The braking intervention is executed only if ve‐ ▷ If the driving stability control systems are hicle stability has not been restricted, e.g. by limited or deactivated, for example, DSC deactivating the DSC Dynamic Stability Con‐ OFF. trol. ▷ If the radar sensor is dirty or obscured. Above approx. 130 mph/210 km/h the braking intervention occurs as a brief braking pressure. Warning sensitivity No automatic delay occurs. The more sensitive the warning settings are, The braking intervention can be interrupted by e.g., the warning time, the more warnings are stepping on the accelerator pedal or by ac‐ displayed. However, there may also be an ex‐ tively moving the steering wheel. cess of false warnings.
134 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 135
Safety Controls
Person warning with City the extended area only if they are moving in light braking function the direction of the central area.
The concept Safety information The system can help prevent accidents with WARNING pedestrians. Indicators and warnings do not relieve The system issues a warning in the city driving the driver from personal responsibility. Due to speed area if there is imminent danger of a col‐ system limits, warnings or reactions of the sys‐ lision with pedestrians and includes a braking tem may not be output or they may be output function. too late or incorrectly. There is a risk of an ac‐ The camera in the area of the rearview mirror cident. Adjust the driving style to the traffic controls the system. conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene in the respective situations.◀ General information WARNING With sufficient brightness, the system warns about possible collision danger with pedes‐ Due to system limits, individual functions trians starting at approx. 6 mph/10 km/h to ap‐ can malfunction during tow-starting/towing prox. 35 mph/60 km/h and assists with braking with the Intelligent Safety systems activated, before a collision. for instance approach control warning with braking function. There is a risk of an accident. The system reacts to people who are within Switch all Intelligent Safety systems off prior to the detection range of the system. tow-starting/towing.◀ Detection range Overview
Button in the vehicle
The detection area in front of the vehicle is div‐ ided into two areas: ▷ Central area, arrow 1, directly in front of the Intelligent Safety button vehicle. ▷ Expanded area, arrow 2, to the right and left of the central area. A collision is imminent if pedestrians are lo‐ cated within the central area. A warning is is‐ sued about pedestrians who are located within
135 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 136
Controls Safety
Camera Braking intervention The warning prompts the driver himself/herself to react. During a warning, the maximum brak‐ ing force is used. Prerequisite for the brake booster is sufficiently quick and hard stepping on the brake pedal. The system can assist with some braking intervention if there is a risk of a collision. At low speeds vehicles may thus come to a complete stop. The braking intervention is executed only if ve‐ The camera is installed near the interior mirror. hicle stability has not been restricted, for in‐ stance by deactivating the DSC Dynamic Sta‐ Keep the windshield in front of the interior mir‐ bility Control. ror clean and clear. The braking intervention can be interrupted by stepping on the accelerator pedal or by ac‐ Switching on/off tively moving the steering wheel. Object detection can be restricted. Observe Switching on automatically the limitations of the detection range and func‐ The system is automatically active after every tional restrictions. driving off. System limits Switching off Press button: the systems are Safety information switched off. The LED goes out. WARNING Press button: the systems are switched on. The system can react incorrectly or not The LED lights up. at all due to the system limits. There is a risk of accidents or risk of property damage. Observe Warning with braking function the information regarding the system limits and actively intervene, if needed.◀ Display If a collision with a person detected in this way Detection range is imminent, a warning symbol appears on the The detection potential of the camera is lim‐ instrument cluster and in the Head-up Display. ited. The red symbol is displayed and a sig‐ Thus, a warning might not be issued or be is‐ nal sounds. sued late. E.g., the following situations may not be de‐ With instrument display: the red sym‐ tected: bol is displayed and a signal sounds. ▷ Partially covered pedestrians. Intervene immediately by braking or make an ▷ Pedestrians that are not detected as such evasive maneuver. because of the viewing angle or contour. ▷ Pedestrians outside of the detection range.
136 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 137
Safety Controls
▷ Pedestrians having a body size less than Safety information 32 in/80 cm. WARNING Functional limitations The system does not release the driver from the personal responsibility to correctly The system may not be fully functional or may assess route and traffic situation. There is a not be available in the following situations: risk of an accident. Adjust the driving style to ▷ In heavy fog, rain, sprayed water or snow‐ the traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and fall. actively intervene in the respective situations. ▷ In tight curves. In the event of a warning, do not unnecessarily ▷ If the driving stability control systems are jerk the steering wheel.◀ deactivated, for instance DSC OFF. ▷ If the field of view of the camera or the Overview windshield are dirty or covered. Button in the vehicle ▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the en‐ gine via the Start/Stop button. ▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐ ately after vehicle delivery. ▷ If there are constant blinding effects be‐ cause of oncoming light, for instance from the sun low in the sky. ▷ When it is dark outside.
Lane departure warning Lane departure warning
The concept Camera Starting at a specific speed, this system alerts you when the vehicle on streets with lane markings is about to leave the lane. This speed, depending on the country version, is between 35 mph/55 km/h and 45 mph/70 km/h. When switching on the system below this speed, a message is displayed in the instru‐ ment cluster.
The steering wheel begins vibrating gently in The camera is installed near the interior mirror. the event of warnings. The time of the warning may vary depending on the current driving sit‐ Keep the windshield in front of the interior mir‐ uation. ror clean and clear. The system does not provide a warning if the turn signal is set before leaving the lane. Switching on/off Press button.
137 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 138
Controls Safety
▷ On: the LED lights up. the information regarding the system limits ▷ Off: the LED goes out. and actively intervene, if needed.◀ The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐ rently used. Functional limitations The system may not be fully functional in the Display in the instrument cluster following situations: ▷ Lines: system is activated. ▷ In heavy fog, rain or snowfall. ▷ Arrows: at least one lane marking ▷ In the event of missing, worn, poorly visi‐ was detected and warnings can be ble, merging, diverging, or multiple lane issued. markings such as in construction areas. ▷ When lane markings are covered in snow, Display in the instrument display ice, dirt or water. ▷ In tight curves or on narrow lanes. ▷ Symbol orange: system is acti‐ vated. ▷ When the lane markings are covered by objects. ▷ Green symbol: at least one lane marking was detected and warn‐ ▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in ings can be issued. front of you. ▷ When driving toward bright lights. Issued warning ▷ When the windshield in front of the interior mirror is fogged over, dirty or covered with If you leave the lane and if a lane marking has stickers, etc. been detected, the steering wheel begins vi‐ brating. ▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐ ately after vehicle delivery. If the turn signal is set before changing the lane, a warning is not issued.
End of warning Active Blind Spot Detection The warning is canceled in the following situa‐ The concept tions: ▷ Automatically after approx. 3 seconds. ▷ When returning to your own lane. ▷ When braking hard. ▷ When using the turn signal.
System limits
Safety information WARNING Two radar sensors in the rear bumper monitor the area behind and next to the vehicle at The system can react incorrectly or not speeds above approx. 30 mph/50 km/h. at all due to the system limits. There is a risk of accidents or risk of property damage. Observe
138 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 139
Safety Controls
The system indicates whether there are vehi‐ Radar sensors cles in the blind spot, arrow 1, or approaching from behind on the adjacent lane, arrow 2. The lamp in the exterior mirror housing is dim‐ med. Before you change lanes after setting the turn signal, the system issues a warning in the sit‐ uations described above. The lamp in the exterior mirror housing flashes and the steering wheel vibrates. The radar sensors are located in the rear Safety information bumper. WARNING The system does not release from the Switching on/off personal responsibility to correctly assess visi‐ Press button. bility and traffic situation. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust the driving style to the traffic ▷ On: the LED lights up. conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene in the respective situations.◀ ▷ Off: the LED goes out. The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐ Overview rently used.
Button in the vehicle Display Lamp in the exterior mirror housing
Active Blind Spot Detection
Prewarning The dimmed lamp in the exterior mirror hous‐ ing indicates when there are vehicles in the blind spot or approaching from behind.
Acute warning If the turn signal is set while a vehicle is in the critical zone, the steering wheel vibrates briefly
139 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 140
Controls Safety
and the lamp in the exterior mirror housing General information flashes brightly. The warning stops when the turn signal is switched off, or the other vehicle leaves the critical zone.
Brief flashing A brief flashing of the lamp during vehicle un‐ locking serves as system self-test.
System limits ▷ During normal brake application, the bot‐ tom brake lights light up. Safety information ▷ During heavy brake application, the top WARNING brake lights additionally light up. The system can react incorrectly or not at all due to the system limits. There is a risk of accidents or risk of property damage. Observe Attentiveness assistant the information regarding the system limits and actively intervene, if needed.◀ Concept The system can detect decreasing alertness or Functional limitations fatigue of the driver during long, monotonous The system may not be fully functional in the trips, e.g., on highways. In this situation, it is following situations: recommended that the driver takes a break. ▷ When a vehicle is approaching at a speed much faster than your own. Safety information ▷ In heavy fog, rain or snowfall. WARNING ▷ In tight curves or on narrow lanes. The system does not release from the ▷ If the bumper is dirty or iced up, or covered personal responsibility to correctly assess with stickers. one's physical state. An increasing lack of alertness or fatigue may not be detected or not ▷ If cargo protrudes. be detected in time. There is a risk of an acci‐ A Check Control message is displayed when dent. Make sure that the driver is rested and the system is not fully functional. alert. Adjust the driving style to the traffic con‐ ditions.◀
Brake force display Function Concept The system is activated each time the engine is started and cannot be switched off. Additional brake lamps indicate emergency braking to the traffic behind. This can reduce After travel has begun, the system monitors the risk of a rear-end collision. certain aspects of the driver's behavior, so that decreasing alertness or fatigue can be de‐ tected.
140 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 141
Safety Controls
This procedure takes the following criteria into account: ▷ Personal driving style, e.g., steering behav‐ ior. ▷ Driving conditions, e.g., length of trip. Starting at approximately 43 mph/70 km/h, the system is active and can display a recommen‐ dation to take a break.
Break recommendation If the driver becomes less alert or fatigued, a message is displayed in the Control Display with the recommendation to take a break. A recommendation to take a break is displayed only once during an uninterrupted trip. After a break, another recommendation to take a break cannot be displayed until after approxi‐ mately 45 minutes.
System limits The function may be limited in the following situations, e.g., and will either output an incor‐ rect warning or no warning at all: ▷ When the clock is set incorrectly. ▷ When the vehicle speed is mainly below about 43 mph/70 km/h. ▷ With a sporty driving style, such as during rapid acceleration or when cornering fast. ▷ In active driving situations, such as when changing lanes frequently. ▷ When the road surface is poor. ▷ In the event of strong side winds. The system is reset approx. 45 minutes after parking the vehicle, e.g., in the case of a break during longer trips on highways.
141 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 142
Controls Driving stability control systems
Driving stability control systems
Vehicle features and options DSC Dynamic Stability This chapter describes all standard, country- Control specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not The concept necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due Within the physical limits, the system helps to to the selected options or country versions. keep the vehicle on a steady course by reduc‐ This also applies to safety-related functions ing engine speed and by applying brakes to and systems. When using these functions and the individual wheels. systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed. General information Dynamic Stability Control detects, e.g., the fol‐ lowing unstable driving conditions: Anti-lock Braking System ▷ Fishtailing, which can lead to oversteering. ABS ▷ Loss of traction of the front wheels, which ABS prevents locking of the wheels during can lead to understeering. braking. Dynamic Traction Control DTC, refer to The vehicle maintains its steering power even page 143, is a version of the DSC where for‐ during full brake applications, thus increasing ward momentum is optimized. active safety. ABS is operational every time you start the en‐ Safety information gine. WARNING The system does not release from the personal responsibility to correctly assess the Brake assistant traffic situation. Based on the limits of the sys‐ When you apply the brakes rapidly, this system tem, it cannot independently react to all traffic automatically produces the greatest possible situations. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust braking force boost. It reduces the braking dis‐ the driving style to the traffic conditions. Watch tance to a minimum during emergency stop. traffic closely and actively intervene in the re‐ This system utilizes all of the benefits provided spective situations.◀ by ABS. Do not reduce the pressure on the brake pedal for the duration of the emergency stop.
142 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 143
Driving stability control systems Controls
Overview DSC OFF and the DSC OFF indicator lamp go out. Button in the vehicle Indicator/warning lights When DSC is deactivated, DSC OFF is dis‐ played in the instrument cluster. The indicator lamp lights up: DSC is deactivated.
DTC Dynamic Traction DSC OFF button Control
Concept Indicator/warning lights DTC is a version of the DSC where forward The indicator lamp flashes: DSC con‐ momentum is optimized. trols the drive and braking forces. The system ensures maximum headway on The indicator lamp lights up: DSC has special road conditions or loose road surfaces, malfunctioned. for instance unplowed snowy roads, but with somewhat limited driving stability. Deactivating DSC: DSC OFF When DTC is activated, the vehicle has maxi‐ mum traction. Driving stability is limited during General information acceleration and when driving in curves. When DSC is deactivated, driving stability is Drive carefully. reduced during acceleration and when driving You may find it useful to briefly activate DTC in curves. under the following special circumstances: To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC ▷ When driving in slush or on uncleared, again as soon as possible. snow-covered roads. ▷ When freeing vehicle from deep snow or Deactivating DSC driving off from loose ground. Press and hold this button but not lon‐ ▷ When driving with snow chains. ger than approx. 10 seconds, until the indicator light for DSC OFF lights up in the in‐ Deactivating/activating DTC Dynamic strument cluster and displays DSC OFF. Traction Control DSC is switched off. The steering and, depending on the equip‐ Activating DTC ment, suspension are tuned for sporty driving. Press button. TRACTION is displayed in the instru‐ Activating DSC ment cluster and the indicator light for DSC OFF lights up. Press button.
143 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 144
Controls Driving stability control systems
Deactivating DTC Variable sport steering Press button again. The support offered by the variable sport TRACTION and the DSC OFF indica‐ steering changes according to the angle by tor light go out. which the steering wheel has been turned and the speed. So, for instance the steering angle of the front xDrive wheels is made larger when parking or taking tight corners. This makes it easier to drive xDrive is the all-wheel-drive system of your ve‐ around bends. hicle. Concerted action by the xDrive and DSC Furthermore, the system provides the steering further optimize traction and driving dynamics. with more support at low speeds than at higher The xDrive all-wheel-drive system variably dis‐ ones. This makes it easier to park, for instance, tributes the drive forces to the front and rear and makes steering more direct when driving axles as demanded by the driving situation and at faster speeds. road surface. By taking the angle by which the steering wheel has been turned and the speed into ac‐ Dynamic Damping Control count, a sporty steering response adapted to the particular driving situation can be achieved. Concept This system reduces undesirable vehicle mo‐ Driving Dynamics Control tion when using a dynamic driving style or trav‐ eling on uneven road surfaces. Concept This enhances the driving dynamics and driv‐ The Driving Dynamics Control helps to fine- ing comfort depending on the road surface tune the vehicle's settings and features. Vari‐ condition and driving style. ous programs can be selected for this purpose. The Driving Dynamics Control and the DSC Programs OFF buttons can each be used to activate a The system offers several different programs. program. The programs can be selected via Driving Dy‐ namics Control. Overview
SPORT Button in the vehicle Consistently sporty control of the shock ab‐ sorbers for greater driving agility.
SPORT+ Consistently sporty control of the shock ab‐ sorbers for greater driving agility when driving with limited driving stabilization.
COMFORT/ECO PRO Balanced control of the vehicle.
144 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 145
Driving stability control systems Controls
Operating the programs The driver handles several of the stabilization tasks. Button Program Activating SPORT+ DSC OFF Press button repeatedly until SPORT+ TRACTION appears in the instrument cluster and SPORT+ the DSC OFF indicator light lights up. SPORT COMFORT Automatic program change ECO PRO When activating cruise control, the program automatically switches to SPORT mode. Automatic program change Indicator/warning lights The system may automatically switch to COM‐ SPORT+ is displayed in the instrument cluster. FORT in the following situations: ▷ Failure of Dynamic Damping Control. The DSC OFF indicator lamp lights up: Dynamic Traction Control is activated. ▷ Failure of DSC Dynamic Stability Control. ▷ The vehicle has a flat tire. SPORT ▷ When activating cruise control in TRAC‐ TION or DSC OFF mode. Concept DSC OFF Depending on the equipment, consistently sporty tuning of the suspension, steering, and When DSC OFF, refer to page 143, is active, drivetrain for greater driving agility with maxi‐ driving stability is limited during acceleration mum driving stabilization. and when driving in curves. The program can be configured to individual TRACTION specifications. The configuration is stored for the driver profile currently in use. When TRACTION is active, the vehicle has maximum traction on loose road surfaces. DTC Activating SPORT Dynamic Traction Control, refer to page 143, is activated. Driving stability is limited during ac‐ Press button repeatedly until SPORT celeration and when driving in curves. is displayed in the instrument cluster.
SPORT+ Configuring SPORT Using iDrive: Concept Sporty driving with optimized chassis and sus‐ 1. "My Vehicle" pension and adjusted drivetrain with limited 2. "Vehicle settings" driving stabilization. 3. If necessary, "Driving mode" General information 4. "Configure SPORT" Dynamic Traction Control is switched on. 5. Select the desired setting.
145 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 146
Controls Driving stability control systems
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐ The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐ rently used. rently used.
COMFORT Configuring driving program Settings can be made for the following driving Concept programs in Driving mode: For a balanced tuning with maximum driving ▷ SPORT, refer to page 145. stabilization. ▷ ECO PRO, refer to page 203. Activating COMFORT Displays Press button repeatedly until COM‐ FORT is displayed in the instrument Program selection cluster. Pressing the button displays a In certain situations, the system automatically list of the selectable programs. changes to the NORMAL program, automatic Depending on your vehicle's op‐ program change, refer to page 145. tional features, the list in the in‐ strument cluster can differ from ECO PRO the illustration shown.
Concept Selected program ECO PRO provides consistent tuning to mini‐ The instrument cluster displays mize fuel consumption for maximum range the selected program. with maximum driving stabilization. Comfort functions and the engine Controller are adjusted. The program can be configured to individual specifications. Drive-off assistant Activating ECO PRO Concept Press button repeatedly until ECO PRO is displayed in the instrument This system supports driving off on inclines. cluster. The parking brake is not required.
Driving off with the drive-off assistant Configuring ECO PRO 1. Hold the vehicle in place with the foot Using iDrive: brake. 1. "My Vehicle" 2. Release the foot brake and drive off with‐ 2. "Vehicle settings" out delay. 3. If necessary, "Driving mode" After the foot brake is released, the vehicle is held in place for approx. 2 seconds. 4. "Configure ECO PRO" Depending on the vehicle load, the vehicle may 5. Select the desired setting. roll back slightly.
146 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 147
Driving stability control systems Controls
Servotronic
Concept Servotronic is a speed-dependent power steering function. The system provides the steering force with more support at low speeds than at higher ones. This makes it easier to park, for instance, and makes steering more direct when driving at faster speeds. Furthermore, the steering force adapts accord‐ ing to the driving program, so that a direct, sporty feel or a comfortable steering response is conveyed.
147 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 148
Controls Driving comfort
Driving comfort
Vehicle features and options Safety information This chapter describes all standard, country- WARNING specific and optional features offered with the The system does not release from the series. It also describes features that are not personal responsibility to correctly assess the necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due traffic situation. Based on the limits of the sys‐ to the selected options or country versions. tem, it cannot independently react to all traffic This also applies to safety-related functions situations. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust and systems. When using these functions and the driving style to the traffic conditions. Watch systems, the applicable laws and regulations traffic closely and actively intervene in the re‐ must be observed. spective situations.◀
WARNING Active Cruise Control with An unsecured vehicle can begin to move Stop&Go function, ACC and possibly roll away. There is a risk of an ac‐ cident. Before exiting, secure the vehicle Concept against rolling. In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured Using this system, a desired speed and a dis‐ against rolling away, observe the following: tance to a vehicle ahead can be adjusted using the buttons on the steering wheel. ▷ Set the parking brake. The system maintains the desired speed on ▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope, clear roads. For this purpose, the vehicle ac‐ turn the front wheels in the direction of the celerates or brakes automatically. curb. If a vehicle is driving ahead of you, the system ▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope, adjusts the speed of your vehicle so that the also secure the vehicle, e.g., with a wheel set distance to the vehicle ahead is main‐ chock.◀ tained. The speed is adjusted as far as the WARNING given situation allows. The desired speed can be incorrectly ad‐ The distance can be adjusted in several steps. justed or called up by mistake. There is a risk For safety reasons, it depends on the respec‐ of an accident. Adjust the desired speed to the tive speed. traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and ac‐ If the vehicle ahead of you brakes to a halt, and tively intervene in the respective situations.◀ then proceeds to drive again within a brief pe‐ riod, the system is able to detect this within the WARNING given system limits. Risk of accident due to too high speed differences to other vehicles, e.g., in the fol‐ General information lowing situations: Depending on the driving settings, the features ▷ When fast approaching a slowly moving of the cruise control can change in certain vehicle. areas. ▷ Suddenly swerving vehicle onto the own lane.
148 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 149
Driving comfort Controls
▷ When fast approaching standing vehicles. Functional requirements There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene in Speed range the respective situations.◀ The system is best used on well-constructed roads. Overview The minimum speed that can be set is 20 mph/30 km/h. The maximum speed that Buttons on the steering wheel can be set depends on the vehicle. The system can also be activated when sta‐ Press but‐ Function tionary. ton
Cruise control on/off, interrupt, Switching on/off and interrupting refer to page 149 cruise control Store, maintain speed, refer to Switching on page 150 Press button on the steering wheel. Call up speed, continue cruise control, refer to page 151 The indicator lights in the instrument cluster light up and the mark in the speedometer is set Reduce distance, refer to to the current speed. page 150 Cruise control can be used. Increase distance, refer to DSC will be switched on, if needed. page 150
Rocker switch: Switching off Set speed, refer to page 150 To switch off the system while standing, step on brake pedal at the same time. Radar sensor Press button on the steering wheel. A radar sensor is located in the front bumper for detecting vehicles on the road ahead of the ▷ If active: press twice. vehicle. ▷ If interrupted: press once. The displays go out. The stored desired speed is deleted.
Interrupting manually Press button on the steering wheel.
If interrupting the system while stationary, press on the brake pedal at the same time.
Always keep radar sensor clean and unob‐ Interrupting automatically structed. The system is automatically interrupted in the following situations:
149 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 150
Controls Driving comfort
▷ When the driver applies the brakes. The speed can also be stored by ▷ When selector lever position D is disen‐ pressing a button. gaged. Press button. ▷ When DTC is activated or DSC is deacti‐ vated. Changing the speed ▷ When DSC is actively controlling stability. ▷ When SPORT+ is activated with Driving Dynamics Control. ▷ If the safety belt is unbuckled and the driv‐ er's door is opened while the vehicle is standing still. ▷ If the system has not detected objects for an extended period, for instance on a road with very little traffic without curb or shoulder markings. Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly ▷ If the detection range of the radar is im‐ until the desired speed is set. paired, for instance by dirt or heavy fog. If active, the displayed speed is stored and the ▷ After a stationary period of approx. 3 sec‐ vehicle reaches the stored speed when the onds when the vehicle has been braked to road is clear. a stop by the system. ▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed to the point of resistance, the desired speed Setting the speed increases or decreases by approx. 1 mph/1 km/h. Maintaining/storing the speed ▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed past the resistance point, the desired speed changes by a maximum of 5 mph/ 10 km/h. Hold the rocker switch in position to repeat the action.
Adjusting distance
Safety information Press the rocker switch while the system is in‐ WARNING terrupted. The system does not release from the When the system is switched on, the current personal responsibility. Due to the system lim‐ speed is maintained and stored as the desired its, braking can be late. There is a risk of acci‐ speed. dents or risk of property damage. Be aware to The stored speed is displayed in the speedom‐ the traffic situation at all times. Adjust the dis‐ eter and briefly in the instrument cluster, refer tance to the traffic and weather conditions and to page 151. maintain the prescribed safety distance, possi‐ bly by braking.◀ DSC will be switched on, if needed.
150 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 151
Driving comfort Controls
Reduce distance ▷ The marking does not light up: the system is switched off. Press button repeatedly until the de‐ sired distance is set. With instrument display: the symbol is Instrument cluster will display selected dis‐ displayed in the speedometer similarly tance, refer to page 151. to the mark for the desired speed.
Increase distance Brief status display Press button repeatedly until the de‐ Selected desired speed. sired distance is set.
Instrument cluster will display selected dis‐ If no speed is indicated, it is possible that the tance, refer to page 151. conditions necessary for operation are not cur‐ rently fulfilled. Continuing cruise control Distance to vehicle ahead of you General information Selected distance to the vehicle ahead of you An interrupted cruise control can be continued is shown. by calling up the stored speed. Distance display Make sure that the difference between current speed and stored speed is not too large before Distance 1 calling up the stored speed. Otherwise, unin‐ tentional braking or accelerating may occur. In the following cases, the stored speed value Distance 2 is deleted and cannot be called up again: ▷ When the system is switched off. Distance 3 ▷ When the ignition is switched off.
Calling up stored speed and distance Distance 4 Press button with the system This value is set automatically after switched on. the system is switched on.
The system has been interrupted or Displays in the instrument cluster distance control is temporarily sup‐ pressed because the accelerator Desired speed and stored speed pedal is being pressed; a vehicle ▷ Marking lights up green: was not detected. system is active, the mark‐ Distance control is temporarily sup‐ ing indicates the desired pressed because the accelerator speed. pedal is being pressed; a vehicle ▷ Marking lights up orange: was detected. system is interrupted, the marking indicates the stored speed.
151 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 152
Controls Driving comfort
Detected vehicle System limits Symbol lights up orange: Detection range A vehicle has been detected ahead of you.
Rolling bars: the detected vehicle has driven away. ACC does not accelerate. To accelerate, acti‐ vate ACC by briefly stepping on the accelera‐ tor pedal, pressing the RES button or rocker switch.
Indicator/warning lights The detection capacity of the system and the Symbol flashes orange: automatic braking capacity are limited. The conditions are not adequate for Two-wheeled vehicles driving ahead of you the system to work. for instance might not be detected. The system was deactivated but applies the brakes until you actively resume control by Deceleration pressing on the brake pedal or accelerator The system does not decelerate when a sta‐ pedal. tionary obstacle is located in the same lane, e.g., a vehicle at a red traffic light or at the end Symbol flashes red and a signal of traffic congestion. sounds: The system also does not react in the follow‐ You are requested to intervene by ing situations: braking or make an evasive maneuver. ▷ For pedestrians or similarly slow-moving road users. Displays in the Head-up Display ▷ For red traffic lights. Some system information can also be dis‐ ▷ Stationary objects. played in the Head-up Display. ▷ For cross traffic. ▷ For oncoming traffic.
152 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 153
Driving comfort Controls
Swerving vehicles Cornering
A vehicle driving in front of you is not detected If the desired speed is too high for a curve, the until it is completely within the same lane as speed is reduced slightly, although curves can‐ your vehicle. not be anticipated in advance. Therefore, drive If a vehicle driving ahead of you suddenly into a curve at an appropriate speed. swerves into your lane, the system may not be The system has a limited detection range. Sit‐ able to automatically restore the selected dis‐ uations can arise in tight curves where a vehi‐ tance. It may not be possible to restore the se‐ cle driving ahead will not be detected or will be lected distance in certain situations, including detected very late. if you are driving significantly faster than vehi‐ cles driving ahead of you, for instance when rapidly approaching a truck. When a vehicle driving ahead of you is reliably detected, the system requests that the driver intervene by braking and carrying out evasive maneuvers, if needed.
Unexpected lane change
When you approach a curve the system may briefly report vehicles in the next lane due to the bend of the curve. If the system deceler‐ ates you may compensate it by briefly acceler‐ ating. After releasing the accelerator pedal the sys‐ tem is reactivated and controls speed inde‐ pendently.
If a vehicle ahead of you unexpectedly moves into another lane from behind a stopped vehi‐ Driving away cle, you yourself must react, as the system In some situations, the vehicle cannot drive off does not react to stopped vehicles. automatically; for example: ▷ On steep inclines. ▷ From bumps in the road. In these cases, step on the accelerator pedal.
153 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 154
Controls Driving comfort
Weather General information The following restrictions can occur under un‐ Depending on the driving settings, the features favorable weather or light conditions: of the cruise control can change in certain ▷ Poorer vehicle recognition. areas. ▷ Short-term interruptions for vehicles that Safety information are already recognized. Examples of unfavorable weather or light con‐ WARNING ditions: The system does not release from the ▷ Rain. personal responsibility to correctly assess the traffic situation. Based on the limits of the sys‐ ▷ Snowfall. tem, it cannot independently react to all traffic ▷ Slush. situations. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust ▷ Fog. the driving style to the traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene in the re‐ ▷ Glare. spective situations.◀ Drive attentively, and react to the current traffic situation. If necessary, intervene actively, for WARNING instance by braking, steering or evading. The use of the system can lead to an in‐ creased risk of accidents in the following situa‐ Engine power tions: The desired speed is also maintained downhill, ▷ On winding roads. but may not be maintained on uphill grades if ▷ In heavy traffic. engine power is insufficient. ▷ On slippery roads, in fog, snow or rain, or Malfunction on a loose road surface. The system cannot be activated if the radar There is a risk of accidents or risk of property sensor is not aligned correctly. This may be damage. Only use the system if driving at con‐ caused by damage incurred, e.g., during park‐ stant speed is possible.◀ ing. WARNING A Check Control message is displayed if the The desired speed can be incorrectly ad‐ system fails. justed or called up by mistake. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust the desired speed to the traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and ac‐ Cruise control tively intervene in the respective situations.◀ The concept Using this system, a desired speed can be ad‐ justed using the buttons on the steering wheel. The system maintains the desired speed. The system accelerates and brakes automatically as needed.
154 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 155
Driving comfort Controls
Overview ▷ When the driver applies the brakes. ▷ If the clutch pedal is depressed for a few Buttons on the steering wheel seconds or released while a gear is not en‐ gaged. Button Function ▷ If the gear engaged is too high for the cur‐ Cruise control on/off, interrupting, rent speed. refer to page 155. ▷ When selector lever position D is disen‐ gaged. Store speed, refer to page 155. ▷ When DTC is activated or DSC is deacti‐ vated. Resume speed, continue cruise con‐ trol, refer to page 156. ▷ When DSC is actively controlling stability. ▷ When SPORT+ is activated with Driving Rocker switch: adjust speed, refer to Dynamics Control. page 155. Setting the speed Switching on/off and interrupting cruise control Maintaining/storing the speed
Switching on Press button on the steering wheel.
The marking in the speedometer is set to the current speed. Cruise control can be used. DSC will be switched on, if needed.
Switching off Press the rocker switch while the system is in‐ terrupted. Press button on the steering wheel. When the system is switched on, the current ▷ If active: press twice. speed is maintained and stored as the desired speed. ▷ If interrupted: press once. The stored speed is displayed in the speedom‐ The displays go out. The stored desired speed eter and briefly in the instrument cluster, refer is deleted. to page 156. Interrupting manually DSC will be switched on, if needed. The speed can also be stored by pressing a When active, press the button on the button. steering wheel. Press button. Interrupting automatically The system is automatically interrupted in the following situations:
155 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 156
Controls Driving comfort
Changing the speed In the following cases, the stored speed value is deleted and cannot be called up again: ▷ When the system is switched off. ▷ When the ignition is switched off.
Calling up stored speed Press button on the steering wheel.
The stored speed is reached again and main‐ tained. Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly until the desired speed is set. Displays in the instrument cluster If active, the displayed speed is stored and the vehicle reaches the stored speed when the Indicator lamp road is clear. Depending on how the vehicle is equip‐ ▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed to ped, the indicator lamp in the instru‐ the point of resistance, the desired speed ment cluster indicates whether the sys‐ increases or decreases by approx. tem is switched on. 1 mph/1 km/h. ▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed Desired speed and stored speed past the point of resistance, the desired ▷ Marking lights up green: speed increases or decreases by a maxi‐ system is active, the mark‐ mum of 5 mph/10 km/h. ing indicates the desired The maximum speed that can be set de‐ speed. pends on the vehicle. ▷ Marking lights up orange: ▷ Pressing the rocker switch to the resist‐ system is interrupted, the ance point and holding it accelerates or de‐ marking indicates the stored celerates the vehicle without requiring speed. pressure on the accelerator pedal. ▷ The marking does not light up: the system After the rocker switch is released, the ve‐ is switched off. hicle maintains its final speed. Pressing the switch beyond the resistance point causes With instrument display: the symbol is the vehicle to accelerate more rapidly. displayed in the speedometer similarly to the mark for the desired speed. Continuing cruise control Brief status display General information An interrupted cruise control can be continued Selected desired speed. by calling up the stored speed.
Make sure that the difference between current If no speed is indicated, it is possible that the speed and stored speed is not too large before conditions necessary for operation are not cur‐ calling up the stored speed. Otherwise, unin‐ rently fulfilled. tentional braking or accelerating may occur.
156 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 157
Driving comfort Controls
Displays in the Head-up Display Safety information Some system information can also be dis‐ WARNING played in the Head-up Display. The system does not release from the personal responsibility to correctly assess the System limits traffic situation. Based on the limits of the sys‐ tem, it cannot independently react to all traffic Engine power situations. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust The desired speed is also maintained downhill, the driving style to the traffic conditions. Watch but may not be maintained on uphill grades if traffic closely and actively intervene in the re‐ engine power is insufficient. spective situations.◀
WARNING PDC Park Distance Control Due to high speeds when PDC is acti‐ vated, the warning can be delayed due to Concept physical circumstances. There is a risk of injury PDC is a support when parking. When you or risk of property damage. Avoid approaching slowly approach an object in the rear - or also an object too fast. Avoid driving off fast while in the front of the vehicle if the feature is availa‐ PDC is not yet active.◀ ble - then the object is reported through: ▷ Signal tones. Overview ▷ Visual display. With front PDC: button in vehicle With appropriate equipment: obstacles on the side of the vehicle that are detected by the sensors of the parking assistant can also be re‐ ported by the PDC. See side protection, refer to page 159.
General information The ultrasound sensors for measuring the dis‐ tances are located in the bumpers. The maneuvering range, depending on the ob‐ stacle and environmental conditions, is approx. Park assistance button 6 ft/2 m. An acoustic warning is first given in the follow‐ Ultrasound sensors ing situations: Ultrasound sensors of the PDC, ▷ By the front sensors and the two rear cor‐ for instance in the bumpers. ner sensors at approx. 24 in/60 cm from the object. ▷ By the rear middle sensors at a distance to the object of approx. 5 ft/1.50 m. ▷ When a collision is imminent. Functional requirements ▷ With parking assistant: by the side sensors Ensure full functionality: at approx. 24 in/60 cm from the object.
157 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 158
Controls Driving comfort
▷ Do not cover sensors, for instance with ▷ Off: the LED goes out. stickers, bicycle racks. The rearview camera image is displayed if the ▷ Keep the sensors clean and unobstructed. reverse gear is engaged when pressing the park assistance button. Switching on/off WARNING Switching on automatically The system switches on automatically in the Signal tones following situations: An intermittent tone indicates when the vehi‐ ▷ If selector lever position R is engaged cle is approaching an object. E.g., if an object when the engine is running. is detected to the left rear of the vehicle, a sig‐ nal tone sounds from the left rear speaker. The rearview camera also switches on. The shorter the distance to the object, the ▷ If equipped with parking assistant: when shorter the intervals. obstacles are detected behind or in front of the vehicle by PDC and the speed is slower If the distance to a detected object is less than than approx. 2.5 mph/4 km/h. approx. 10 inches/25 cm, a continuous tone is sounded. You may switch automatic activation on and off when obstacles are detected. Using iDrive: With front PDC: if objects are simultaneously located both in front of and behind the vehicle, 1. "My Vehicle" an alternating continuous signal is sounded. 2. "Vehicle settings" The signal tone is switched off, when selector 3. "Parking" lever position P is engaged on vehicles with 4. "Automatic PDC activation": only with re‐ Steptronic transmission. spective equipment. Volume 5. "Automatic PDC activation" The ratio of the PDC signal tone volume to the The setting is stored for the driver profile entertainment volume can be adjusted. currently used. Using iDrive: If necessary, switch off automatic PDC activa‐ tion on obstacle detection, for instance in vehi‐ 1. "My Vehicle" cle washes, to reduce false alarms. 2. "iDrive settings" 3. "Tone" Automatic deactivation during forward travel 4. "Volume settings" The system switches off when a certain driving 5. "PDC" distance or speed is exceeded. 6. Set the desired value. Switch the system back on, if needed. The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐ rently used. With front PDC: switching on/off manually Press park assistance button.
▷ On: the LED lights up.
158 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 159
Driving comfort Controls
Visual warning Display
The approach of the vehicle to an object is To protect the sides of the vehicle, obstacle shown on the Control Display. Objects that are markings are displayed on the vehicle at the farther away are already displayed on the Con‐ sides. trol Display before a signal sounds. ▷ Color markings: warning against detected obstacles. A display appears as soon as Park Distance Control (PDC) is activated. ▷ Gray markings, hatched area: no obstacles were detected. The range of the sensors is represented in the colors green, yellow and red. ▷ No markings, black area: the area next to the vehicle was not yet captured. When the image of the rearview camera is dis‐ played, the switch can be made to PDC: Limits of side protection 1. Move the Controller to the left, if needed. The system only displays stationary obstacles 2. "Rear view camera" that were previously detected by sensors while passing them. With appropriate protection: side protection The system does not detect whether an obsta‐ cle moves later on. If the vehicle is stationary, Concept the markings are shown in black after a certain time. The area next to the vehicle must be The system warns of obstacles on the side of newly captured. the vehicle. System limits General information The system uses the ultrasound sensors of Safety information PDC and parking assistant. WARNING The system can react incorrectly or not at all due to the system limits. There is a risk of accidents or risk of property damage. Observe the information regarding the system limits and actively intervene, if needed.◀
159 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 160
Controls Driving comfort
Limits of ultrasonic measurement ▷ In large buildings with right angles and Ultrasonic measurements might not function in smooth walls, for instance in underground the following situations: garages. ▷ For small children and animals. ▷ In automatic vehicle washes. ▷ For persons with certain clothing, e.g., ▷ Due to heavy exhaust. coats. ▷ Due to other ultrasound sources, for in‐ ▷ With external interference of the ultra‐ stance sweeping machines, high pressure sound, e.g., from passing vehicles or loud steam cleaners or neon lights. machines. As soon as the malfunction due to other ultra‐ ▷ When sensors are dirty, iced over, dam‐ sound sources is no longer present, the sys‐ aged or out of position. tem is again fully functional. ▷ Under certain weather conditions such as If necessary, switch off automatic PDC activa‐ high relative humidity, rain, snowfall, ex‐ tion on obstacle detection, for instance in vehi‐ treme heat or strong wind. cle washes, to reduce false alarms. ▷ With tow bars and trailer couplings of other Malfunction vehicles. A Check Control message is displayed. ▷ With thin or wedge-shaped objects. The range of the sensors is shown as a shaded ▷ With moving objects. area on the Control Display. ▷ With elevated, protruding objects such as PDC has failed. Have the system checked by a ledges or cargo. dealer’s service center or another qualified ▷ With objects with corners and sharp edges. service center or repair shop. ▷ With objects with a fine surface structure such as fences. ▷ For objects with porous surfaces. Surround View ▷ If cargo protrudes. The concept ▷ Low objects already displayed, e.g., curbs, Surround View comprises various camera as‐ can move into the blind area of the sensors sistance systems that help the driver when before or after a continuous tone sounds. parking, maneuvering, and at complex exits and intersections. False warnings ▷ Rearview camera, refer to page 160. The system may issue a warning under the fol‐ lowing conditions even though there is no ob‐ ▷ Side View, refer to page 163. stacle within the detection range: ▷ Top View, refer to page 164. ▷ In heavy rain. ▷ When sensors are very dirty or covered with ice. Rearview camera ▷ When sensors are covered in snow. Concept ▷ On rough road surfaces. The rearview camera provides assistance in ▷ On uneven surfaces, such as speed parking and maneuvering backwards. The area bumps. behind the vehicle is shown on the Control Display.
160 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 161
Driving comfort Controls
Safety information Switching on/off WARNING Switching on automatically The system does not relieve from the The system is switched on automatically if se‐ personal responsibility to correctly assess the lector lever position R is engaged when the en‐ traffic situation. There is a risk of an accident. gine is running. Adjust the driving style to the traffic condi‐ tions. Watch traffic and vehicle surroundings Automatic deactivation during forward closely and actively intervene in the respective travel situations.◀ The system switches off when a certain driving distance or speed is exceeded. Overview Switch the system back on, if needed. If the vehicle is equipped accordingly: button in the vehicle If the vehicle is equipped accordingly: switching on/off manually Press park assistance button.
▷ On: the LED lights up. ▷ Off: the LED goes out. The PDC is shown on the Control Display. The rearview camera image is displayed if the reverse gear is engaged when pressing the park assistance button. Park assistance button Switching the view via iDrive Camera With PDC activated or Top View switched on: 1. Move the Controller to the left if needed. 2. "Rear view camera" The rearview camera image is displayed.
Display on the Control Display
Functional requirement ▷ The rearview camera is switched on. ▷ The tailgate is fully closed. The camera lens is located in the handle of the tailgate. ▷ Keep the recording range of the camera clear. Protruding cargo or carrier systems The image quality may be impaired by dirt. If and trailers that are not connected to a necessary, clean the camera lens. trailer power socket can lead to malfunc‐ tions.
161 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 162
Controls Driving comfort
Activating assistance functions Turning radius lines More than one assistance function can be ac‐ tive at the same time. Move the Controller to the left, if needed. ▷ Parking aid lines "Parking aid lines" Lanes and turning radius are indicated. ▷ Obstacle marking "Obstacle marking" If the vehicle is equipped accordingly, spa‐ Turning radius lines can only be superimposed tially shaped markings are displayed. on the rearview camera image together with pathway lines. Pathway lines Turning radius lines show the course of the smallest possible turning radius on a level road. Only one turning radius line is displayed after the steering wheel is turned past a certain an‐ gle.
Obstacle marking
Pathway lines can be superimposed on the im‐ age of the rearview camera. Pathway lines help you to estimate the space required when parking and maneuvering on level roads. Pathway lines depend on the current steering angle and are continuously adjusted to the steering wheel movements. If the vehicle is equipped accordingly, obstacle markings can be faded into the image of the rearview camera. The colored thresholds of the obstacle mark‐ ings match the markings of the PDC.
162 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 163
Driving comfort Controls
Parking using pathway and turning System limits radius lines 1. Position the vehicle so that the turning ra‐ Detection of objects dius lines lead to within the limits of the Very low obstacles as well as high, protruding parking space. objects such as ledges may not be detected by the system. If the vehicle is equipped accordingly, certain assistance functions also take into account data from the PDC. Follow instructions in the PDC chapter. The objects displayed on the Control Display may be closer than they appear. Do not esti‐ mate the distance from the objects on the dis‐ play. 2. Turn the steering wheel to the point where the pathway line covers the corresponding turning radius line. Side View
Concept Side View provides an early look at cross traffic at blind driveways and intersections. Road users concealed by obstacles to the left and right of the vehicle can only be detected rela‐ tively late from the driver's seat. To improve visibility, two cameras in the front of the vehi‐ cle record the traffic situation on each side. The images from both cameras are shown si‐ Display settings multaneously on the Control Display.
Brightness. Safety information With the rearview camera switched on: WARNING 1. Move the Controller to the left if needed. The system does not relieve from the personal responsibility to correctly assess the 2. Select the symbol. traffic situation. There is a risk of an accident. 3. Turn the Controller until the desired set‐ Adjust the driving style to the traffic condi‐ ting is reached, and press the Controller. tions. Watch traffic and vehicle surroundings closely and actively intervene in the respective Contrast. situations.◀ With the rearview camera switched on:
1. Move the Controller to the left if needed. 2. Select the symbol. 3. Turn the Controller until the desired set‐ ting is reached, and press the Controller.
163 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 164
Controls Driving comfort
Overview Display The traffic area to the left and right is displayed Button in the vehicle on the Control Display.
Side View Guidelines at the bottom of the image show the position of the front of the vehicle.
Cameras Brightness With the Side View switched on: 1. Move the Controller to the left, if needed. 2. "Brightness" 3. Turn the Controller until the desired set‐ ting is reached, and press the Controller.
Contrast With the Side View switched on: Two cameras integrated in the bumpers cap‐ ture the image. 1. Move the Controller to the left, if needed. The two camera lenses are located on the 2. "Contrast" sides of the bumper. 3. Turn the Controller until the desired set‐ The image quality may be impaired by dirt. If ting is reached, and press the Controller. required, clean the camera lenses. System limits Switching on/off The cameras capture a maximum range of 330 ft/100 m. Switching on/off manually Press button. Top View
Concept Automatic deactivation during forward travel Top View provides assistance in parking and maneuvering. The area around the doors and The system switches off when a certain driving the road area around the vehicle are shown on distance or speed is exceeded. the Control Display for this purpose. Switch the system back on, if needed.
164 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 165
Driving comfort Controls
General information Cameras The image is captured by two cameras integrated in the exterior mirrors and by the rearview camera. The range is at least 7 ft/2 m to the side and rear. In this way, obstacles up to the height of the exterior mirrors are detected early.
Safety information Cameras at the bottom in the mirror housings. WARNING The system does not relieve from the personal responsibility to correctly assess the traffic situation. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust the driving style to the traffic condi‐ tions. Watch traffic and vehicle surroundings closely and actively intervene in the respective situations.◀
Overview Rearview camera Button in the vehicle The image quality may be impaired by dirt. If required, clean the camera lenses.
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically The system is automatically switched on if se‐ lector lever position R is engaged when the en‐ gine is running. The rearview camera image is displayed. To Park assistance button switch to the Top View: 1. Move the controller to the left, if needed. 2. "Rear view camera"
Automatic deactivation during forward travel The system switches off when a certain driving distance or speed is exceeded. Switch the system back on, if needed.
165 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 166
Controls Driving comfort
Switching on/off manually Contrast. Press park assistance button. With Top View switched on: 1. Move the Controller to the left if needed. ▷ On: the LED lights up. 2. Select the symbol. ▷ Off: the LED goes out. 3. Turn the Controller until the desired set‐ Top View is displayed. ting is reached, and press the Controller. The rearview camera image is displayed when the reverse gear is engaged when pressing the Displaying the turning radius and park assistance button. pathway lines ▷ The static, red turning radius line shows Display the space needed to the side of the vehicle when the steering wheel is turned all the Visual warning way. The approach of the vehicle to an object can ▷ The variable, green pathway line assists be shown on the Control Display. you in assessing the amount of space ac‐ When the distance to an object is small, a red tually needed to the side of the vehicle. bar is shown in front of the vehicle, as it is in The lane line depends on the engaged the PDC display. gear and the current steering angle. The track line is continuously adjusted for the steering wheel movement. 1. Move the Controller to the left if needed. 2. "Parking aid lines" Turning circle and pathway lines are displayed.
System limits Top View cannot be used in the following sit‐ uations: The display appears as soon as Top View is activated. ▷ With a door open. ▷ With the tailgate open. When the image of the rearview camera is dis‐ ▷ With an exterior mirror folded in. played, it is possible to switch to top view: ▷ In poor light. 1. Move the Controller to the left, if needed. A Check Control message is displayed in some 2. "Rear view camera" of these situations.
Brightness. With Top View switched on:
1. Move the Controller to the left if needed. 2. Select the symbol. 3. Turn the Controller until the desired set‐ ting is reached, and press the Controller.
166 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 167
Driving comfort Controls
Parking assistant traffic closely and actively intervene in the re‐ spective situations.◀ Concept NOTE The parking assistant can steer the vehi‐ cle over or onto curbs. There is a risk of prop‐ erty damage. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene in the respective situations.◀ Also observe the safety information for PDC Park Distance Control.
Overview The system supports parking in the following Button in the vehicle situations: ▷ When parking parallel to the road. ▷ When reverse parking diagonally to the road.
General information Parking assistant handling is divided into three steps: ▷ Switching on and activating. ▷ Parking space search. Park assistance button ▷ Parking. Ultrasound sensors measure parking spaces Ultrasound sensors on both sides of the vehicle. The parking assistant calculates the best pos‐ sible parking line and takes control of steering during the parking procedure. System status and instructions on required ac‐ tions are displayed on the Control Display. The parking assistant uses the sensors of PDC Park Distance Control.
Safety information The four ultrasound sensors for measuring WARNING parking spaces are located in the front and rear The system does not release from the on the side of the vehicle. personal responsibility to correctly assess the traffic situation. Based on the limits of the sys‐ tem, it cannot independently react to all traffic situations. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust the driving style to the traffic conditions. Watch
167 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 168
Controls Driving comfort
Functional requirements Switching on and activating
Ultrasound sensors Switching on with the button Ensure full functionality: Press park assistance button. ▷ Do not cover sensors, for instance with The LED lights up. stickers. ▷ Keep the sensors clean and unobstructed. The current status of the parking space search is indicated on the Control Display. For measuring parking spaces Parking assistant is activated automatically. ▷ Maximum speed while driving forward ap‐ prox. 22 mph/35 km/h. Switching on with reverse gear ▷ Maximum distance to row of parked vehi‐ Shift into reverse. cles: 5 ft/1.5 m. The current status of the parking space search is indicated on the Control Display. Suitable parking space To activate: "Parking Assistant" General information: ▷ Gap behind an object that has a min. length Display on the Control Display of 1.7 ft/0.5 m. System activated/deactivated ▷ Gap between two objects with a minimum length of approx. 1.7 ft/0.5 m. Symbol Meaning Parallel parking to the road: Gray: the system is not available. ▷ Min. length of gap between two objects: your vehicle's length plus approx. White: the system is available but 2.6 ft/0.8 m. not activated. ▷ Minimum depth: approx. 5 ft/1.5 m. The system is activated. Diagonal parking: ▷ Minimum width of the gap: own vehicle's Parking space search and system width plus approx. 2.6 ft/0.8 m. status ▷ Minimum depth: your vehicle's length. The depth of diagonal parking spaces must be estimated by the driver. Due to techni‐ cal limitations, the system is only able to approximate the depth of diagonal parking spaces.
For parking ▷ Doors and tailgate are closed. ▷ The parking brake is released. ▷ Symbol P on the vehicle image: the parking assistant is activated and the parking ▷ When parking in parking spaces on the space search is active. driver's side, the corresponding turn signal must be set where applicable. ▷ Control Display shows suitable parking spaces at the edge of the road next to the
168 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 169
Driving comfort Controls
vehicle symbol. When the parking assistant The end of the parking procedure is indi‐ is active, suitable parking spaces are high‐ cated on the Control Display. lighted. 4. Adjust the parking position yourself, if ▷ If a diagonal or parallel parking space is needed. clearly detected, the system automatically adjusts the suitable parking method. In the Interrupting manually case of parking spaces suitable for parallel The parking assistant can be interrupted at any and diagonal parking, a selection menu is time: displayed. In this case, the desired parking ▷ Press park assistance button. method must be selected manually. ▷ The parking procedure is ac‐ ▷ "Parking Assistant" Select the symbol tive. Steering control has on the Control Display. been taken over by system. Interrupting automatically The system is interrupted automatically in the ▷ Parking space search is always active following situations: whenever the vehicle is moving forward slow and straight, even if the system is de‐ ▷ If the driver grasps the steering wheel or activated. When the system is deactivated, takes over steering. the displays on the Control Display are ▷ If a gear is selected that does not match shown in gray. the instruction on the Control Display. ▷ If the vehicle speed exceeds approx. Parking using the parking assistant 6 mph/10 km/h. Parking ▷ Possibly on snow-covered or slippery road surfaces. 1. Press park assistance button or shift ▷ When there are obstacles that are hard to into reverse gear to switch the parking as‐ overcome, such as curbs. sistant on, refer to page 168. Activate the ▷ When there are obstacles that suddenly parking assistant, if needed. appear. Parking assistant is activated. ▷ If the PDC Park Distance Control displays 2. Pass the row of parked vehicles at a speed clearances that are too small. of up to approx. 22 mph/35 km/h and at a ▷ If a maximum number of parking attempts distance of maximum 5 ft/1.5 m. or the time taken for parking is exceeded. The status of the parking space search and ▷ If DSC is being deactivated. possible parking spaces are displayed on ▷ When switching to another function on the the Control Display, refer to page 168. Control Display. 3. Follow the instructions on the Control Dis‐ A Check Control message is displayed. play. The best possible parking position will Resuming come after gear change on the stationary An interrupted parking procedure can be con‐ vehicle - wait for the automatic steering tinued, if needed. wheel move.
169 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 170
Controls Driving comfort
Reactivate the parking assistant, refer to ▷ For small children and animals. page 168, and follow the instructions on the ▷ For persons with certain clothing, e.g., Control Display. coats. ▷ With external interference of the ultra‐ Switching off sound, e.g., from passing vehicles or loud The system can be switched off as follows: machines. ▷ Press park assistance button. ▷ When sensors are dirty, iced over, dam‐ aged or out of position. ▷ Switching off the ignition. ▷ Under certain weather conditions such as high relative humidity, rain, snowfall, ex‐ System limits treme heat or strong wind. Safety information ▷ With tow bars and trailer couplings of other vehicles. WARNING ▷ With thin or wedge-shaped objects. The system can react incorrectly or not ▷ With moving objects. at all due to the system limits. There is a risk of accidents or risk of property damage. Observe ▷ With elevated, protruding objects such as the information regarding the system limits ledges or cargo. and actively intervene, if needed.◀ ▷ With objects with corners and sharp edges. ▷ With objects with a fine surface structure No parking assistance such as fences. The parking assistant does not offer assis‐ ▷ For objects with porous surfaces. tance in the following situations: ▷ If cargo protrudes. ▷ In tight curves. ▷ Low objects already displayed, e.g., curbs, ▷ When DSC is deactivated. can move into the blind area of the sensors ▷ For diagonal parking spaces. before or after a continuous tone sounds. Parking spaces that are not suitable may be Functional limitations detected or suitable parking spaces may not The system may not be fully functional in the be detected at all. following situations: Malfunction ▷ On bumpy road surfaces such as gravel roads. A Check Control message is displayed. ▷ On slippery ground. The parking assistant failed. Have the system checked by a dealer’s service center or an‐ ▷ On steep uphill or downhill grades. other qualified service center or repair shop. ▷ With accumulations of leaves/snow in the parking space. ▷ With ditches or edges, for instance an edge of a port.
Limits of ultrasonic measurement Ultrasonic measurements might not function in the following situations:
170 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 171
Climate control Controls
Climate control
Vehicle features and options Interior air quality This chapter describes all standard, country- The air quality inside the vehicle is improved specific and optional features offered with the by an emissions-tested interior, a microfilter, series. It also describes features that are not and a climate-control system for regulating necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due temperature, air flow, and recirculated-air to the selected options or country versions. mode. This also applies to safety-related functions In addition there are other functions which de‐ and systems. When using these functions and pend on the vehicle's equipment, for instance systems, the applicable laws and regulations microfilter/activated-charcoal filter, automatic must be observed. climate control with automatic recirculated-air control AUC, and parked-car ventilation.
Automatic climate control
1 Seat heating, left 67 6 Temperature 2 Air distribution settings 7 Seat heating, right 67 3 Rear window defroster 8 Air conditioning 4 Air flow 9 Recirculated-air mode 5 AUTO program 10 Interior temperature sensor
171 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 172
Controls Climate control
Climate control functions in detail Switching on/off Press button. Switching the system on/off Air conditioning is switched on or off. Switching on Depending on the weather, the windshield and Press any button except for the following: side windows may fog up briefly when the en‐ ▷ Rear window defroster. gine is started. ▷ Seat heating. The air conditioning is switched on automati‐ cally with the AUTO program. Switching off When using the automatic climate control, Press the left button for the minimum condensation water, refer to page 198, devel‐ speed. ops and drains underneath the vehicle. This is normal.
Temperature AUTO program
Concept Concept The automatic climate control achieves the set Air flow, air distribution and temperature are temperature as quickly as possible, if neces‐ controlled automatically. sary by using the maximum cooling or heating power, and then keeps it constant. Switching on/off
Settings Press button. Depending on the selected tempera‐ Turn the ring to set the desired ture and outside influences, the air is directed temperature. to the windshield, side windows, upper body, and into the floor area.
The air conditioning, refer to page 172, is Do not rapidly switch between different tem‐ switched on automatically with the AUTO pro‐ perature settings. Otherwise, the automatic cli‐ gram. mate control will not have sufficient time to ad‐ just the set temperature. Convertible program When the hardtop is open, the convertible pro‐ Air conditioning gram is activated as well. In the convertible program, the automatic climate control is opti‐ Concept mized for driving with the hardtop open. In ad‐ The air in the car's interior will be cooled and dition, the air flow is increased as the vehicle dehumidified and, depending on the tempera‐ speed increases. ture setting, warmed again. The efficiency of the convertible program can The car's interior can only be cooled with the be greatly enhanced by installing the wind de‐ engine running. flector.
172 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 173
Climate control Controls
Recirculated-air mode Controlling the air distribution manually Concept You may react to unpleasant odors or pollu‐ Concept tants in the immediate environment by tempo‐ The air distribution for climate control can be rarily suspending the supply of outside air. The adjusted manually. system then recirculates the air flow within the vehicle. Operation Turn the wheel to select the de‐ Operation sired program or the desired in‐ Press button repeatedly to select an termediate setting. operating mode:
▷ LED off: outside air flows in continuously. ▷ Windows. ▷ LED on, recirculated-air mode: the supply ▷ Upper body region. of outside air into the vehicle is perma‐ nently blocked. ▷ Windows, upper body region, and floor area. To prevent window fogging, recirculated-air mode switches off automatically after a certain ▷ Floor area. amount of time, depending on the environ‐ mental conditions. Defrosting windows and removing condensation With constant recirculated-air mode, the air quality in the car's interior deteriorates and the Make the following settings to defrost the win‐ fogging of the windows increases. dows and remove condensation: If the windows fog over, switch off recircu‐ ▷ Direct the air distribution onto the win‐ lated-air mode and increase the air flow, if dows. needed. ▷ Increasing the air flow. ▷ Increase the temperature. Controlling the air flow manually ▷ Switch on the air conditioning if needed. Concept Rear window defroster The air flow for climate control can be adjusted manually. Press button. The LED lights up. The rear window defroster switches Operation off automatically after a certain period of time. Press the left or right side of the but‐ ton: decrease or increase air flow. Microfilter In external and recirculated-air mode the mi‐ The air flow from the air conditioner may be re‐ crofilter filters dust and pollen from the air. duced automatically to save battery power. Have this filter changed during vehicle mainte‐ nance, refer to page 239.
173 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 174
Controls Climate control
Automatic climate control with enhanced features
1 Seat heating, left 67 10 Air distribution, right 2 Temperature, left 11 Air flow, AUTO intensity 3 AUTO program 12 Air distribution, left 4 Display 13 Rear window defroster 5 Maximum cooling 14 Interior temperature sensor — always keep 6 Temperature, right clear 7 Seat heating, right 67 15 Defrosting windows and removing conden‐ sation 8 Air conditioning 9 Automatic recirculated-air control/recircu‐ lated-air mode
Climate control functions in detail Switching off Press the left button for the minimum Switching the system on/off speed.
Switching on Press any button except for the following: Temperature
▷ Rear window defroster. Concept ▷ Seat heating. The automatic climate control achieves the set temperature as quickly as possible, if neces‐
174 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 175
Climate control Controls
sary by using the maximum cooling or heating Maximum cooling power, and then keeps it constant. Concept Settings The system is set to the lowest temperature, Turn the ring to set the desired optimum air flow and recirculated-air mode. temperature. General information The function is available above an external temperature of approx. 32 ℉/0 ℃ And with the The automatic climate control reaches this engine running. temperature as quickly as possible, if needed, by increasing the cooling or heating output, Switching on/off and then keeps it constant. Press button. Do not rapidly switch between different tem‐ perature settings. Otherwise, the automatic cli‐ Air flows out of the vents to the upper body re‐ mate control will not have sufficient time to ad‐ gion. The vents need to be open for this. just the set temperature. The air flow can be adjusted with the air flow active. Air conditioning AUTO program Concept The air in the car's interior will be cooled and Concept dehumidified and, depending on the tempera‐ Air flow, air distribution and temperature are ture setting, warmed again. controlled automatically. The car's interior can only be cooled with the engine running. Switching on/off
Switching on/off Press button. Depending on the selected tempera‐ Press button. ture, the intensity of the AUTO program, and Air conditioning is switched on or off. outside influences, the air is directed to the windshield, side windows, upper body, and Depending on the weather, the windshield and into the floor area. side windows may fog up briefly when the en‐ gine is started. The air conditioning, refer to page 175, is The air conditioning is switched on automati‐ switched on automatically with the AUTO pro‐ cally with the AUTO program. gram. When using the automatic climate control, At the same time, a condensation sensor con‐ condensation water, refer to page 198, devel‐ trols the program so as to prevent window ops and drains underneath the vehicle. This is condensation as much as possible. normal. In the AUTO program, the air flow may be re‐ duced during a phone call on the hands-free system.
175 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 176
Controls Climate control
Intensity ▷ Left LED on, automatic recirculated-air With the AUTO program activated, the auto‐ control: a sensor detects pollutants in the matic intensity control can be changed. outside air and shuts off automatically. ▷ Right LED on, recirculated-air mode: the Press the left or right side of the but‐ supply of outside air into the vehicle is per‐ ton: decrease or increase intensity. manently blocked. The selected intensity is shown on the display Recirculated-air mode switches off automati‐ of the automatic climate control. cally at low external temperatures after a cer‐ tain amount of time in order to avoid window Convertible program fogging. When the hardtop is open, the convertible pro‐ If the windows are fogged over, switch off the gram is activated as well. In the convertible recirculated-air mode and press the AUTO program, the automatic climate control is opti‐ button to utilize the condensation sensor. mized for driving with the hardtop open. In ad‐ Make sure that air can flow to the windshield. dition, the air flow is increased as the vehicle speed increases. Controlling the air flow manually The efficiency of the convertible program can be greatly enhanced by installing the wind de‐ Concept flector. The air flow for climate control can be adjusted manually. Automatic recirculated-air control/ recirculated-air mode General information To manually adjust air flow switch off AUTO Concept program first. The automatic recirculated-air control AUC recognizes odors or pollutants in the outside Operation air. The outside air supply is shut off and the Press the left or right side of the but‐ interior air is recirculated. ton: decrease or increase air flow.
General information The selected air flow is shown on the display of If the system is activated, a sensor detects pol‐ the automatic climate control. lutants in the outside air and controls the shut- The air flow of the automatic climate control off automatically. may be reduced automatically to save battery If the system is deactivated, outside air contin‐ power. uously flows into the car's interior. With constant recirculated-air mode, the air Controlling the air distribution quality in the car's interior deteriorates and the manually fogging of the windows increases. Concept Switching on/off The air distribution for climate control can be adjusted manually. Press button repeatedly to select an operating mode:
▷ LEDs off: outside air flows in continuously.
176 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 177
Climate control Controls
Operation Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter Press button repeatedly to select a In external and recirculated-air mode the mi‐ program: crofilter/activated charcoal filter filters dust, pollen, and gaseous pollutants out of the air. ▷ Upper body region. Have this filter changed during vehicle mainte‐ ▷ Upper body region and floor area. nance, refer to page 239. ▷ Floor area. ▷ Windows and floor area: driver's side only. Ventilation ▷ Windows, upper body region and floor area: driver's side only. Front ventilation If the windows are fogged over, press the AUTO button to utilize the condensation sen‐ sor.
Defrosting windows and removing condensation
Concept Ice and condensation are quickly removed from the windshield and the front side win‐ dows. ▷ Lever for changing the air flow direction, arrow 1. Switching on/off ▷ Thumbwheels for opening and closing the vents continuously, arrows 2. Press button. ▷ Thumbwheel to vary the ventilation tem‐ The LED is illuminated with the sys‐ perature in the upper body region, arrow 3. tem switched on. Toward blue: colder. For this purpose, point the side vents towards the side windows as needed. Toward red: warmer. This does not change the set interior tem‐ The air flow can be adjusted with the air flow perature for the driver and front passenger. active. If the windows are fogged over, you can also Settings switch on the air conditioning or press the AUTO button to utilize the condensation sen‐ ▷ Ventilation for cooling: sor. Direct vent in your direction when car's in‐ terior is too hot. Rear window defroster ▷ Draft-free ventilation: Press button. The LED lights up. Adjust the vent to let the air flow past you. The rear window defroster switches off automatically after a certain period of time.
177 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 178
Controls Climate control
Ventilation in the rear If parked-car ventilation is switched on, the vehicle battery will be discharged. Thus, limit the maximum activation time to save the vehicle battery. The system will be available again after the engine is started or after a short trip. ▷ Make sure that the vehicle's date and time are set correctly. ▷ Open the vents to allow air to flow out.
▷ Thumbwheel for variable opening and Switching on/off directly closing of the vents, arrow 1. Using iDrive: ▷ Thumbwheel to vary the ventilation tem‐ 1. "My Vehicle" perature, arrow 2. 2. "Vehicle settings" Toward blue: colder. 3. If necessary, "Climate functions" Toward red: warmer. 4. "Activate comfort ventilation now" This does not change the adjusted interior The symbol on the automatic climate con‐ temperature. trol flashes if the system is switched on. ▷ Lever for changing the air flow direction, arrow 3. Preselecting the activation time Using iDrive: Parked-car ventilation 1. "My Vehicle" 2. "Vehicle settings" Concept 3. If necessary, "Climate functions" The parked-car ventilation ventilates the car's 4. "Comfort ventilation" interior and lowers its temperature, if needed. 5. Select the desired activation time. 6. Set the desired time. General information The parked-car ventilation can be switched on Activating the activation time and off directly or by using two preset activa‐ Using iDrive: tion times. The system remains switched on for 30 minutes. 1. "My Vehicle" The parked-car ventilation system is operated 2. "Vehicle settings" via iDrive. 3. If necessary, "Climate functions" Functional requirements 4. "For start time at:" ▷ Direct operation: vehicle is in radio-ready Activate the desired activation time. state. The symbol on the automatic climate con‐ ▷ Direct operation or preset activation time: trol lights up when the activation time is acti‐ does not depend on external temperature. vated. ▷ Battery is sufficiently charged.
178 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 179
Climate control Controls
The symbol on the automatic climate con‐ trol flashes when the system has been switched on. The system will only be switched on within the next 24 hours. After that, it needs to be reacti‐ vated.
179 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 180
Controls Interior equipment
Interior equipment
Vehicle features and options the safety instructions of the hand-held trans‐ mitter.◀ This chapter describes all standard, country- specific and optional features offered with the Compatibility series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due If this symbol is printed on the packag‐ to the selected options or country versions. ing or in the owner's manual of the sys‐ This also applies to safety-related functions tem to be controlled, the system is and systems. When using these functions and generally compatible with the integrated Uni‐ systems, the applicable laws and regulations versal Remote Control. must be observed. If you have any questions, please contact: ▷ A dealer’s service center or another quali‐ Universal Integrated Remote fied service center or repair shop. Control ▷ www.homelink.com on the Internet. HomeLink is a registered trademark of Gentex Concept Corporation. The integrated Universal Remote Control in the interior mirror can operate up to 3 func‐ Control elements on the interior mirror tions of remote-controlled systems, such as garage door drives or lighting systems. The integrated Universal Remote Control replaces up to 3 different hand-held transmitters. To operate the remote control, the buttons on the interior mirror must be programmed with the desired functions. The hand-held transmitter for the particular system is required in order to program the remote control. Before selling the vehicle, delete the stored ▷ LED, arrow 1. functions for the sake of security. ▷ Buttons, arrow 2. Safety information ▷ The hand-held transmitter, arrow 3, is re‐ quired for programming. WARNING Body parts can be jammed when operat‐ ing remote-controlled systems, e.g., the ga‐ Programming rage door, using the integrated universal re‐ mote control. There is a risk of injury or risk of General information property damage. Make sure that the area of 1. Switch on the ignition. movement of the respective system is clear 2. Initial setup: during programming and operation. Also follow Press and hold the two outer buttons on the interior mirror simultaneously for ap‐
180 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 181
Interior equipment Controls
proximately 20 seconds until the LED on flashing rapidly and then stays lit constantly for the interior mirror flashes. This erases all 2 seconds, the system features a rolling code programming of the buttons on the interior radio system. Flashing and continuous illumi‐ mirror. nation of the LED will repeat for approximately 3. Hold the hand-held transmitter for the sys‐ 20 seconds. tem to be controlled approx. 1 to 3 in‐ For systems with a rolling code radio system, ches/2.5 to 8 cm away from the buttons of the integrated Universal Remote Control and the interior mirror. The required distance the system also have to be synchronized. depends on the hand-held transmitter. Please read the owner's manual to find out 4. Simultaneously press and hold the button how to synchronize the system. of the desired function on the hand-held Synchronizing is easier with the aid of a sec‐ transmitter and the button to be program‐ ond person. med on the interior mirror. The LED on the Synchronizing the universal remote control interior mirror will begin flashing slowly. with the system: 5. Release both buttons as soon as the LED flashes more rapidly. The LED flashing 1. Park the vehicle within range of the re‐ faster indicates that the button on the inte‐ mote-controlled system. rior mirror has been programmed. 2. Program the desired button on the interior If the LED does not flash faster after at mirror as described. least 60 seconds, change the distance be‐ 3. Locate and press the synchronizing button tween the interior mirror and the hand-held on the system being programmed. You transmitter and repeat the step. Several have approx. 30 seconds for the next step. more attempts at different distances may 4. Hold down the programmed button on the be necessary. Wait at least 15 seconds be‐ interior mirror for approximately 3 seconds tween attempts. and then release it. If necessary, repeat this Canada: if programming with the hand- step up to three times in order to finish held transmitter was interrupted, hold synchronization. Once synchronization is down the interior mirror button and repeat‐ complete, the programmed function will be edly press and release the hand-held carried out. transmitter button for 2 seconds. 6. To program other functions on other but‐ Reprogramming individual buttons tons, repeat steps 3 to 5. 1. Switch on the ignition. The systems can be controlled using the inte‐ 2. Press and hold the interior mirror button to rior mirror buttons. be programmed. 3. As soon as the interior mirror LED starts Special feature of the rolling code flashing slowly, hold the hand-held trans‐ wireless system mitter for the system to be controlled ap‐ If you are unable to operate the system after prox. 1 to 3 inches/2.5 to 8 cm away from repeated programming, please check if the the buttons of the interior mirror. The re‐ system to be controlled features a rolling code quired distance depends on the hand-held radio system. transmitter. Read the system's owner's manual, or press the programmed button on the interior mirror longer. If the LED on the interior mirror starts
181 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 182
Controls Interior equipment
4. Likewise, press and hold the button of the hold the two outer buttons on the interior mir‐ desired function on the hand-held trans‐ ror simultaneously for approximately 20 sec‐ mitter. onds until the LED on the interior mirror 5. Release both buttons as soon as the inte‐ flashes rapidly. rior mirror LED flashes more rapidly. The LED flashing faster indicates that the but‐ ton on the interior mirror has been pro‐ Digital compass grammed. The system can then be con‐ trolled by the button on the interior mirror. Overview If the LED does not flash faster after at most 60 seconds, change the distance and repeat the programming starting with step 4. Several more attempts at different distances may be necessary. Wait at least 15 seconds between attempts. Canada: if programming with the hand- held transmitter was interrupted, hold down the interior mirror button and repeat‐ edly press and release the hand-held 1 Control button transmitter button for 2 seconds. 2 Mirror display Operation Mirror display WARNING The point of the compass is displayed in the Body parts can be jammed when operat‐ mirror when driving straight. ing remote-controlled systems, e.g., the ga‐ rage door, using the integrated universal re‐ Operating concept mote control. There is a risk of injury or risk of property damage. Make sure that the area of Various functions can be called up by pressing movement of the respective system is clear the control button with a pointed object, such during programming and operation. Also follow as the tip of a ballpoint pen or similar object. the safety instructions of the hand-held trans‐ The following setting options are displayed in mitter.◀ succession, depending on how long the con‐ trol button is pressed: The system, such as the garage door, can be ▷ Pressed briefly: turns display on/off. operated using the button on the interior mirror while the engine is running or when the ignition ▷ 3 to 6 seconds: compass zone setting. is started. To do this, hold down the button ▷ 6 to 9 seconds: compass calibration. within receiving range of the system until the ▷ 9 to 12 seconds: left/right-hand steering function is activated. The interior mirror LED setting. stays lit while the wireless signal is being ▷ 12 to 15 seconds: language setting. transmitted. Setting the compass zones Deleting stored functions Sets the particular compass zones on the vehi‐ All stored functions will be deleted. The func‐ cle so that the compass operates correctly; re‐ tions cannot be deleted individually. Press and fer to World map with compass zones.
182 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 183
Interior equipment Controls
World map with magnetic zones
Procedure Procedure 1. Press and hold the control button for ap‐ 1. Make sure that there are no large metallic prox. 3 to 4 seconds. The number of the objects or overhead power lines near the set compass zone appears in the mirror. vehicle and that there is sufficient room to 2. To change the zone setting, press the con‐ drive around in a circle. trol button quickly and repeatedly until the 2. Set the currently applicable compass zone. number of the compass zone that corre‐ 3. Make sure that the hardtop is completely sponds with your location appears in the closed. mirror. 4. Press and hold the control button for ap‐ The set zone is stored automatically. The com‐ prox. 6 to 7 seconds so that "C" appears pass is ready for use again after approximately on the display. Next, drive in a complete 10 seconds. circle at least once at a speed of no more than 4 mph/7 km/h. If calibration is suc‐ Calibrating the digital compass cessful, the "C" is replaced by the points of The digital compass must be calibrated in the the compass. event of the following: 5. Open hardtop completely. ▷ The wrong compass point is displayed. 6. Press and hold the control button for ap‐ ▷ The point of the compass displayed does prox. 6 to 7 seconds so that "C" appears not change despite changing the direction on the display. Next, drive in a complete of travel. circle at least once at a speed of no more ▷ Not all points of the compass are dis‐ than 4 mph/7 km/h. If calibration is suc‐ played. cessful, the "C" is replaced by the points of the compass.
183 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 184
Controls Interior equipment
Left/right-hand steering Installing The digital compass is already set for right or left-hand steering at the factory.
Setting the language Press and hold the control button for approx. 12 to 13 seconds. Briefly press the control button again to switch between English "E" and German "O". Settings are stored automatically after approxi‐ mately 10 seconds. The ashtray can be inserted in both cup hold‐ ers.
Sun visor Emptying Glare shield Take out the insert. Fold the sun visor down or up. Cigarette lighter Vanity mirror WARNING A vanity mirror is located in the sun visor be‐ Contact with hot heating elements or the hind a cover. When the cover is opened, the hot socket of the cigarette lighter can cause mirror lighting switches on. burns. Flammable materials can ignite if the cigarette lighter falls down or is held against the respective objects. There is a risk of fire Ashtray/cigarette lighter and injuries. Hold the cigarette lighter by its handle. Make sure that children do not use the Ashtray cigarette lighter and burn themselves.◀ NOTE Opening If metal objects fall into the socket, they can cause a short circuit. There is a risk of property damage. Replace the cigarette lighter or socket cover again after using the socket.◀
Slide the cover forward.
Slide the cover forward.
184 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 185
Interior equipment Controls
a risk of property damage. Only connect bat‐ tery chargers for the vehicle battery to the starting aid terminals in the engine compart‐ ment.◀
NOTE If metal objects fall into the socket, they can cause a short circuit. There is a risk of property damage. Replace the cigarette lighter The cigarette lighter is located between the or socket cover again after using the socket.◀ cup holders. Front center console Push in the cigarette lighter. The cigarette lighter can be re‐ moved as soon as it pops back out.
Sockets
General information Slide the cover forward. The lighter socket can be used as a socket for electrical equipment while the engine is run‐ ning or when the ignition is switched on. The total load of all sockets must not exceed 140 watts at 12 volts. Do not damage the socket by using non-com‐ patible connectors.
Safety information WARNING Remove the socket or cigarette lighter cover. Devices and cables in the unfolding area of the airbags, for instance portable navigation devices, can hinder the unfolding of the airbag or be thrown around in the car's interior when unfolding. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that devices and cables are not in the airbag's area of unfolding.◀
NOTE Battery chargers for the vehicle battery can work with high voltages and currents, which means that the 12 volt on-board net‐ work can be overloaded or damaged. There is
185 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 186
Controls Interior equipment
Rear center console In the center armrest
Remove the cover. A USB interface is located in the center arm‐ rest. In the cargo area In the center console
The socket is located on the right side in the cargo area. A USB interface is located in the center con‐ sole.
USB interface Loading Concept Mobile devices with USB port can be con‐ The concept nected to the USB interface. For easier loading, the vehicle is equipped with a cargo area partition and a Loading aid, refer General information to page 187. With the loading aid, the folded Observe the information regarding the con‐ hardtop can be raised out of the cargo area. nection of mobile devices to the USB interface in section USB connections, refer to page 35. Safety information NOTE Objects on the cargo area partition or pieces of luggage in the side area of the cargo area can limit the area of movement of the hardtop and the loading aid. There is a risk of property damage. Make sure that the move‐
186 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 187
Interior equipment Controls
ment area of the hardtop and loading aid is Expanding cargo area volume clear during operation.◀
Opening hardtop or lowering loading aid Before opening the hardtop or lowering the loading aid, push the cargo area partition down until it latches on both sides. Otherwise, the hardtop cannot be opened or the loading aid cannot be lowered. With the hardtop closed, the cargo area vol‐ ume can be expanded. To do this, push the cargo area partition upward.
Loading aid
Safety information WARNING
When the hardtop is open, objects can be When opening and closing the loading placed below the cargo area partition. Do not aid, body parts can be jammed, for example by use the areas marked X in the illustration as the mechanism. There is risk of injuries. Make storage areas. sure that the area of movement of the loading aid is clear during operation.◀
Closing the hardtop WARNING With a lifted loading aid, vehicle parts can protrude and limit the view. There is a danger of accidents and property damage. Before driving off, make sure that the loading aid is completely lowered and the tailgate is closed.◀
Functional requirements ▷ Vehicle at a standstill. When the hardtop is closed, objects can be ▷ Vehicle is on a level surface. placed in the area below and next to the cargo ▷ Hardtop fully open. area partition. ▷ Tailgate fully open. ▷ Cargo area partition latched in the lower position. ▷ External temperature not below +14 ℉/– 10 ℃.
187 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 188
Controls Interior equipment
Operation Cargo area Open tailgate all the way. Enlarging the cargo area
Concept The cargo area can be enlarged by folding down the rear seat backrest or removing the middle section.
General information The rear seat backrest can be folded down from the rear. Press left button: loading aid is raised. Safety information Press right button: loading aid is lowered. WARNING The movement is executed at Danger of jamming with folding down the different speeds depending on the external backrests. There is a risk of injury or risk of temperature. property damage. Make sure that the area of movement of the rear backrest and the of the The movement stops with the release of the head restraint is clear prior to folding down.◀ button. WARNING LED in button: With an unlocked backrest, an unsecured ▷ Lights up continuously: loading aid in the load can be thrown into the vehicle's interior, respective limit position. e.g., in case of an accident, braking or evasive ▷ Flashes rapidly: loading aid not in the re‐ maneuver. There is a risk of injury. Make sure spective end position. that the backrest engages into the locking af‐ ▷ Flashes slowly: functional requirements ter folding it back.◀ not met. WARNING A Check Control message is displayed. The stability of the child restraint system After switching off the ignition, the raised load‐ is limited or compromised with incorrect seat ing aid can be lowered within approx. 10 mi‐ adjustment or improper installation of the child nutes. After that, the ignition must be switched seat. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. on for lowering. Make sure that the child restraint system fits Use the loading aid only for loading and un‐ securely against the backrest. If possible, ad‐ loading the cargo area. just the backrest tilt for all affected backrests Always move the loading aid into the limit posi‐ and correctly adjust the seats. Make sure that tions. seats and backrests are securely engaged. If possible, adjust the height of the head re‐ Do not park the vehicle with the loading aid straints or remove them.◀ raised. The tailgate can only be closed when the load‐ ing aid is fully lowered.
188 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 189
Interior equipment Controls
NOTE Opening Vehicle parts can be damaged when folding down the rear backrest. There is a risk of property damage. Make sure that the area of movement of the rear backrest including head restraint is clear when folding down.◀
Folding down the rear seat backrest from the rear
Pull on the handle and fold open the anti-theft protection.
Closing Fold open the anti-theft protection until it en‐ gages.
Press the button, arrow 1, and fold the rear seat backrest forward, arrow 2.
Fold back the backrest Return the rear seat backrest to the seating position and engage it.
Removing the center section
Push the strap, arrow 1, down and remove the center section, arrow 2.
Anti-theft protection
Concept The anti-theft protection prevents access to the cargo area from the car's interior.
189 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 190
Controls Storage compartments
Storage compartments
Vehicle features and options ▷ Storage compartment in the front center armrest, refer to page 191. This chapter describes all standard, country- ▷ Compartments in the doors, refer to specific and optional features offered with the page 191. series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due ▷ Nets on the backrests of the front seats. to the selected options or country versions. ▷ Storage compartment in the rear center This also applies to safety-related functions console, refer to page 192. and systems. When using these functions and ▷ Storage compartment between the rear systems, the applicable laws and regulations seats, refer to page 192. must be observed.
Glove compartment Safety information WARNING Front passenger side Loose objects or devices with a cable Safety information connection to the vehicle, e.g., mobile phones, can be thrown into the vehicle's interior while WARNING driving, e.g., in the event of an accident or dur‐ Folded open, the glove compartment ing braking and evasive maneuvers. There is a protrudes in the vehicle's interior. Objects in risk of injury. Secure loose objects or devices the glove compartment can be thrown into the with a cable connection to the vehicle in the vehicle's interior while driving, e.g., in the event vehicle's interior.◀ of an accident or during braking and evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of injury. Always NOTE close the glove compartment immediately after Anti-slip pads such as anti-slip mats can using it.◀ damage the dashboard. There is a risk of prop‐ erty damage. Do not use anti-slip pads.◀ Opening
Storage compartments The following storage compartments are avail‐ able in the car's interior: ▷ Glove compartment on the front passenger side, refer to page 190. ▷ Glove compartment on the driver's side, refer to page 191. Pull the handle. ▷ Front storage compartment, in front of the cup holders, refer to page 191. The light in the glove compartment switches on.
190 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 191
Storage compartments Controls
Closing Front storage compartment Fold cover closed.
Locking The glove compartment can be locked with an integrated key. This prevents access to the glove compartment. After the glove compartment is locked, the re‐ mote control can be handed over, such as at a hotel, without the integrated key. There is a storage compartment in the center Driver's side console.
Safety information WARNING Compartments in the doors Folded open, the glove compartment protrudes in the vehicle's interior. Objects in WARNING the glove compartment can be thrown into the Breakable objects, e.g., glass bottles, can vehicle's interior while driving, e.g., in the event break in the event of an accident. Broken glass of an accident or during braking and evasive can be scattered in the vehicle's interior. There maneuvers. There is a risk of injury. Always is a risk of injury. Do not stow any breakable close the glove compartment immediately after objects in the vehicle's interior.◀ using it.◀
Opening Center armrest
Front
General information A storage compartment is located in the center armrest between the front seats.
Opening
Pull the handle.
Closing Fold cover closed.
Fold the center armrest up.
191 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 192
Controls Storage compartments
Repositioning Front The center armrest can be pushed forward or backward and engages in the end positions.
Connection for an external audio device An external audio device, for in‐ stance an MP3 player, can be connected via the USB audio in‐ terface in the center armrest. Two cup holders are located in the center con‐ sole. To open: slide the cover forward. Storage compartment in the To close: slide the cover backward. rear A storage compartment is located in the center Rear console.
Storage compartment between the rear seats There is a storage compartment between the rear seats.
Cup holders To open: press the button. To close: push both covers back in, one after Safety information the other. WARNING Unsuitable containers in the cup holder and hot beverages can damage the cup holder Storage compartments in the and increase the risk of injury in the event of an cargo area accident. There is a risk of injury or risk of property damage. Use light-weight, unbreaka‐ Storage compartment ble, and sealable containers. Do not transport hot beverages. Do not force objects into the A storage compartment is located on the left cup holder.◀ side. Lashing eyes in the cargo area To secure the cargo, refer to page 200, there are four lashing eyes in the cargo area.
192 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 193
Storage compartments Controls
Floor net To secure the cargo, refer to page 200, the floor net can also be used.
193 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Driving tips
This chapter provides you with information useful in dealing with specific driving and operating modes.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 196
Driving tips Things to remember when driving
Things to remember when driving
Vehicle features and options Avoid full load or kickdown under all circum‐ stances. This chapter describes all standard, country- specific and optional features offered with the From 1,200 miles/2,000 km series. It also describes features that are not The engine and vehicle speed can gradually be necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due increased. to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions Tires and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations Tire traction is not optimal due to manufactur‐ must be observed. ing circumstances when tires are brand-new; they achieve their full traction potential after a break-in time. Breaking-in period Drive conservatively for the first 200 miles/300 km. General information Moving parts need to begin working together Brake system smoothly. Brake discs and brake pads only reach their full The following instructions will help you to ach‐ effectiveness after approx. 300 miles/500 km. ieve a long vehicle life and good efficiency. Drive moderately during this break-in period. During break-in, do not use the Launch Con‐ Following part replacement trol. The same break-in procedures should be ob‐ Safety information served if any of the components above-men‐ tioned have to be renewed in the course of the WARNING vehicle's operating life. Due to new parts and components, safety and driver assistance systems can react with a delay. There is a risk of an accident. Af‐ General driving notes ter installing new parts or with a new vehicle, drive conservatively and intervene early if nec‐ Closing the tailgate essary. Observe the break-in procedures of the respective parts and components.◀ Safety information WARNING Engine, transmission, and axle drive An open tailgate protrudes from the vehi‐ cle and can endanger occupants and other Up to 1,200 miles/2,000 km traffic participants or damage the vehicle in the Do not exceed the maximum engine and road event of an accident, braking or evasive ma‐ speed: neuvers. In addition, exhaust fumes may enter ▷ For gasoline engine 4,500 rpm and the car's interior. There is a risk of injury or risk 100 mph/160 km/h. of damage to property. Do not drive with the tailgate open.◀
196 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 197
Things to remember when driving Driving tips
Driving with the tailgate open surface, ultimately undermining your ability to If driving with the tailgate open cannot be steer and brake the vehicle. avoided: Driving through water ▷ If the hardtop is closed, close all windows. ▷ Greatly increase the air flow from the vents. General information ▷ Drive moderately. When driving through water, observe the fol‐ lowing: Hot exhaust system ▷ Drive through calm water only. WARNING ▷ Drive through water only if it is not deeper During driving operation, high tempera‐ than maximum 9.8 in/25 cm. tures can occur underneath the vehicle body, ▷ Drive through water no faster than walking e.g., caused by the exhaust gas system. If speed, up to 3 mph/5 km/h. combustible materials, such as leaves or grass, come in contact with hot parts of the exhaust Safety information gas system, these materials can ignite. There is a risk of injury or risk of property damage. Do NOTE not remove the heat shields installed and never When driving too quickly through too apply undercoating to them. Make sure that no deep water, water can enter into the engine combustible materials can come in contact compartment, the electrical system or the with hot vehicle parts in driving operation, idle transmission. There is a risk of property dam‐ or during parking. Do not touch the hot ex‐ age. When driving through water, do not ex‐ haust system.◀ ceed the maximum indicated water level and the maximum speed for driving through wa‐ Mobile communication devices in the ter.◀ vehicle Braking safely WARNING The vehicle is equipped with ABS as a stand‐ Vehicle electronics and mobile phones ard feature. can influence one another. There is radiation due to the transmission operations of mobile Perform an emergency stop in situations that phones. There is a risk of injury or risk of prop‐ require such. erty damage. If possible, in the vehicle's inte‐ Steering is still responsive. You can still avoid rior use only mobile phones with direct con‐ any obstacles with a minimum of steering ef‐ nections to an exterior antenna in order to fort. exclude mutual interference and deflect the ra‐ Pulsation of the brake pedal and sounds from diation from the vehicle's interior.◀ the hydraulic circuits indicate that ABS is in its active mode. Hydroplaning In certain braking situations, the perforated On wet or slushy roads, a wedge of water can brake discs can emit functional noises. Func‐ form between the tires and road surface. tional noises have no effect on the perform‐ This phenomenon is referred to as hydroplan‐ ance and operational reliability of the brake. ing. It is characterized by a partial or complete loss of contact between the tires and the road
197 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 198
Driving tips Things to remember when driving
Objects in the movement area around of an accident. Avoid placing excessive stress pedals and floor area on the brake system.◀
WARNING WARNING Objects in the driver's floor area can limit In idle state or with the engine switched the pedal distance or block a depressed pedal. off, safety-relevant functions, for instance en‐ There is a risk of an accident. Stow objects in gine braking effect, braking force boost and the vehicle such that they are secured and steering assistance, are restricted or not avail‐ cannot enter into the driver's floor area. Use able at all. There is a risk of an accident. Do not floor mats that are suitable for the vehicle and drive in idle state or with the engine switched can be safely attached to the floor. Do not use off.◀ loose floor mats and do not layer several floor mats. Make sure that there is sufficient clear‐ Brake disc corrosion ance for the pedals. Ensure that the floor mats are securely fastened again after they were re‐ Corrosion on the brake discs and contamina‐ moved, for instance for cleaning.◀ tion on the brake pads are increased by the fol‐ lowing circumstances: Driving in wet conditions ▷ Low mileage. When roads are wet, salted, or in heavy rain, ▷ Extended periods when the vehicle is not gently press the brake pedal every few miles. used at all. Ensure that this action does not endanger ▷ Infrequent use of the brakes. other traffic. ▷ Aggressive, acidic, or alkaline cleaning The heat generated during braking dries brake agents. discs and brake pads and protects them Corrosion buildup on the brake discs will cause against corrosion. a pulsating effect on the brakes in their re‐ In this way braking efficiency will be available sponse - generally this cannot be corrected. when you need it. Condensation water under the parked Hills vehicle When using the automatic climate control, General information condensation water develops and collects un‐ Drive long or steep downhill gradients in the derneath the vehicle. gear that requires least braking effort. Other‐ wise, the brakes may overheat and reduce brake efficiency. Driving on racetracks You can increase the engine's braking effect Higher mechanical and thermal loads during by shifting down, going all the way to first gear, racetrack operation lead to increased wear. if needed. This wear is not covered by the warranty. The vehicle is not designed for use in motor sports Safety information competition. WARNING Light but consistent brake pressure can lead to high temperatures, brakes wearing out and possibly even brake failure. There is a risk
198 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 199
Loading Driving tips
Loading
Vehicle features and options NOTE Fluids in the cargo area can cause dam‐ This chapter describes all standard, country- age. There is a risk of property damage. Make specific and optional features offered with the sure that no fluids leak in the cargo area.◀ series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due NOTE to the selected options or country versions. Objects on the cargo area partition or This also applies to safety-related functions pieces of luggage in the side area of the cargo and systems. When using these functions and area can limit the area of movement of the systems, the applicable laws and regulations hardtop and the loading aid. There is a risk of must be observed. property damage. Make sure that the move‐ ment area of the hardtop and loading aid is Safety information clear during operation.◀ WARNING High gross weight can overheat the tires, Steps for Determining damage them internally and cause a sudden Correct Load Limit drop in tire inflation pressure. Driving charac‐ teristics may be negatively impacted, reducing 1. Locate the statement “The combined lane stability, lengthening the braking distan‐ weight of occupants and cargo should ces and changing the steering response. never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your There is a risk of an accident. Pay attention to vehicle’s placard. the permitted load capacity of the tires and 2. Determine the combined weight of the never exceed the permitted gross weight.◀ driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle. WARNING 3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver Loose objects or devices with a cable and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs. connection to the vehicle, e.g., mobile phones, can be thrown into the vehicle's interior while 4. The resulting figure equals the available driving, e.g., in the event of an accident or dur‐ amount of cargo and luggage load ca‐ ing braking and evasive maneuvers. There is a pacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount risk of injury. Secure loose objects or devices equals 1,400 lbs. and there will be five with a cable connection to the vehicle in the 150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the vehicle's interior.◀ amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1,400–750 (5 x 150) = WARNING 650 lbs.) Improperly stowed objects can shift and 5. Determine the combined weight of lug‐ be thrown into the vehicle's interior, e.g., in the gage and cargo being loaded on the vehi‐ event of an accident or during braking and eva‐ cle. That weight may not safely exceed the sive maneuvers. Vehicle occupants can be hit and injured. There is a risk of injury. Stow and secure objects and cargo properly.◀
199 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 200
Driving tips Loading
available cargo and luggage load capacity ▷ Smaller and lighter cargo: secure with calculated in Step 4. ratchet straps, the floor net, or draw straps. 6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load ▷ Larger and heavy cargo: secure with cargo from your trailer will be transferred to your straps. vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle. Lashing eyes in the cargo area Load
There are four lashing eyes in the cargo area for securing cargo. The maximum load is the sum of the weight of the occupants and the cargo. Attach load securing aids, such as lashing The greater the weight of the occupants, the straps, retaining straps, draw straps or cargo less cargo that can be transported. nets, to the lashing eyes in the cargo area.
Floor net Stowing and securing cargo To secure the cargo the floor net can also be ▷ Cover sharp edges and corners on the used. cargo. ▷ Heavy cargo: stow as far forward as possi‐ ble, directly behind and at the bottom of the rear passenger seat backrests. ▷ Very heavy cargo: when the rear seat is not occupied, secure each of the outer safety belts in the opposite buckle. ▷ If necessary, fold down the rear backrests to stow cargo. ▷ Use loading aid, refer to page 187, for eas‐ Hook the floor net into the fittings in the cargo ier loading. area floor. ▷ Loading the cargo area, refer to page 186. ▷ Do not stack cargo above the top edge of the backrests.
200 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 201
Saving fuel Driving tips
Saving fuel
Vehicle features and options Tires This chapter describes all standard, country- General information specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not Tires can affect fuel consumption in various necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due ways, e.g., tire size may influence fuel con‐ to the selected options or country versions. sumption. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and Check the tire inflation pressure systems, the applicable laws and regulations regularly must be observed. Check and, if needed, correct the tire inflation pressure at least twice a month and before starting on a long trip. General information Low tire inflation pressure increases rolling re‐ sistance and thus raises fuel consumption and The vehicle contains advanced technologies tire wear. for the reduction of fuel consumption and emission values. Fuel consumption depends on a number of dif‐ Drive away immediately ferent factors. Carrying out certain measures, such as a mod‐ Do not wait for the engine to warm-up while erate driving style and regular maintenance, the vehicle remains stationary. Start driving can influence fuel consumption and the envi‐ right away, but at moderate engine speeds. ronmental impact. This is the quickest way of warming the cold engine up to operating temperature. Remove unnecessary cargo Look well ahead when Additional weight increases fuel consumption. driving Driving smoothly and proactively reduces fuel Remove attached parts consumption. following use Avoid unnecessary acceleration and braking. Attached parts on the vehicle impair the aero‐ By maintaining a suitable distance to the vehi‐ dynamics and increase the fuel consumption. cle driving ahead of you.
Closing the windows Avoid high engine speeds Open windows increase air resistance and As a rule: driving at low engine speeds lowers therefore lead to greater fuel consumption. fuel consumption and reduces wear. Use 1st gear to get the vehicle moving. Start‐ ing with the 2nd gear, accelerate rapidly. When
201 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 202
Driving tips Saving fuel
accelerating, shift up before reaching high en‐ Switch off any functions that gine speeds. are not currently needed When you reach the desired speed, shift into the highest applicable gear and drive with low Functions such as seat heating and the rear engine speed and at a constant speed. window defroster require a lot of energy and reduce the range, especially in city and stop- If necessary, observe the vehicle's gear shift and-go traffic. indicator, refer to page 103. Switch off these functions if they are not needed. Use coasting The ECO PRO driving program supports the energy conserving use of comfort features. When approaching a red light, take your foot These functions are automatically deactivated off the accelerator and let the vehicle coast to partially or completely. a halt. For going downhill take your foot off the accel‐ erator and let the vehicle roll. Have maintenance carried The flow of fuel is interrupted while coasting. out Have the vehicle maintained regularly to ach‐ Switch off the engine during ieve optimal vehicle efficiency and service life. BMW recommends that maintenance work be longer stops performed by a BMW dealer’s service center.
Switching off the engine For information on the BMW Maintenance System, refer to page 239. Switch off the engine during longer stops, for instance at traffic lights, railroad crossings or in traffic congestion. ECO PRO Auto Start/Stop function Concept The Auto Start/Stop function of the vehicle au‐ ECO PRO supports a driving style that saves tomatically switches off the engine during a on fuel consumption. For this purpose, the en‐ stop. gine control and comfort features, for instance If the engine is switched off and then restarted the climate control output, are adjusted. rather than leaving the engine running con‐ Under certain conditions the engine is auto‐ stantly, fuel consumption and emissions are matically decoupled from the transmission in reduced. Savings can begin within a few sec‐ the D selector lever position. The vehicle con‐ onds of switching off the engine. tinues traveling with the engine idling to re‐ In addition, fuel consumption is also deter‐ duce fuel consumption. The D selector lever mined by other factors, such as driving style, position remains engaged. road conditions, maintenance or environmental In addition, context-sensitive instructions are factors. displayed to assist with an optimized fuel con‐ sumption driving style. The achieved extended range is displayed in the instrument cluster as bonus range.
202 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 203
Saving fuel Driving tips
General information 3. If necessary, "Driving mode" The system includes the following 4. "Configure ECO PRO" EfficientDynamics functions and 5. Select the desired setting. EfficientDynamics displays: Settings are stored for the profile currently ▷ ECO PRO bonus range, refer to page 204. used. ▷ Activate/deactivate the display, refer to page 204. Activating/deactivating the functions ▷ ECO PRO climate control, refer to The following functions can be activated/deac‐ page 203. tivated: ▷ Coasting driving condition, refer to ▷ "ECO PRO speed warning" page 205. ▷ "ECO PRO climate control" ▷ Driving style analysis, refer to page 206. ▷ "Coasting" Settings are stored for the driver profile cur‐ Overview rently used.
ECO PRO limit ▷ Activate the ECO PRO limit: "ECO PRO speed warning": An ECO PRO tip is displayed if the speed of the set ECO PRO limit is exceeded. ▷ Adjust the ECO PRO limit speed: "Tip at:" Driving Dynamics Control Select the desired speed.
ECO PRO climate control Activating ECO PRO Climate control is set to be fuel-efficient. Press button repeatedly until ECO That is, it is possible to deviate slightly from PRO is displayed in the instrument the set temperature or to heat or cool the car's cluster. interior more slowly, to economize on fuel con‐ sumption. Configuring ECO PRO In addition, the power output to the seat and mirror heating is reduced. Via the Driving Dynamics Control 1. Activate ECO PRO. Coasting 2. "Configure ECO PRO" Fuel-efficiency can be optimized by disengag‐ ing the engine and coasting with the engine 3. Select the desired setting. idling. Using iDrive Deactivate the function to use the braking ef‐ fect of the engine when traveling downhill. 1. "My Vehicle" 2. "Vehicle settings"
203 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 204
Driving tips Saving fuel
ECO PRO potential savings the pointer remains in the blue range on the Shows potential savings with the current set‐ scale, you are driving efficiently. tings in percentages. ECO PRO tip, driving tip Display in the instrument cluster The ECO PRO tip indicates that the driving style can be adjusted to be Display in the instrument display more fuel efficient, for example by When ECO PRO mode is activated, the display backing off the accelerator. switches to a special configuration. Blue bar segments symbolize the gained bo‐ Activating/deactivating the display nus range in stages. 1. "My Vehicle" In addition, the bonus range is highlighted in 2. "iDrive settings" blue in the total range display. 3. "Displays" ECO PRO bonus range 4. "Instrument panel" An adjusted driving style helps 5. "ECO PRO info" you extend your driving range. In the instrument display: This may be displayed as the Using iDrive: bonus range in the instrument 1. "My Vehicle" cluster. 2. "iDrive settings" The bonus range is shown in the range display. 3. "Displays" The bonus range is automatically reset every time the vehicle is refueled. 4. "Instrument panel" 5. "Driving mode view" ECO PRO efficiency display ECO PRO tip, symbols The color of the ECO PRO displays in the in‐ strument cluster tell you how efficiently you An additional symbol and text instructions are are driving: displayed. ▷ Blue display: efficient driving style. Symbol Measure ▷ Gray display: adjust driving style, for exam‐ For efficient driving back off the ac‐ ple by backing off the accelerator pedal. celerator or delay accelerating to al‐ The display switches to blue as soon as all low time to assess road conditions. conditions for driving with optimized fuel effi‐ Reduce speed to the selected ECO ciency are met. PRO speed. Depending on your vehicle's equipment, the ECO PRO displays also inform you about your Steptronic transmission: current driving style. This is indicated by a Switch from M/S to D and avoid pointer which moves along a scale. The pointer manual shift interventions. tells you whether energy is being consumed to accelerate the vehicle or whether energy is be‐ ing recovered through coasting and braking. If
204 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 205
Saving fuel Driving tips
Indications on the Control Display To do this, under certain conditions the engine is automatically decoupled from the transmis‐ Displaying EfficientDynamics sion when selector lever position D is set. The information vehicle continues traveling with the engine The current efficiency of the ECO PRO func‐ idling to reduce fuel consumption. Selector tions can be displayed on the Control Display. lever position D remains engaged. This driving condition is referred to as coast‐ 1. "My Vehicle" ing. 2. "Technology in action" As soon as you step on the brake or accelera‐ 3. "EfficientDynamics" tor pedal, the engine is automatically coupled 4. Select the symbol. again. The following functions are displayed: General information ▷ Auto Start/Stop function. Coasting is a component of the ECO PRO driv‐ ▷ Energy recovery. ing mode. ▷ Coasting. Coasting is automatically activated when ECO PRO mode is called via the Driving Dynamics Displaying fuel consumption history Control. The average consumption can be displayed on The function is available in a certain speed the Control Display. range. 1. "My Vehicle" A proactive driving style helps the driver to use 2. "Technology in action" the function as often as possible and supports the fuel-conserving effect of coasting. 3. "EfficientDynamics" 4. Select the symbol. Functional requirements Vertical bars show consumption for the se‐ In ECO PRO mode, this function is available in lected time frame. a speed range from approximately 30 mph/50 km/h to 100 mph/160 km/h if the Adjusting the fuel consumption following conditions are met: history time frame ▷ Accelerator pedal and brake pedal are not operated. 1. Press button. ▷ The selector lever is in selector lever posi‐ 2. Adjust the time frame. tion D. Reset fuel consumption history ▷ Engine and transmission are at operating temperature. 1. Press button. Operation via shift paddles 2. "Reset consumption history" Concept Coasting Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the Concept coasting mode can be influenced with the shift paddles. This function helps to save fuel.
205 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 206
Driving tips Saving fuel
Activating/deactivating coasting via shift System limits paddles The function is not available if one of the fol‐ 1. Shift to the highest gear by pulling the right lowing conditions applies: shift paddle. ▷ If DSC OFF or TRACTION is activated. 2. To activate coasting mode, actuate the ▷ If cruise control is activated. right shift paddle again. ▷ If driving in the dynamic limit range. To deactivate, actuate the left shift paddle. ▷ If driving on steep uphill or downhill grades. Display ▷ If the battery charge state is temporarily too low. Display in the instrument cluster ▷ If the vehicle electrical system is drawing The mark in the efficiency display is backlit in excessive current. blue and is located at the zero point. The tach‐ ometer approximately indicates idle speed. Driving style analysis The coasting point indicator is illuminated at Concept the zero point during coasting. The function helps develop an especially effi‐ Indications on the Control Display cient driving style and to conserve fuel. The coasting mode is displayed in For this purpose, the driving style is analyzed. EfficientDynamics while driving. The assessment is done in various categories and is displayed on the Control Display. The distance traveled in coasting mode is shown in the fuel consumption history. The This display will help you adjust your driving counter is reset prior to every departure. style and save some fuel. The last 15 minutes of a trip are evaluated. The range of the vehicle can be extended by adopting an efficient driving style. This gain in range is displayed as a bonus range in the instrument cluster and on the Control Display.
Functional requirement The function is only available in ECO PRO Color code blue: coasting mode. mode.
Displaying Efficient Dynamics information Calling up ECO PRO driving style analysis 1. "My Vehicle" 1. "My Vehicle" 2. "Technology in action" 2. "Technology in action" 3. "EfficientDynamics" 3. "Driving style analysis" 4. Select the symbol.
206 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 207
Saving fuel Driving tips
Display on the Control Display
The display of the ECO PRO driving style anal‐ ysis consists of a symbolized route and a lookup table. The road symbolizes the efficiency of the driv‐ ing style. The more efficient the driving style, the smoother the depicted route becomes, ar‐ row 1. The table of values contains stars. The more efficient the driving style, the more stars are in‐ cluded in the table and the faster the bonus range increases, arrow 2. If, on the other hand, the driving style is ineffi‐ cient, a more wavy road and a reduced number of stars are displayed. To assist with an efficient driving style, ECO PRO tips are displayed during driving. Tips for an energy-saving driving style, Saving fuel, refer to page 201.
207 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Mobility
In order to always ensure your mobility, you will find important information on operating fluids, wheels and tires, maintenance and Roadside Assistance in the following.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 210
Mobility Refueling
Refueling
Vehicle features and options Fuel cap This chapter describes all standard, country- Opening specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not 1. Briefly press the rear edge of the fuel filler necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due flap. to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.
General information Observe the fuel recommendation, refer to page 212, prior to refueling. 2. Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise.
Safety information NOTE With a range of less than 30 miles/50 km it is possible that the engine will no longer have sufficient fuel. Engine functions are not en‐ sured anymore. There is a risk of property damage. Refuel promptly.◀ 3. Place the fuel cap in the bracket attached to the fuel filler flap.
210 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 211
Refueling Mobility
Closing WARNING The retaining strap of the fuel cap can be jammed and crushed during closing. The cap cannot be correctly closed. Fuel or fuel vapors can escape. There is a risk of injury or risk of property damage. Pay attention that the retain‐ ing strap is not jammed or crushed when clos‐ ing the lid.◀ 1. Fit the cap and turn it clockwise until you clearly hear a click. 2. Close the fuel filler flap.
Manually unlocking fuel filler flap E.g., in the event of an electrical malfunction. Have fuel filler flap unlocked by a dealer’s serv‐ ice center or another qualified service center or repair shop.
Observe the following when refueling
General information The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle clicks off the first time. Observe safety regulations posted at the gas station.
Safety information NOTE Fuels are toxic and aggressive. Overfill‐ ing of the fuel tank can damage the fuel sys‐ tem. Painted surfaces may be damaged by contact with fuel. Escaping fuel can harm the environment. There is a risk of property dam‐ age. Avoid overfilling.◀
211 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 212
Mobility Fuel
Fuel
Vehicle features and options Safety information This chapter describes all standard, country- NOTE specific and optional features offered with the Do not press the Start/Stop button after series. It also describes features that are not refueling with the wrong fuel. Furthermore, the necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due catalytic converter is permanently damaged. to the selected options or country versions. There is a risk of property damage. Do not re‐ This also applies to safety-related functions fuel or add the following in the case of gasoline and systems. When using these functions and engines: systems, the applicable laws and regulations ▷ Leaded gasoline. must be observed. ▷ Metallic additives, e.g., manganese or iron. Do not press the Start/Stop button after refuel‐ Fuel recommendation ing with the wrong fuel. Contact a dealer’s service center or another qualified service cen‐ General information ter or repair shop.◀ Depending on the region, many gas stations NOTE sell fuel that has been customized to winter or Incorrect fuels can damage the fuel sys‐ summer conditions. Fuel that is available in tem and the engine. There is a risk of damage winter, e.g., helps make a cold start easier. to property. Do not use fuels with a higher per‐ centage of ethanol than recommended. Do not Gasoline refuel with fuels containing methanol, e.g. M5 to M100.◀ General information For the best fuel efficiency, the gasoline NOTE should be sulfur-free or very low in sulfur con‐ Fuel that does not comply with the mini‐ tent. mum quality can compromise engine function Fuels that are marked on the gas pump as con‐ or cause engine damage. There is a risk of taining metal must not be used. property damage. Do not fill with fuel that does not comply with the minimum quality.◀ Fuels with a maximum ethanol content of 10 %, i. e., E10, may be used for refueling. CAUTION Ethanol should meet the following quality stan‐ The use of poor-quality fuels may result dards: in harmful engine deposits or damage. Addi‐ US: ASTM 4806–xx tionally, problems relating to drivability, start‐ CAN: CGSB-3.511–xx ing and stalling, especially under certain envi‐ ronmental conditions such as high ambient xx: comply with the current standard in each temperature and high altitude, may occur. case. If drivability problems are encountered, we rec‐ ommend switching to a high quality gasoline brand and a higher octane grade — AKI num‐ ber — for a few tank fills. To avoid harmful en‐
212 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 213
Fuel Mobility
gine deposits, it is highly recommended to purchase gasoline from Top Tier retailers. Failure to comply with these recommendations may result in the need for unscheduled main‐ tenance.◀
Recommended fuel grade BMW recommends AKI 91.
Minimum fuel grade BMW recommends AKI 89. If you use gasoline with this minimum AKI Rat‐ ing, the engine may produce knocking sounds when starting at high external temperatures. This has no effect on the engine life.
213 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 214
Mobility Wheels and tires
Wheels and tires
Vehicle features and options The displays of inflation devices may under- read by up to 0.1 bar/2 psi. This chapter describes all standard, country- Tires have a natural, consistent loss of tire in‐ specific and optional features offered with the flation pressure. series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due For Flat Tire Monitor: after correcting the tire to the selected options or country versions. inflation pressure, reinitialize the Flat Tire This also applies to safety-related functions Monitor. and systems. When using these functions and For Tire Pressure Monitor: perform a reset of systems, the applicable laws and regulations the Tire Pressure Monitor after adjusting tire must be observed. pressure to a new value.
Tire inflation pressure specifications Tire inflation pressure The tire inflation pressure table, refer to page 215, contains all tire inflation pressure General information specifications for the specified tire sizes at the The tire characteristics and tire inflation pres‐ ambient temperature. The tire inflation pres‐ sure influence the following: sure values apply to tire sizes approved by the ▷ The service life of the tires. manufacturer of the vehicle for the vehicle type. ▷ Road safety. To identify the correct tire inflation pressure, ▷ Driving comfort. please note the following: Safety information ▷ Tire sizes of your vehicle. ▷ Maximum permitted driving speed. WARNING A tire with low or missing tire inflation Tire inflation pressures up to pressure impacts handling, such as steering 100 mph/160 km/h and braking response. There is a risk of an ac‐ For speeds of up to 100 mph/160 km/h and for cident. Regularly check the tire inflation pres‐ optimum driving comfort, note the pressure sure, and correct it as needed, e.g., twice a values in the tire inflation pressure table, refer month and before a long trip.◀ to page 215, and adjust as necessary.
Checking the tire inflation pressure Only check the tire inflation pressure when the tires are cold, i.e., after driving no more than 1.25 miles/2 km or when the vehicle has been parked for at least 2 hours. Tires heat up while driving, and the tire infla‐ tion pressure increases along with the tire's temperature. The tire inflation pressure speci‐ fications relate to cold tires or tires at ambient temperature.
214 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 215
Wheels and tires Mobility
Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI
Front: 225/45 ZR 2.3 / 33 - 18 95 Y XL Std Rear: 255/40 ZR - 2.5 / 36 18 99 Y XL Std
Front: 225/40 R 19 2.5 / 36 - These pressure values can also be found on 89 Y RSC the tire inflation pressure label on the driver's Rear: 255/35 R 19 - 2.8 / 41 door pillar. 92 Y RSC
Do not exceed a speed of 100 mph/160 km/h. Front: 225/35 R 20 2.7 / 39 - 90 Y XL RSC Tire inflation pressure values up to 100 mph/160 km/h Rear: 255/30 R 20 - 3.2 / 46 92 Y XL RSC
430i, 430i xDrive Emergency wheel: Speed up to a max. of T 135/80 R 17 102 50 mph / 80 km/h Tire size Pressure specifications M 4.2 / 60 in bar/PSI
Specifications in 440i, 440i xDrive bar/PSI with cold tires Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI
225/50 R 17 94 H 2.3 / 33 2.8 / 41 Specifications in M+S RSC bar/PSI with cold 225/50 R 17 94 V tires M+S A/S RSC 225/45 R 18 95 V 225/50 R 17 94 H 2.3 / 33 2.8 / 41 M+S XL A/S RSC M+S RSC 225/45 R 18 95 Y 225/45 R 18 95 V XL RSC M+S XL A/S RSC 225/45 R 18 95 V 225/45 R 18 95 Y M+S XL RSC XL RSC 225/40 R 19 93 V 2.6 / 38 3.1 / 45 225/45 R 18 95 V M+S XL A/S RSC M+S XL RSC
Front: 225/45 R 18 2.3 / 33 - 225/40 R 19 93 V 2.6 / 38 3.1 / 45 91 Y RSC M+S XL A/S RSC
Rear: 255/40 R 18 - 2.5 / 36 Front: 225/45 R 18 2.3 / 33 - 95 Y RSC 91 Y RSC
215 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 216
Mobility Wheels and tires
Tire size Pressure specifications Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI in bar/PSI
Rear: 255/40 R 18 - 2.5 / 36 Specifications in 95 Y RSC bar/PSI with cold tires Front: 225/45 ZR 2.3 / 33 - 18 95 Y XL Std Rear: 255/40 ZR - 2.5 / 36 225/50 R 17 94 H 2.6 / 38 3.1 / 45 18 99 Y XL Std M+S RSC 225/50 R 17 94 V Front: 225/40 R 19 2.5 / 36 - M+S A/S RSC 89 Y RSC 225/45 R 18 95 V Rear: 255/35 R 19 - 2.8 / 41 M+S XL A/S RSC 92 Y RSC 225/45 R 18 95 Y Front: 225/35 R 20 2.7 / 39 - XL RSC 90 Y XL RSC 225/45 R 18 95 V 3.0 / 44 3.5 / 51 Rear: 255/30 R 20 - 3.2 / 46 M+S XL RSC 92 Y XL RSC 225/40 R 19 93 V M+S XL A/S RSC Emergency wheel: Speed up to a max. of T 135/80 R 17 102 50 mph / 80 km/h Front: 225/45 R 18 2.6 / 38 - M 4.2 / 60 91 Y RSC Rear: 255/40 R 18 - 2.8 / 41 Tire inflation pressures at max. 95 Y RSC speeds above 100 mph/160 km/h Front: 225/45 ZR 2.6 / 38 - WARNING 18 95 Y XL Std In order to drive at maximum speeds in Rear: 255/40 ZR - 2.8 / 41 excess of 100 mph/160 km/h, please observe, 18 99 Y XL Std and, if necessary, adjust tire pressures for speeds exceeding 100 mph/160 km/h from the Front: 225/40 R 19 2.8 / 41 - relevant table on the following pages. Other‐ 89 Y RSC wise, tire damage and accidents could occur.◀ Rear: 255/35 R 19 - 3.1 / 45 For speeds over 100 mph/160 km/h and for 92 Y RSC optimum driving comfort, note the pressure Front: 225/35 R 20 3.0 / 44 - values in the tire inflation pressure table, refer 90 Y XL RSC to page 216, and adjust as necessary. Rear: 255/30 R 20 - 3.5 / 51 Tire inflation pressure values over 92 Y XL RSC 100 mph/160 km/h Emergency wheel: Speed up to a max. of 430i, 430i xDrive T 135/80 R 17 102 50 mph / 80 km/h Without high-speed tuning feature M 4.2 / 60
216 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 217
Wheels and tires Mobility
With high-speed tuning feature 440i, 440i xDrive Tire size Pressure specifications Without high-speed tuning feature in bar/PSI Tire size Pressure specifications Specifications in in bar/PSI bar/PSI with cold Specifications in tires bar/PSI with cold tires
225/50 R 17 94 H 2.6 / 38 3.1 / 45 M+S RSC 225/50 R 17 94 H 2.6 / 38 3.1 / 45 225/45 R 18 95 Y M+S RSC XL RSC 225/45 R 18 95 V 225/45 R 18 95 V 3.0 / 44 3.5 / 51 M+S XL A/S RSC M+S XL RSC 225/45 R 18 95 Y XL RSC Front: 2.6 / 38 - 225/45 R 18 91 Y 225/45 R 18 95 V 3.0 / 44 3.5 / 51 RSC M+S XL RSC Rear: 255/40 R 18 - 2.8 / 41 225/40 R 19 93 V 95 Y RSC M+S XL A/S RSC
Front: 225/45 ZR 2.6 / 38 - Front: 225/45 R 18 2.6 / 38 - 18 95 Y XL Std 91 Y RSC Rear: 255/40 ZR - 2.8 / 41 Rear: 255/40 R 18 - 2.8 / 41 18 99 Y XL Std 95 Y RSC
Front: 2.8 / 41 - Front: 225/45 ZR 2.6 / 38 - 225/40 R 19 89 Y 18 95 Y XL Std RSC Rear: 255/40 ZR - 2.8 / 41 Rear: 255/35 R 19 - 3.1 / 45 18 99 Y XL Std 92 Y RSC Front: 225/40 R 19 2.8 / 41 - Front: 225/35 3.0 / 44 - 89 Y RSC R 20 90 Y XL RSC Rear: 255/35 R 19 - 3.1 / 45 Rear: 255/30 R 20 - 3.5 / 51 92 Y RSC 92 Y XL RSC Front: 225/35 R 20 3.0 / 44 - Emergency Speed up to a max. of 90 Y XL RSC wheel: 50 mph / 80 km/h Rear: 255/30 R 20 - 3.5 / 51 T 135/80 R 17 4.2 / 60 92 Y XL RSC 102 M Emergency wheel: Speed up to a max. of T 135/80 R 17 102 50 mph / 80 km/h M 4.2 / 60
217 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 218
Mobility Wheels and tires
With high-speed tuning feature Tire identification marks Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI Tire size 245/45 R 18 96 Y Specifications in bar/PSI with cold 245: nominal width in mm tires 45: aspect ratio in % R: radial tire code
225/45 R 18 95 Y 2.6 / 38 3.1 / 45 18: rim diameter in inches XL RSC 96: load rating, not for ZR tires 225/50 R 17 94 H Y: speed rating, before the R on ZR tires M+S RSC Maximum tire load 225/45 R 18 95 V 3.0 / 44 3.5 / 51 Maximum tire load is the maximum permissible M+S XL RSC weight for which the tire is approved. Front: 2.6 / 38 - Locate the maximum tire load on the tire side‐ 225/45 R 18 91 Y wall and the Gross Axle Weight Rating – GAWR RSC – on the certification label on the driver’s door Rear: 255/40 R 18 - 2.8 / 41 pillar. 95 Y RSC Divide the tire load by 1.1. It must be greater than one-half of the vehicle’s Gross Axle Front: 225/45 ZR 2.6 / 38 - Weight Rating – GAWR. Note, front vs. rear 18 95 Y XL Std GAWR and tire loads, respectively. Rear: 255/40 ZR - 2.8 / 41 18 99 Y XL Std Speed letter Q = up to 100 mph, 160 km/h Front: 2.8 / 41 - 225/40 R 19 89 Y R = up to 106 mph, 170 km/h RSC S = up to 112 mph, 180 km/h Rear: 255/35 R 19 - 3.1 / 45 T = up to 118 mph, 190 km/h 92 Y RSC H = up to 131 mph, 210 km/h Front: 225/35 3.0 / 44 - V = up to 150 mph, 240 km/h R 20 90 Y XL RSC W = up to 167 mph, 270 km/h Rear: 255/30 R 20 - 3.5 / 51 Y = up to 186 mph, 300 km/h 92 Y XL RSC Tire Identification Number Emergency Speed up to a max. of DOT code: DOT xxxx xxx 0117 wheel: 50 mph / 80 km/h xxxx: manufacturer code for the tire brand T 135/80 R 17 4.2 / 60 102 M xxx: tire size and tire design 0117: tire age Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelines of the U.S. Department of Transportation.
218 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 219
Wheels and tires Mobility
Tire age test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire DOT … 0117: the tire was manufactured in the marked C may have poor traction performance. 1st week of 2017. The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, Recommendation and does not include acceleration, cornering, Regardless of wear and tear, replace tires at hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics. least every 6 years. Temperature Uniform Tire Quality Grading The temperature grades are A, the highest, B, Quality grades can be found where applicable and C, representing the tire's resistance to the on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder generation of heat and its ability to dissipate and maximum section width. heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. E.g.: Treadwear 200; Traction AA; Tempera‐ Sustained high temperature can cause the ma‐ ture A terial of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to DOT Quality Grades sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds Treadwear to a level of performance which all passenger Traction AA A B C vehicle tires must meet under the Federal Mo‐ Temperature A B C tor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades Band A represent higher levels of performance All passenger vehicle tires must conform to on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum Federal Safety Requirements in addition to required by law. these grades. WARNING Treadwear The temperature grade for this tire is es‐ The treadwear grade is a comparative rating tablished for a tire that is properly inflated and based on the wear rate of the tire when tested not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinfla‐ under controlled conditions on a specified gov‐ tion, or excessive loading, either separately or ernment test course. E.g., a tire graded 150 in combination, can cause heat buildup and would wear one and one-half, 1 g, times as well possible tire failure.◀ on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends RSC – Run-flat tires upon the actual conditions of their use, how‐ Run-flat tires, refer to page 222, are labeled ever, and may depart significantly from the with a circular symbol containing the letters norm due to variations in driving habits, service RSC marked on the sidewall. practices and differences in road characteris‐ tics and climate. M+S Traction Winter and all-season tires with better cold weather performance than summer tires. The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government
219 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 220
Mobility Wheels and tires
Tire tread ioning between the wheel and the road. Be careful to avoid road hazards and reduce your Summer tires speed, especially if your vehicle is equipped with low-profile tires. Do not drive with a tire tread depth of less than 0.12 inches/3 mm. Indications of tire damage or other vehicle mal‐ functions: There is an increased risk of hydroplaning if the tire tread depth is less than 0.12 in‐ ▷ Unusual vibrations while driving. ches/3 mm. ▷ Unusual handling such as a strong ten‐ dency to pull to the left or right. Winter tires Damage can, e.g., be caused by driving over Do not drive with a tire tread depth of less than curbs, road damage, or similar things. 0.16 inches/4 mm. Below a tread depth of 0.16 inches/4 mm, tires Safety information are less suitable for winter operation. WARNING Damaged tires can lose tire inflation Minimum tread depth pressure, which can lead to loss of vehicle control. There is a risk of an accident. If tire damage is suspected while driving, immedi‐ ately reduce speed and stop. Have wheels and tires checked. For this purpose, drive carefully to the nearest dealer’s service center or an‐ other qualified service center or repair shop. Have vehicle towed or transported as needed.◀
WARNING Wear indicators are distributed around the tire's circumference and have the legally re‐ Damaged tires can lose tire inflation quired minimum height of 0.063 in‐ pressure, which can lead to loss of vehicle ches/1.6 mm. control. There is a risk of an accident. Do not repair damaged tires, but have them re‐ The wear indicators are marked on the tire placed.◀ sidewall with TWI, Tread Wear Indicator. WARNING Tires can become damaged by driving Tire damage over obstacles, e.g., curbs or road damage, at high speed. Larger wheels have a smaller tire General information cross-section. The smaller the tire cross-sec‐ tion, the higher the risk of tire damage. There Inspect your tires regularly for damage, foreign is a danger of accidents and property damage. objects lodged in the tread, and tread wear. If possible, drive around obstacles, or drive Driving over rough or damaged road surfaces, over them slowly and carefully.◀ as well as debris, curbs and other obstacles can cause serious damage to wheels, tires and suspension parts. This is more likely to occur with low-profile tires, which provide less cush‐
220 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 221
Wheels and tires Mobility
Changing wheels and tires Recommended tire brands
Mounting Have mounting and wheel balancing carried out by a dealer’s service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.
Wheel and tire combination
General information You can ask the dealer’s service center or an‐ For each tire size, BMW recommends certain other qualified service center or repair shop tire brands. The tire brands can be identified about the correct wheel/tire combination and by a star on the tire sidewall. wheel rim versions for the vehicle. Incorrect wheel and tire combinations impair New tires the function of a variety of systems such as Tire traction is not optimal due to manufactur‐ ABS or DSC. ing circumstances when tires are brand-new; To maintain good handling and vehicle re‐ they achieve their full traction potential after a sponse, use only tires with a single tread con‐ break-in time. figuration from a single manufacturer. Drive conservatively for the first Following tire damage, have the original wheel 200 miles/300 km. and tire combination remounted on the vehicle as soon as possible. Retreaded tires The manufacturer of your vehicle does not rec‐ Safety information ommend the use of retreaded tires. WARNING WARNING Wheels and tires which are not suitable Retreaded tires can have different tire for your vehicle can damage parts of the vehi‐ casing structures. With advanced age the serv‐ cle, for instance due to contact with the body ice life can be limited. There is a risk of an acci‐ due to tolerances despite the same official size dent. The manufacturer of your vehicle does rating. There is a risk of an accident. The man‐ not recommend the use of retreaded tires.◀ ufacturer of your vehicle strongly suggests that you use wheels and tires that have been recommended by the vehicle manufacturer for Winter tires your vehicle type.◀ Winter tires are recommended for operating on winter roads. Although so-called all-season M+S tires pro‐ vide better winter traction than summer tires, they do not provide the same level of perform‐ ance as winter tires.
221 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 222
Mobility Wheels and tires
Maximum speed of winter tires Run-flat tires If the maximum speed of the vehicle is higher than the permissible speed for the winter tires, Concept then attach a corresponding information label/ Run-flat tires permit continued driving under sticker in the field of view. The label is available restricted conditions even in the event of a from a dealer’s service center or another quali‐ complete loss of tire inflation pressure. fied service center or repair shop. With mounted winter tires, observe and adhere General information to the permissible maximum speed. The wheels consist of tires that are self-sup‐ porting, to a limited degree, and possibly spe‐ Run-flat tires cial rims. If you are already using run-flat tires, for your The support of the sidewall allows the tire to own safety you should replace them only with remain drivable to a restricted degree in the the same kind. No spare tire is available in the event of a tire inflation pressure loss. case of a flat tire. Further information is availa‐ Follow the instructions for continued driving ble from a dealer’s service center or another with a flat tire. qualified service center or repair shop. Label Rotating wheels between axles Different wear patterns can occur on the front and rear axles depending on individual driving conditions. The tires can be rotated between the axles to achieve even wear. Further infor‐ mation is available from a dealer’s service cen‐ ter or another qualified service center or repair shop. After rotating, check the tire pressure and correct, if needed. Rotating the tires between the axes is not per‐ missible on vehicles with different tire sizes or RSC label on the tire sidewall. rim sizes on the front and rear axles. Changing run-flat tires Storage For your own safety, only use run-flat tires. No Store wheels and tires in a cool, dry and dark spare tire is available in the case of a flat tire. place. A dealer’s service center will be glad to answer Always protect tires against all contact with oil, additional questions at any time. grease and fuels. Do not exceed the maximum tire inflation pres‐ sure indicated on the side wall of the tire. Repairing a flat tire
Safety measures ▷ Park the vehicle as far away as possible from passing traffic and on solid ground. ▷ Switch on the hazard warning system.
222 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 223
Wheels and tires Mobility
▷ Secure the vehicle against rolling away by ▷ Contact a dealer’s service center or an‐ setting the parking brake. other qualified service center or repair ▷ Have all vehicle occupants get out of the shop if the tire cannot be made drivable. vehicle and ensure that they remain out‐ ▷ If possible, do not remove foreign bodies side the immediate area in a safe place, that have penetrated the tire. such as behind a guardrail. ▷ Pull the speed limit sticker off the sealant ▷ If necessary, set up a warning triangle or container and apply it to the steering portable hazard warning light at a sufficient wheel. distance. ▷ The use of a sealant can damage the TPM ▷ Change wheels only on a flat, solid and wheel electronics. In this case, have the slip-resistant surface. On soft or slippery electronics checked and replaced at the ground, for example snow, ice, tiles, etc., next opportunity. the vehicle or the vehicle jack may slip away sideways. Storage ▷ Do not place wood blocks or similar items The Mobility System is located under the under the vehicle jack; otherwise, it cannot cargo floor panel. reach its carrying capacity because of the restricted height. Sealant container ▷ If the vehicle is raised, do not lie under the vehicle and do not start the engine, or else there is a danger to life.
Mobility System
Concept With the Mobility System, minor tire damage can be sealed temporarily to enable continued ▷ Sealant container, arrow 1. travel. To accomplish this, sealant is pumped ▷ Filling hose, arrow 2. into the tires, which seals the damage from the inside. Observe use-by date on the sealant container. The compressor can be used to check the tire inflation pressure.
General information ▷ Follow the instructions on using the Mobi‐ lity System found on the compressor and sealant container. ▷ Use of the Mobility System may be ineffec‐ tive if the tire puncture measures approx. 1/8 inches/4 mm or more.
223 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 224
Mobility Wheels and tires
Compressor 2. Take the connection hose completely out of the compressor housing. Do not kink the hose.
1 On/off switch 2 Holder for sealant container 3 Reduce inflation pressure 3. Attach the connection hose to the connec‐ tor of the sealing container, ensuring that it 4 Inflation pressure dial engages audibly. 5 Compressor 6 Connector/cable for socket 7 Connection hose — stowed in the bottom of the compressor
Filling the tire with sealant 1. Shake the sealant container.
4. Slide the sealing container upright into the holder on the compressor housing, ensur‐ ing that it engages audibly.
224 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 225
Wheels and tires Mobility
5. Screw the connection hose onto the tire NOTE valve of the nonworking wheel. The compressor can overheat during ex‐ tended operation. There is a risk of property damage. Do not run the compressor for more than 10 min.◀ Let the compressor run for approx. 3 to 8 mi‐ nutes to fill the tire with sealant and achieve a tire inflation pressure of approx. 2.5 bar. While the tire is being filled with sealant, the tire inflation pressure may sporadically reach approx. 5 bar. Do not switch off the compres‐ 6. With the compressor switched off, insert sor at this point. the plug into a power socket inside the ve‐ If a tire inflation pressure of 2 bar is not hicle. reached:
1. Switch off the compressor. 2. Unscrew the filling hose from the wheel. 3. Drive 33 ft/10 m forward and back to dis‐ tribute the sealant in the tire. 4. Inflate the tire again using the compressor. If a tire inflation pressure of 2 bar cannot be reached, contact your dealer’s service cen‐ ter or another qualified service center or 7. With the ignition switched on or the engine repair shop. running, switch on the compressor. Stowing the Mobility System 1. Remove the connection hose of the seal‐ ant container from the wheel. 2. Remove the connection hose from the sealant container. 3. Wrap the empty sealant container and con‐ nection hose in suitable material to avoid dirtying the cargo area. 4. Stow the Mobility System back in the vehi‐ DANGER cle. If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventila‐ tion is insufficient, harmful exhaust gases can Distributing the sealant enter into the vehicle. The exhaust gases con‐ Immediately drive approx. 5 miles/10 km to en‐ tain pollutants which are colorless and odor‐ sure that the sealant is evenly distributed in the less. In enclosed areas, exhaust gases can also tire. accumulate outside of the vehicle. There is Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. danger to life. Keep the exhaust pipe free and ensure sufficient ventilation.◀
225 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 226
Mobility Wheels and tires
If possible, do not drive at speeds less than ▷ To reduce the pressure: press the but‐ 12 mph/20 km/h. ton on the compressor.
Correcting the tire inflation pressure Continuing the trip 1. Stop at a suitable location. Do not exceed the maximum permissible 2. Screw the connection hose onto the tire speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. valve stem. Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor. Reinitialize the Tire Pressure Monitor. Replace the nonworking tire and the sealant container of the Mobility System promptly.
Snow chains
Fine-link snow chains The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends 3. Attach the connection hose directly to the use of fine-link snow chains. Certain types of compressor. fine-link snow chains have been tested by the manufacturer of the vehicle and recommended as road-safe and suitable. Information regarding suitable snow chains is available from a dealer’s service center or an‐ other qualified service center or repair shop.
Use WARNING With the mounting of snow chains on un‐ 4. Insert the connector into the power socket suitable tires, the snow chains can come into inside the vehicle. contact with vehicle parts. There is a risk of ac‐ cidents or risk of property damage. Only mount snow chains on tires that are designated by their manufacturer as suitable for the use of snow chains.◀ Use only in pairs on the rear wheels, equipped with the tires of the following size: ▷ 225/50 R 17. ▷ 225/45 R 18. 5. Correct the tire inflation pressure to Follow the snow chain manufacturer's instruc‐ 2.5 bar. tions. ▷ Increase pressure: with the ignition Make sure that the snow chains are always switched on or the engine running, sufficiently tight. Re-tighten as needed ac‐ switch on the compressor.
226 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 227
Wheels and tires Mobility
cording to the snow chain manufacturer's in‐ WARNING structions. On soft or slippery ground, e.g., snow, Do not initialize the Flat Tire Monitor after ice, tiles, etc., the vehicle jack can slip away. mounting snow chains, as doing so may result There is a risk of injury. If possible, change the in incorrect readings. tire/wheel on a flat, solid and slip-resistant sur‐ Do not initialize the Tire Pressure Monitor after face.◀ mounting snow chains, as doing so may result WARNING in incorrect readings. The vehicle jack is only provided for When driving with snow chains, briefly activate short-term lifting of the vehicle for wheel Dynamic Traction Control, if needed. changes. Even if all safety measures are ob‐ served, there is a risk of the raised vehicle fall‐ Maximum speed with snow chains ing, if the vehicle jack tilts over. There is a risk Do not exceed a speed of 30 mph/50 km/h of injuries or danger to life. If the vehicle is when using snow chains. raised, do not lie under the vehicle and do not start the engine.◀ Changing wheels/tires WARNING The vehicle jack is optimized for lifting General information the vehicle and for the jacking points on the When using run-flat tires or tire sealants, a tire vehicle only. There is a risk of injury. Do not lift does not always need to be changed immedi‐ any other vehicle or cargo using the vehicle ately in the event of pressure loss due to a flat jack.◀ tire. WARNING If needed, the tools for changing wheels are If the vehicle jack is not inserted into the available as accessories from a dealer’s service jacking point provided for this purpose, the ve‐ center or another qualified service center or re‐ hicle may be damaged or the vehicle jack may pair shop. slip when it is being cranked up. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. When Safety information cranking up the vehicle jack, ensure that it is WARNING inserted in the jacking point next to the wheel The vehicle jack is provided by the vehi‐ housing.◀ cle manufacturer for changing wheels in the WARNING event of a flat tire. The vehicle jack is not de‐ signed for frequent use, for instance for chang‐ A vehicle that is raised on a vehicle jack ing from summer to winter tires. Using the ve‐ may fall off of the jack if lateral forces are ex‐ hicle jack frequently may cause it to jam or erted on it. There is a risk of injury and risk of become damaged. There is a risk of injury and damage to property. While the vehicle is risk of damage to property. Only use the vehi‐ raised, do not exert lateral forces on the vehicle cle jack to change an emergency wheel or a or pull abruptly on the vehicle. Have a stuck spare tire in the event of a flat tire.◀ wheel removed by a dealer’s service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.◀
227 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 228
Mobility Wheels and tires
Securing the vehicle against rolling ▷ Switch on the hazard warning system. ▷ Set the parking brake. General information ▷ Engage a gear or selector lever position P. The vehicle manufacturer recommends to ad‐ ▷ As soon as permitted by the traffic flow, ditionally secure the vehicle against rolling have all vehicle occupants get out of the away when changing a wheel. vehicle and ensure that they remain out‐ side the immediate area in a safe place, On a level surface such as behind a guardrail. ▷ Depending on the equipment version, get tools and the emergency wheel from the vehicle. ▷ If necessary, set up a warning triangle or portable hazard warning lamp at an appro‐ priate distance. ▷ Do not place wood blocks or similar items under the vehicle jack; otherwise, it cannot reach its carrying capacity because of the Place chocks or other suitable objects, for ex‐ restricted height. ample a rock, in front of and behind the wheel that is diagonally opposite to the wheel that ▷ Secure the vehicle additionally against roll‐ you wish to change. ing. ▷ Loosen the lug bolts a half turn. On a slight downhill gradient Jacking points for the vehicle jack
If you need to change a wheel on a slight downhill grade, place chocks and other suita‐ The jacking points for the vehicle jack are lo‐ ble objects, for instance a rock, under the cated at the indicated positions. wheels of both the front and rear axles against the rolling direction. Jacking up the vehicle WARNING Preparing the vehicle Hands and fingers can be jammed when ▷ Change the wheel as far away as possible using the vehicle jack. There is a risk of injury. from passing traffic. Comply with the described hand position and ▷ Park the vehicle on solid, non-slip and level ground.
228 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 229
Wheels and tires Mobility
do not change this position while using the ve‐ 5. Make sure that the vehicle jack foot is ex‐ hicle jack.◀ tended vertically. 1. Hold the vehicle jack with one hand, ar‐ row 1, and grasp the crank with your other hand, arrow 2.
6. Make sure that the vehicle jack foot stands vertically and perpendicularly beneath the jacking point after extending the vehicle jack. 2. Insert the vehicle jack into the rectangular recess of the jacking point closest to the wheel to be changed.
7. Crank up the vehicle jack until the entire surface of the jack is in contact with the ground and the wheel in question is raised 3. Extend the vehicle jack by turning the a maximum of 1.2 inches/3 cm off the crank or lever clockwise. ground.
Mounting a wheel Mount one emergency wheel only.
1. Unscrew the lug bolts and remove the wheel. 2. Put the new wheel or emergency wheel on and screw in at least two bolts in a cross‐ wise pattern until hand-tight. 4. Take your hand away from the jack as soon If non-original light-alloy wheels of the ve‐ as the vehicle jack is under load and con‐ hicle manufacturer are mounted, the ac‐ tinue turning the crank or lever with one companying lug bolts may have to be used hand. as well. 3. Hand-tighten the remaining lug bolts and tighten all bolts well in a crosswise pattern.
229 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 230
Mobility Wheels and tires
4. Turn the crank on the vehicle jack counter‐ clockwise to retract the jack and lower the vehicle. 5. Remove the vehicle jack.
After the wheel change 1. Tighten the lug bolts crosswise. The tight‐ ening torque is 101 lb ft/140 Nm. 2. Stow the nonworking wheel in the cargo area. The nonworking wheel cannot be stored under the cargo floor panel because of its size. 3. Check tire inflation pressure at the next op‐ portunity and correct as needed. 4. Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor. Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor. 5. Check to make sure the lug bolts are tight with a calibrated torque wrench. 6. Drive to the nearest dealer’s service center or another qualified service center or repair shop to have the damaged tire replaced.
230 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 231
Engine compartment Mobility
Engine compartment
Vehicle features and options to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions This chapter describes all standard, country- and systems. When using these functions and specific and optional features offered with the systems, the applicable laws and regulations series. It also describes features that are not must be observed. necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
Important features in the engine compartment
1 Jump-starting, negative battery terminal 6 Oil filler neck 2 Vehicle identification number 7 Coolant reservoir 3 Filler neck for washer fluid The coolant reservoir for 6-cylinder and 4 Jump-starting, positive battery terminal diesel engines is located on the opposite side of the engine compartment. 5 Engine compartment fuse box
231 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 232
Mobility Engine compartment
Hood NOTE Folded-away wipers can be jammed Safety information when the hood is opened. There is a risk of property damage. Make sure that the wipers WARNING with the wiper blades mounted are folded Improperly executed work in the engine down onto the windshield before opening the compartment can damage vehicle compo‐ hood.◀ nents and impair vehicle functions. There is a risk of personal and property damage. The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends Opening the hood that, in the effort to avoid such risks, work in 1. Pull lever, arrow 1. the engine compartment be performed by a Hood is unlocked. dealer’s service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.◀
WARNING The engine compartment accommo‐ dates moving components. Certain compo‐ nents in the engine compartment can also move with the vehicle switched off, for in‐ stance the radiator fan. There is a risk of injury. Do not reach into the area of moving parts. Keep articles of clothing and hair away from 2. After the lever is released, pull the lever moving parts.◀ again, arrow 2. Hood can be opened. WARNING There are protruding parts, for instance Indicator/warning lights locking hook, on the inside of the hood. There When the hood is unlocked, a Check Control is a risk of injury. If the hood is open, pay atten‐ message is displayed. tion to protruding parts and keep clear of these areas.◀ Closing the hood WARNING An incorrectly locked hood can open while driving and restrict visibility. There is a risk of an accident. Stop immediately and cor‐ rectly close the hood.◀
WARNING Body parts can be jammed when open‐ ing and closing the hood. There is a risk of in‐ jury. Make sure that the area of movement of Let the hood drop from a height of approx. the hood is clear during opening and closing.◀ 16 inches/40 cm and push down on it to lock it fully. The hood must engage on both sides.
232 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 233
Engine oil Mobility
Engine oil
Vehicle features and options Electronic oil measurement This chapter describes all standard, country- Status display specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not Concept necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. The engine oil level is monitored electronically This also applies to safety-related functions while driving and shown on the Control Dis‐ and systems. When using these functions and play. systems, the applicable laws and regulations If the engine oil level reaches the minimum must be observed. level, a Check Control message is displayed.
Functional requirements General information A current measured value is available after ap‐ prox. 30 minutes of driving. During a shorter The engine oil consumption is dependent on trip, the status of the last, sufficiently long trip the driving style and driving conditions. is displayed. The engine oil consumption can increase in With frequent short-distance trips, regularly the following situations, for example: perform a detailed measurement. ▷ Sporty driving style. ▷ Break-in of the engine. Displaying the engine oil level ▷ Idling of the engine. Using iDrive:
▷ With use of engine oil types that are classi‐ 1. "My Vehicle" fied as not suitable. 2. "Vehicle status" Therefore, regularly check the engine oil level 3. "Engine oil level" after refueling. The engine oil level is displayed. The vehicle is equipped with electronic oil measurement. Engine oil level display messages The electronic oil measurement has two meas‐ uring principles: Concept ▷ Status display. Different messages appear on the display de‐ ▷ Detailed measurement. pending on the engine oil level. Pay attention to these messages. If the engine oil level is too low within the next 125 miles/200 km, add engine oil. Take care not to add too much engine oil. A red indicator light indicates that the engine oil pressure is too low.
233 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 234
Mobility Engine oil
Safety information Using iDrive: NOTE 1. "My Vehicle" An engine oil level that is too low causes 2. "Vehicle status" engine damage. There is a risk of property 3. "Engine oil level" damage. Immediately add engine oil.◀ 4. "Measure engine oil level" NOTE 5. "Start measurement" Too much engine oil can damage the en‐ The engine oil level is checked and displayed gine or the catalytic converter. There is a risk via a scale. of property damage. Do not add too much en‐ Time: approx. 1 minute. gine oil. When too much engine oil is added, have oil level corrected by a dealer’s service center or another qualified service center or re‐ pair shop.◀ Adding engine oil General information Detailed measurement Only add engine oil when the message is dis‐ Concept played in the instrument cluster. The quantity to be added is indicated in the message dis‐ In the detailed measurement the engine oil played in the instrument cluster. level is checked when the vehicle is stationary, Switch off the ignition and safely park the vehi‐ and displayed via a scale. cle before engine oil is added. If the engine oil level reaches the minimum Take care not to add too much engine oil. level, a Check Control message is displayed. During the measurement, the idle speed is in‐ Safety information creased somewhat. WARNING General information Operating materials, e.g., oils, greases, A detailed measurement is only possible with coolants, fuels, can contain harmful ingredi‐ certain engines. ents. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Observe the instructions on the containers. Functional requirements Avoid the contact of articles of clothing, skin or eyes with operating materials. Do not refill op‐ ▷ Vehicle is parked in a horizontal position. erating materials into different bottles. Store ▷ Steptronic transmission: selector lever in operating materials out of reach of children.◀ selector lever position N or P and accelera‐ tor pedal not depressed. NOTE ▷ Engine is running and is at operating tem‐ An engine oil level that is too low causes perature. engine damage. There is a risk of property damage. Performing a detailed measurement Add engine oil within the next In order to perform a detailed measurement of 125 miles/200 km.◀ the engine oil level: confirm the message re‐ garding the engine oil level display.
234 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 235
Engine oil Mobility
NOTE NOTE Too much engine oil can damage the en‐ Incorrect engine oil can cause malfunc‐ gine or the catalytic converter. There is a risk tions in the engine or damage it. There is a risk of property damage. Do not add too much en‐ of property damage. When selecting an engine gine oil. When too much engine oil is added, oil, make sure that the engine oil has the cor‐ have oil level corrected by a dealer’s service rect oil rating.◀ center or another qualified service center or re‐ pair shop.◀ Suitable engine oil types You can add engine oils that meet the follow‐ Overview ing oil rating standards: The oil filler neck is located in the engine com‐ Gasoline engine partment, refer to page 231. BMW Longlife-01 FE. Opening the oil filler neck BMW Longlife-14 FE+. 1. Open the hood, refer to page 232. 2. Open the lid counterclockwise. The oil rating BMW Longlife-14 FE+ is only suitable for particular gasoline engines. More information about suitable engine oil rat‐ ings and viscosities of engine oils is available at a dealer’s service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.
Alternative engine oil types If an engine oil suitable for continuous use is not available, up to 1 US quart/liter of an en‐ 3. Add engine oil. gine oil with the following oil rating can be added: Engine oil types to add Gasoline engine BMW Longlife-01. General information API SL or superior oil rating. The engine oil quality is critical for the life of the engine. Viscosity grades Safety information Gasoline engine: NOTE When selecting an engine oil, make sure that Oil additives can damage the engine. the engine oil has the viscosity grade SAE There is a risk of property damage. Do not use 0W-30 or SAE 0W-20. The suitable viscosity oil additives.◀ grade is indicated on a label in the engine com‐ partment. Alternatively, also engine oils with viscosity grades SAE 5W-20, SAE 5W-30, SAE 0W-40 or SAE 5W-40 can be used.
235 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 236
Mobility Engine oil
The viscosity grades SAE 0W-20 or SAE 5W-20 are only suitable for particular engines. More information about suitable engine oil rat‐ ings and viscosities of engine oils can be re‐ quested from a dealer’s service center or an‐ other qualified service center or repair shop.
Engine oil change NOTE Engine oil that is not changed in timely fashion can cause increased engine wear and thus engine damage. There is a risk of property damage. Do not exceed the service data indi‐ cated in the vehicle.◀ The vehicle manufacturer recommends that you have a dealer’s service center or another qualified service center or repair shop change the engine oil.
236 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 237
Coolant Mobility
Coolant
Vehicle features and options Coolant level This chapter describes all standard, country- General information specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not The coolant level is indicted using minimum necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due and maximum markings. Depending on the to the selected options or country versions. coolant reservoir, the minimum and maximum This also applies to safety-related functions markings are located at different locations. and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations Concept must be observed. Depending on the engine installation, the cool‐ ant reservoir is located on the right side or the left side of the engine compartment. General information Checking the coolant level on the side Not all commercially available additives are markings suitable for the vehicle. Information about suit‐ 1. Let the engine cool. able additives is available from a dealer’s serv‐ ice center or another qualified service center or 2. The coolant level is correct if it lies be‐ repair shop. tween the minimum and maximum marks. The marks are on the side of the coolant reservoir. Safety information Symbol Meaning WARNING With the engine hot and the cooling sys‐ Maximum tem open, coolant can escape and lead to Minimum scalding. There is a risk of injury. Only open the cooling system with the engine cooled down.◀
WARNING Additives are harmful and incorrect addi‐ tives can damage the engine. There is a risk of injury and risk of property damage. Do not al‐ low additives to come into contact with skin, eyes or articles of clothing. Use suitable addi‐ tives only.◀
237 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 238
Mobility Coolant
Checking the coolant level in the filler Adding neck 1. Let the engine cool. There are yellow Min and Max marks in the 2. Turn the lid of the coolant reservoir slightly coolant reservoir. counterclockwise to allow any excess 1. Let the engine cool. pressure to dissipate, then open it. 2. Turn the lid of the coolant reservoir slightly counterclockwise to allow any excess pressure to dissipate, then open it.
3. If the coolant is low, slowly add coolant up to the specified level; do not overfill. 4. Turn the lid until there is an audible click. 3. Open the coolant reservoir lid. The arrows on the coolant reservoir and the lid must point towards one another. 4. The coolant level is correct if it lies be‐ tween the minimum and maximum marks 5. Have the cause of the coolant loss elimi‐ in the filler neck. nated as soon as possible.
Disposal Comply with the relevant environmen‐ tal protection regulations when dispos‐ ing of coolant and coolant additives.
238 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 239
Maintenance Mobility
Maintenance
Vehicle features and options General information Information on service requirements, refer to This chapter describes all standard, country- page 102, can be displayed on the Control Dis‐ specific and optional features offered with the play. series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due Service data in the remote control to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions Information on the required maintenance is and systems. When using these functions and continuously stored in the remote control. The systems, the applicable laws and regulations dealer’s service center can read this data out must be observed. and suggest a maintenance scope for the vehi‐ cle. Therefore, hand the service advisor the remote BMW maintenance system control with which the vehicle was driven most recently. The maintenance system indicates required maintenance measures, and thereby provides Storage periods support in maintaining road safety and the op‐ erational reliability of the vehicle. Storage periods during which the vehicle bat‐ tery was disconnected are not taken into ac‐ In some cases, scopes and intervals may vary count. according to the country-specific version. Re‐ placement work, spare parts, fuels and lubri‐ If this occurs, have a dealer's service center or cants, and wear materials are calculated sepa‐ another qualified service center or repair shop rately. Further information is available from a update the time-dependent maintenance pro‐ dealer’s service center or another qualified cedures, such as checking brake fluid and, if service center or repair shop. necessary, changing the engine oil and the mi‐ crofilter/activated-charcoal filter.
Condition Based Service Service and Warranty CBS Information Booklet for US Concept models and Warranty and Sensors and special algorithms take into ac‐ Service Guide Booklet for count the driving conditions of the vehicle. Canadian models CBS uses these to calculate the need for Please consult your Service and Warranty In‐ maintenance. formation Booklet for US models and Warranty The system makes it possible to adapt the and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian mod‐ amount of maintenance corresponding to your els for additional information on service re‐ user profile. quirements. The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends that maintenance and repair be performed by a dealer’s service center or another qualified
239 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 240
Mobility Maintenance
service center or repair shop. Records of regu‐ Emissions lar maintenance and repair work should be re‐ ▷ The warning lamp lights up: tained. Emissions are deteriorating. Have the vehicle checked as soon as Socket for OBD Onboard possible. Diagnosis ▷ The warning lamp flashes under certain circumstances: Safety information This indicates that there is excessive mis‐ firing in the engine. NOTE Reduce the vehicle speed and have the The socket for Onboard Diagnosis is an system checked immediately; otherwise, intricate component intended to be used in serious engine misfiring within a brief pe‐ conjunction with specialized equipment to riod can seriously damage emission con‐ check the vehicle’s primary emissions system. trol components, in particular the catalytic Improper use of the socket for Onboard Diag‐ converter. nosis, or contact with the socket for Onboard Diagnosis for other than its intended purpose, can cause vehicle malfunctions and creates risks of personal and property damage. Given the foregoing, the manufacture of your vehicle strongly recommends that access to the socket for Onboard Diagnosis be limited to a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop or other persons that have the specialized training and equip‐ ment for purposes of properly utilizing the socket for Onboard Diagnosis.◀
Position
There is an OBD socket on the driver's side for checking the primary components in the vehi‐ cle's emissions.
240 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 241
Replacing components Mobility
Replacing components
Vehicle features and options Replacing the wiper blades 1. To change the wiper blades, fold up the This chapter describes all standard, country- wiper arms, refer to page 86. specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not 2. Fold up and hold the wiper arm firmly. necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due 3. Squeeze the retainer spring, arrow 1, and to the selected options or country versions. fold up the wiper blade, arrow 2. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.
Onboard vehicle tool kit
4. Remove the wiper blade forward from the catch. 5. Insert the new wiper blade in reverse order of removal until it locks in place. 6. Fold down the wipers. NOTE The onboard vehicle tool kit is located under Folded-away wipers can be jammed the cargo floor panel. when the hood is opened. There is a risk of property damage. Make sure that the wipers with the wiper blades mounted are folded Wiper blade replacement down onto the windshield before opening the hood.◀ Safety information NOTE Light and bulb replacement If the wiper arm falls onto the windshield without the wiper blades installed, the wind‐ General information shield can be damaged. There is a risk of prop‐ erty damage. Secure the wiper arm when re‐ Lights and bulbs placing the wiper blades and do not fold down Lights and bulbs make an essential contribu‐ the wipers without the wiper blades installed.◀ tion to vehicle safety. The vehicle manufacturer recommends that you have the relevant work carried out a deal‐
241 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 242
Mobility Replacing components
er’s service center or another qualified service Light-emitting diodes (LEDs) center or repair shop. WARNING A spare light box is available from a dealer’s Too intensive brightness can irritate or service center or another qualified service cen‐ damage the retina of the eye. There is a risk of ter or repair shop. injury. Do not look directly into the headlights Observe the safety information, refer to or other light sources. Do not remove the LED page 242. covers.◀
Light-emitting diodes (LEDs) Headlight glass Some items of equipment use light-emitting Condensation can form on the inside of the ex‐ diodes installed behind a cover as a light ternal lights in cool or humid weather. When source. These light-emitting diodes, which are driving with the lights switched on, the con‐ related to conventional lasers, are officially densation evaporates after a short time. The designated as Class 1 light-emitting diodes. headlight glass does not need to be changed. Observe the safety information, refer to If despite driving with the lights switched on, page 242. increasing humidity forms, e.g., water droplets in the lamp, the manufacturer of your vehicle Safety information recommends having it checked by a dealer’s service center or another qualified service cen‐ Lights and bulbs ter or repair shop. WARNING Bulbs can get hot during operation. Con‐ Headlight setting tact with the bulbs can cause burns. There is a The headlight adjustments can be affected by risk of injury. Only change bulbs after they changing lights and bulbs. After the headlight have cooled off.◀ adjustment was changed, have it checked and, if necessary, corrected by a dealer’s service WARNING center or another qualified service center or re‐ Work on switched-on lighting systems pair shop. can cause short circuits. There is a risk of in‐ jury or risk of property damage. When working Front lights, bulb replacement on the lighting system, switch off the lamps in question. If necessary, heed the bulb manufac‐ LED headlights turer's instructions.◀ Light-emitting diodes (LEDs) NOTE All front lamps and side turn signals are de‐ Dirty bulbs have a reduced service life. signed with LED technology. There is a risk of property damage. Do not hold In the case of a malfunction, contact a dealer’s new bulbs with your bare hands. Use a clean service center or another qualified service cen‐ cloth or something similar, or hold the bulb by ter or repair shop. its base.◀ Halogen front fog lights Observe the safety information, refer to page 242.
242 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 243
Replacing components Mobility
35-watt bulb, H8. contact a dealer’s service center or another qualified service center or repair shop. 1. Use the handle of the screwdriver from the onboard vehicle tool kit to remove the Tail lamps, bulb replacement three wheel house panel screws, arrow 1. Carefully pull back the wheel house panel, Tail lights, license plate lights, and arrow 2. center brake light These lights are made using LED technology. In the case of a malfunction, contact a dealer’s service center or another qualified service cen‐ ter or repair shop.
Vehicle battery
Maintenance 2. Pull off the bulb connector, arrow 1. The battery is maintenance-free. Turn the bulb, arrow 2. The added amount of acid is sufficient for the Left side of vehicle: turn clockwise. service life of the battery. Right side of vehicle: turn counterclock‐ More information about the battery can be re‐ wise. quested from a dealer’s service center or an‐ Remove the bulb. other qualified service center or repair shop.
Replacing the vehicle battery
General information The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends that you have a dealer’s service center or an‐ other qualified service center or repair shop register the vehicle battery to the vehicle after the battery has been replaced. Once the bat‐ tery has been registered again, all comfort fea‐ 3. Insert the new bulb, connect the connector tures will be available without restriction and and screw on the wheel house panel. any Check Control messages displayed which relate to comfort features will disappear. LED front fog lights These front fog lights are made using LED Safety information technology. In the case of a malfunction, con‐ NOTE tact a dealer’s service center or another quali‐ fied service center or repair shop. Vehicle batteries that are not compatible can damage vehicle systems and impair vehi‐ Turn signal in exterior mirror cle functions. There is a risk of personal and property damage. Only vehicle batteries that The turn signals in the exterior mirrors feature are compatible with your vehicle type should LED technology. In the case of a malfunction, be installed in your vehicle. Information on
243 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 244
Mobility Replacing components
compatible vehicle batteries is available at your Disposing of old batteries dealer’s service center.◀ Have old batteries disposed of by a dealer’s service center or another Charging the battery qualified service center or repair shop or take them to a collection point. General information Maintain the battery in an upright position for Make sure that the battery is always suffi‐ transport and storage. Secure the battery so ciently charged to guarantee that the battery that it does not tip over during transport. remains usable for its full service life. A discharged battery is indicated by a red indicator light. Fuses The battery may need to be charged in the fol‐ Safety information lowing cases: ▷ When making frequent short-distance WARNING drives. Incorrect and repaired fuses can overload ▷ If the vehicle is not used for more than a electrical lines and components. There is a risk month. of fire. Never attempt to repair a blown fuse. Do not replace a nonworking fuse with a sub‐ Safety information stitute of another color or amperage rating.◀ NOTE Replacing a fuse Battery chargers for the vehicle battery The fuses are located in two different places in can work with high voltages and currents, the vehicle. which means that the 12 volt on-board net‐ work can be overloaded or damaged. There is Plastic tweezers and information on the fuse a risk of property damage. Only connect bat‐ types and locations are stored in the fuse box tery chargers for the vehicle battery to the in the cargo area. starting aid terminals in the engine compart‐ ment.◀ In the engine compartment
General information Starting aid terminals On right-hand drive vehicles, the fuses are lo‐ In the vehicle, only charge the battery via the cated on the opposite side of the engine com‐ starting aid terminals, refer to page 248, in the partment. engine compartment with the engine off.
Power failure After a power loss, some equipment needs to be newly initialized or individual settings up‐ dated, for example: ▷ Seat and mirror memory: store the posi‐ tions again. ▷ Time: update. ▷ Date: update.
244 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 245
Replacing components Mobility
Removing the cover In the cargo area 1. Use the onboard vehicle tool kit to loosen the three cover screws, arrow 1.
Fold up the cargo floor panel.
2. Pull up the holder, arrow 2. 3. Remove the cover from one side, arrow 3. 4. Press the four fasteners and remove the cover.
Information on the fuse types and locations is found on a separate sheet.
Attaching the covers 1. When attaching the cover, make sure that all four fasteners are engaged. 2. Attach the cover under the rubber lip and then thread it between the bars.
3. Press down on the holder and tighten the three screws.
245 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 246
Mobility Breakdown assistance
Breakdown assistance
Vehicle features and options Overview This chapter describes all standard, country- specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed. SOS button at the interior mirror
Hazard warning flashers Functional requirements ▷ The SIM card integrated in the vehicle has been activated. ▷ The radio-ready state is switched on. ▷ The Assist system is functional.
Initiating an Emergency Request automatically Under certain conditions, such as if the airbags The button is located in the center console. trigger, an Emergency Request is automati‐ cally initiated immediately after a severe acci‐ The red light in the button flashes when the dent. Automatic Collision Notification is not af‐ hazard warning flashers are activated. fected by pressing the SOS button.
Initiating an Emergency Request Intelligent emergency call manually 1. Press the cover briefly to open it. Concept 2. Press the SOS button until the LED at the In case of an emergency, an Emergency Re‐ button lights up green. quest can be made through the system. ▷ The LED is illuminated green when an Emergency Request has been initiated. General information If a cancel prompt appears on the Control Only press the SOS button in an emergency. Display, the Emergency Request can be For technical reasons, the Emergency Request aborted. cannot be guaranteed under unfavorable con‐ If the situation allows, wait in your vehicle ditions. until the voice connection has been estab‐ lished.
246 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 247
Breakdown assistance Mobility
▷ The LED flashes green when a connection Warning triangle to the BMW Response Center has been established. The BMW Response Center then makes contact with you and takes further steps to help you. Even if you are unable to respond, the BMW Response Center can take further steps to help you under certain circum‐ stances. For this, data is transmitted to the BMW The warning triangle is located on the inside of Response Center which serves to deter‐ the tailgate. mine the necessary rescue measures. E.g., To remove, loosen the bracket. the current position of the vehicle, if it can be established. Even if you can no longer hear the BMW Response Center through the loudspeak‐ First-aid kit ers, the BMW Response Center may still be able to hear you. General information The BMW Response Center ends the Emer‐ Some of the articles have a limited service life. gency Request. Check the expiration dates of the contents regularly and replace any expired items promptly. Roadside Assistance Storage Service availability Roadside Assistance can be reached around the clock in many countries. You can obtain as‐ sistance there in the event of a vehicle break‐ down.
Roadside Assistance The Roadside Assistance phone number can be viewed via iDrive or a connection to Road‐ side Assistance can be established directly. The first-aid kit is located in a compartment under the cargo floor panel. To open, pull on the handle.
247 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 248
Mobility Breakdown assistance
Jump-starting Starting aid terminals
General information If the battery is discharged, the engine can be started using the battery of another vehicle and two jumper cables. Only use jumper ca‐ bles with fully insulated clamp handles.
Safety information DANGER The starting aid terminal in the engine com‐ Contact with live components can lead to partment acts as the battery's positive termi‐ an electric shock. There is a risk of injuries or nal. danger to life. Do not touch any components that are under voltage.◀ Open the cover of the starting aid terminal.
NOTE In the case of body contact between the two vehicles, a short circuit can occur during jump-starting. There is a risk of property dam‐ age. Make sure that no body contact occurs.◀
WARNING If the jumper cables are connected in the incorrect order, sparking may occur. There is a risk of injury. Pay attention to the correct order The body ground or a special nut acts as the during connection.◀ battery negative terminal.
Preparation Connecting the cables 1. Check whether the battery of the other ve‐ To prevent personal injury or damage to both hicle has a voltage of 12 volts. The voltage vehicles, adhere strictly to the following proce‐ information can be found on the battery. dure. 2. Switch off the engine of the assisting vehi‐ 1. Open the cover of the BMW starting aid cle. terminal. 3. Switch off any electronic systems/power 2. Attach one terminal clamp of the positive consumers in both vehicles. jumper cable to the positive terminal of the battery, or to the corresponding starting aid terminal of the vehicle providing assis‐ tance. 3. Attach the terminal clamp on the other end of the cable to the positive terminal of the battery, or to the corresponding starting aid terminal of the vehicle to be started.
248 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 249
Breakdown assistance Mobility
4. Attach one terminal clamp of the negative Safety information jumper cable to the negative terminal of NOTE the battery, or to the corresponding engine or body ground of assisting vehicle. The vehicle can be damaged when tow‐ ing the vehicle with a single lifted axle. There is 5. Attach the second terminal clamp to the a risk of property damage. The vehicle should negative terminal of the battery, or to the only be transported on a loading platform.◀ corresponding engine or body ground of the vehicle to be started. Tow truck Starting the engine Never use spray fluids to start the engine. 1. Start the engine of the assisting vehicle and let it run for several minutes at an in‐ creased idle speed. 2. Start the engine of the vehicle that is to be started in the usual way. If the first starting attempt is not success‐ ful, wait a few minutes before making an‐ The vehicle should only be transported on a other attempt in order to allow the dis‐ loading platform. charged battery to recharge. 3. Let both engines run for several minutes. NOTE 4. Disconnect the jumper cables in the re‐ The vehicle can become damaged when verse order. lifting and securing it. Check the battery and recharge, if needed. There is a risk of damage to property. ▷ Lift the vehicle using suitable means. ▷ Do not lift or secure the vehicle by its tow Tow-starting and towing fitting, body parts, or suspension parts.◀
Safety information Pushing the vehicle WARNING To remove a disabled vehicle from the danger Due to system limits, individual functions area, it can be pushed for a short distance. The can malfunction during tow-starting/towing vehicle can only be pushed in selector lever with the Intelligent Safety systems activated, position N. for instance approach control warning with In order to ensure that the vehicle can roll, pro‐ braking function. There is a risk of an accident. ceed as follows: Switch all Intelligent Safety systems off prior to 1. Switch on the ignition. tow-starting/towing.◀ 2. Depress brake pedal. Steptronic transmission: transporting 3. Engage selector lever position N. the vehicle If there is a malfunction, you may not be able to change the selector lever position. General information The vehicle is not permitted to be towed.
249 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 250
Mobility Breakdown assistance
Electronically unlock the transmission lock, re‐ Tow rope fer to page 91, if needed. When starting to tow the vehicle, make sure that the tow rope is taut. Towing other vehicles Use nylon ropes or straps, which will enable the vehicle to be towed without jerking. General information Switch on the hazard warning system, depend‐ Tow fitting ing on local regulations. If the electrical system has failed, clearly iden‐ General information tify the vehicle being towed by placing a sign or a warning triangle in the rear window.
Safety information WARNING If the approved gross vehicle weight of the towing vehicle is lighter than the vehicle to be towed, the tow fitting can tear off or it will not be possible to control the vehicle's re‐ sponse. There is a risk of an accident! Make The screw-in tow fitting should always be car‐ sure that the gross vehicle weight of the tow‐ ried in the vehicle. ing vehicle is heavier than the vehicle to be towed.◀ The tow fitting can be screwed in at the front or rear of the vehicle. NOTE The tow fitting and the onboard vehicle tool kit, If the tow bar or tow rope is attached in‐ refer to page 241, are together in the cargo correctly, damage to other vehicle parts can area. occur. There is a risk of property damage. Cor‐ Use of the tow fitting: rectly attach the tow bar or tow rope to the tow fitting.◀ ▷ Use only the tow fitting provided with the vehicle and screw it all the way in. Tow bar ▷ Use the tow fitting for towing on paved roads only. The tow fittings used should be on the same side on both vehicles. ▷ Avoid lateral loading of the tow fitting, for instance do not lift the vehicle by the tow Should it prove impossible to avoid mounting fitting. the tow bar at an offset angle, please observe the following: Safety information ▷ Maneuvering capability is limited going NOTE around corners. If the tow fitting is not used as intended, ▷ The tow bar will generate lateral forces if it there may be damage to the vehicle or to the is secured with an offset. tow fitting. There is a risk of damage to prop‐ erty. Observe the notes on using the tow fit‐ ting.◀
250 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 251
Breakdown assistance Mobility
Screw thread for tow fitting
Press on the mark on the edge of the cover to push it out.
Tow-starting
Steptronic transmission Do not tow-start the vehicle. Tow-starting the engine is not possible due to the Steptronic transmission. Have the reasons for the starting difficulties corrected by a dealer’s service center or an‐ other qualified service center or repair shop.
251 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 252
Mobility Care
Care
Vehicle features and options Automatic vehicle washes This chapter describes all standard, country- Safety information specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not NOTE necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due Water can penetrate in the windshield to the selected options or country versions. area due to high-pressure washers. There is a This also applies to safety-related functions risk of property damage. Avoid high-pressure and systems. When using these functions and washers.◀ systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed. NOTE Improper use of automatic vehicle washes can cause damage to the vehicle. Vehicle washes There is a risk of damage to property. Follow the following instructions: General information ▷ Give preference to cloth vehicle washes or Regularly remove foreign objects such as those that use soft brushes in order to leaves in the area below the windshield when avoid paint damage. the hood is raised. ▷ Avoid vehicle washes with guide rails Wash your vehicle frequently, particularly in higher than 4 in/10 cm to avoid damage to winter. Intense soiling and road salt can dam‐ the chassis. age the vehicle. ▷ Observe the tire width of the guide rail to avoid damage to tires and rims. Steam blaster and high-pressure ▷ Fold in exterior mirrors to avoid damage to washer the exterior mirrors. Safety information ▷ Deactivate the wiper and, if necessary, rain sensor to avoid damage to the wiper sys‐ NOTE tem.◀ When cleaning with high-pressure wash‐ ers, components can be damaged due to the Before driving into a vehicle wash pressure or temperatures being too high. In order to ensure that the vehicle can roll in a There is a risk of property damage. Maintain vehicle wash, take the following steps: sufficient distance and do not spray too long Steptronic transmission: continuously. Follow the operating instructions for the high-pressure washer.◀ 1. Drive into the vehicle wash. 2. Engage selector lever position N. Distances and temperature 3. Switch off the engine. ▷ Maximum temperature: 140 ℉/60 ℃. In this way, the ignition remains switched ▷ Minimum distance from sensors, cameras, on, and a Check-Control message is dis‐ seals: 12 inches/30 cm. played.
252 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 253
Care Mobility
NOTE After washing the vehicle Selector lever position P is automati‐ After washing the vehicle, apply the brakes cally engaged when the ignition is briefly to dry them; otherwise, braking action switched off. There is a risk of property can be reduced. The heat generated during damage. Do not switch drive-ready state braking dries brake discs and brake pads and off in vehicle washes.◀ protects them against corrosion. Some vehicle washes do not permit persons in Completely remove all residues on the win‐ the vehicle. The vehicle cannot be locked from dows, to minimize loss of visibility due to the outside when in selector lever position N. A smearing and to reduce wiper noises and signal sounds when an attempt is made to lock wiper blade wear. the vehicle.
Driving out of a vehicle wash Vehicle care To start the engine with Steptronic transmis‐ sion: Vehicle care products 1. Ensure that the vehicle key is in the car. General information 2. Depress the brake pedal. BMW recommends using vehicle care and 3. Press the Start/Stop button. cleaning products from BMW. Suitable care products are available from a dealer’s service Pressing the Start/Stop button without step‐ center or another qualified service center or re‐ ping on the brake turns the ignition off. pair shop. Selector lever position Safety information Selector lever position P is engaged automati‐ cally: WARNING ▷ When the ignition is switched off. Cleansers can contain substances that are dangerous and harmful to your health. ▷ After approx. 15 minutes. There is a risk of injury. When cleaning the in‐ terior, open the doors or windows. Only use Headlights products intended for cleaning vehicles. Fol‐ Do not rub wet headlights dry and do not use low the instructions on the container.◀ abrasive or acidic cleaning agents. Soak areas that have been dirtied, for instance Vehicle paint from insects, with shampoo and wash off with water. General information Thaw ice with de-icing spray; do not use an ice Regular care contributes to driving safety and scraper. value retention. Environmental influences in areas with elevated air pollution or natural con‐ Lowerable hardtop taminants, such as tree resin or pollen can af‐ When the wet hardtop is opened, water drop‐ fect the vehicle's paintwork. Tailor the fre‐ lets can run into the cargo area. Remove any quency and extent of your vehicle care to objects in the cargo area beforehand to pre‐ these influences. vent water spotting or soiling. Aggressive substances such as spilled fuel, oil, grease or bird droppings, must be removed im‐
253 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 254
Mobility Care
mediately to prevent the finish from being al‐ Caring for special components tered or discolored. Light-alloy wheels Matte finish When cleaning the vehicle, use only neutral Only use cleaning and care products suitable wheel cleaners having a pH value from 5 to 9. for vehicles with matte finish. Do not use abrasive cleaning agents or steam jets above 140 ℉/60 ℃. Follow the manufac‐ Leather care turer's instructions. Remove dust from the leather regularly, using Aggressive, acidic or alkaline cleaning agents a cloth or vacuum cleaner. can destroy the protective layer of adjacent Otherwise, particles of dust and road grime components, such as the brake disc. chafe in pores and folds, and lead to increased After cleaning, apply the brakes briefly to dry wear and premature degradation of the leather them. The heat generated during braking dries surface. brake discs and brake pads and protects them To guard against discoloration, such as from against corrosion. clothing, clean leather and provide leather care roughly every two months. Chrome surfaces Clean light-colored leather more frequently be‐ Carefully clean components such as the radia‐ cause soiling on such surfaces is substantially tor grille or door handles with an ample supply more visible. of water, possibly with shampoo added, partic‐ ularly when they have been exposed to road Use leather care products; otherwise, dirt and salt. grease will gradually break down the protective layer of the leather surface. Rubber components Upholstery material care Environmental influences can cause surface soiling of rubber parts and a loss of gloss. Use General information only water and suitable cleaning agents for cleaning. Vacuum the upholstery regularly with a vac‐ uum cleaner. Treat especially worn rubber parts with rubber care agents at regular intervals. When cleaning If upholstery is very dirty, for instance with bev‐ rubber seals, do not use any silicon-containing erage stains, use a soft sponge or microfiber vehicle care products in order to avoid damage cloth with a suitable interior cleaner. or noises. Clean the upholstery down to the seams using large sweeping motions. Avoid rubbing the Fine wood parts material vigorously. Clean fine wood facing and fine wood compo‐ nents only with a moist rag. Then dry with a Safety information soft cloth. NOTE Open Velcro® fasteners on articles of Plastic components clothing can damage the seat covers. There is NOTE a risk of property damage. Ensure that any Vel‐ Cleansers that contain alcohol or sol‐ cro® fasteners are closed.◀ vents, such as lacquer thinners, heavy-duty grease removers, fuel, or such, can damage
254 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 255
Care Mobility
plastic parts. There is a risk of property dam‐ are securely fastened again after they were re‐ age. Clean with a microfiber cloth. Dampen moved, for instance for cleaning.◀ cloth lightly with water.◀ Floor mats can be removed from the car's inte‐ Plastic components are e.g.: rior for cleaning. ▷ Imitation leather surfaces. If the floor carpets are very dirty, clean with a ▷ Roofliner. microfiber cloth and water or a textile cleaner. To prevent matting of the carpet, rub back and ▷ Lamp lenses. forth in the direction of travel only. ▷ Instrument cluster cover. ▷ Matt black spray-coated components. Sensor/camera lenses ▷ Painted parts in the interior. To clean sensors and camera lenses, use a Clean with a microfiber cloth. cloth moistened with a small amount of glass detergent. Dampen cloth lightly with water. Do not soak the roofliner. Displays/Screens/protective glass of the Head-up Display Safety belts NOTE WARNING Chemical cleansers, moisture or fluids of Chemical cleansers can destroy the any kind can damage the surface of displays safety belt webbing. Missing protective effect and screens. There is a risk of property dam‐ of the safety belts. There is a risk of injuries or age. Clean with a clean, antistatic microfiber danger to life. Use only a mild soapy solution cloth.◀ for cleaning the safety belts.◀ NOTE Dirty belt straps impede the reeling action and The surface of displays can be damaged thus have a negative impact on safety. with improper cleaning. There is a risk of prop‐ Use only a mild soapy solution, with the safety erty damage. Avoid pressure that is too high belts clipped into their buckles. and do not use any scratching materials.◀ Do not allow the switchs to retract the safety Clean with a clean, antistatic microfiber cloth. belts until they are dry. Clean the protective glass of the Head-up Dis‐ Carpets and floor mats play using a microfiber cloth and commercially available dish-washing soap. WARNING Objects in the driver's floor area can limit Long-term vehicle storage the pedal distance or block a depressed pedal. When the vehicle is shut down for longer than There is a risk of an accident. Stow objects in three months, special measures must be the vehicle such that they are secured and taken. Further information is available from a cannot enter into the driver's floor area. Use dealer’s service center or another qualified floor mats that are suitable for the vehicle and service center or repair shop. can be safely attached to the floor. Do not use loose floor mats and do not layer several floor mats. Make sure that there is sufficient clear‐ ance for the pedals. Ensure that the floor mats
255 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Reference
This chapter contains the technical data and an index that will quickly take you to the information you need.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 258
Reference Technical data
Technical data
Vehicle features and options to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions This chapter describes all standard, country- and systems. When using these functions and specific and optional features offered with the systems, the applicable laws and regulations series. It also describes features that are not must be observed. necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
General information The technical data and specifications in this cle or can be obtained from a dealer’s service Owner's Manual are used as guidance values. center or another qualified service center or re‐ The vehicle-specific data can deviate from this, pair shop. e.g., due to the selected special equipment, The information in the vehicle documents al‐ country version or country-specific measure‐ ways has priority over the information in this ment method. Detailed values can be found in Owner's Manual. the approval documents, on labels on the vehi‐
Dimensions The dimensions can vary depending on the or spoiler. The heights can deviate, e.g., due to model version, equipment or country-specific the selected special equipment, tires, load and measurement method. chassis version. The specified heights do not take into account attached parts, e.g., a roof antenna, roof racks
BMW 4 Series Convertible
Width with mirrors inches/mm 79.4/2,017
Width without mirrors inches/mm 71.9/1,825
Height inches/mm 54.5-55.1/1,384-1,399
Length inches/mm 182.7/4,641
Wheelbase inches/mm 110.6/2,810
Smallest turning radius diam. ft/m 37.1-38.8/11.3-11.8
258 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 259
Technical data Reference
Weights
430i
Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 4,839/2,195
Load lbs/kg 679/308
Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,161/980
Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,767/1,255
440i
Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 4,916/2,230
Load lbs/kg 679/308
Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,227/1,010
Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,767/1,255
430i xDrive
Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 4,971/2,255
Load lbs/kg 679/308
Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,282/1,035
Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,767/1,255
440i xDrive
Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 5,071/2,300
Load lbs/kg 679/308
Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,370/1,075
Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,767/1,255
259 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 260
Reference Technical data
Capacities
US gal/liters Notes
Fuel tank, approx. 15.8/60.0 Fuel quality, refer to page 212
260 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 261
Appendix Reference
Appendix
Any updates to the Owner's Manual of the ve‐ hicle are listed here.
Updates made after the editorial deadline These chapters of the printed Owner's Manual contain updates made after the editorial dead‐ line.
Wireless charging tray
Mounting position of the product.
Note This device has been tested for human expo‐ sure limits and found compliant at a minimum distance of 4 in/10 cm during operation. Therefore, a distance of 4 in/10 cm must be maintained in every direction when operating the device.
261 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 262
Reference Everything from A to Z
Everything from A to Z
Index A All-season tires, see Winter Automatic vehicle wash 252 tires 221 AUTO program, automatic cli‐ ABS, Antilock Brake Sys‐ All-wheel-drive 144 mate control 175 tem 142 Alternative oil types 235 AUTO program, climate con‐ ACC, Active Cruise Control Ambient light 115 trol 172 with Stop&Go function 148 Antifreeze, washer fluid 87 AUTO program, intensity 176 Acceleration Assistant, see Antilock Brake System, Auto Start/Stop function 81 Launch Control 92 ABS 142 Auto washing 252 Accessories and parts 8 Anti-slip control, see Average fuel consump‐ Activated-charcoal filter 177 DSC 142 tion 106 Activation times, parked-car Anti-theft protection, see Average speed 106 ventilation 178 Through-loading sys‐ Axle loads, weights 259 Active Blind Spot Detec‐ tem 189 tion 138 App, BMW Driver’s Guide 6 B Active Cruise Control with Approved axle load 259 Stop&Go function, Arrival time 106 Backrest curvature, see Lum‐ ACC 148 Ashtray 184 bar support 66 Adaptive brake lights, see Assistance, Roadside Assis‐ Backrest, width 67 Brake force display 140 tance 247 Band-aids, see First-aid Adaptive Light Control 113 Assistance when driving kit 247 Additives, oil 235 off 146 Battery replacement, vehicle After washing vehicle 253 Attentiveness assistant 140 battery 243 Airbags 117 AUTO intensity 176 Battery replacement, vehicle Airbags, indicator/warning Automatic climate con‐ remote control 48 light 118 trol 171 Battery, vehicle 243 Air circulation, see Recircu‐ Automatic climate control Being towed, see Tow-start‐ lated-air mode 173, 176 with enhanced features 174 ing and towing 249 Air collar 67 Automatic cruise control with Belts, safety belts 68 Air conditioning 172, 175 Stop&Go function 148 Beverage holder, cup Air, dehumidifying, see Air Automatic Curb Monitor 72 holder 192 conditioning 172, 175 Automatic deactivation, Bluetooth connection 34 Air distribution, Front-seat passenger air‐ BMW Assist 6 manual 173, 176 bags 119 BMW Driver’s Guide app 6 Air flow, air conditioner 173 Automatic headlight con‐ BMW Homepage 6 Air flow, automatic climate trol 112 BMW Internet page 6 control 176 Automatic locking 57 BMW maintenance sys‐ Air pressure, tires 214 Automatic recirculated-air tem 239 Air vents, see Ventilation 177 control 176 Bonus range, ECO PRO 204 Alarm system 57 Automatic transmission, see Bottle holder, see Cup hold‐ Alarm, unintentional 58 Steptronic transmission 88 ers 192 Automatic unlocking 57 Brake assistant 142
262 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 263
Everything from A to Z Reference
Brake discs, break-in 196 Cargo area, enlarging 188 Climate control 171, 174 Brake force display 140 Cargo area, loading 200 Coasting 205 Brake lights, brake force dis‐ Cargo area partition 62 Coasting with engine decou‐ play 140 Cargo area, storage compart‐ pled, coasting 205 Brake pads, break-in 196 ments 192 Coasting with idling en‐ Braking, information 197 Cargo, stowing and secur‐ gine 205 Breakdown assis‐ ing 200 Cockpit 14 tance 246, 247 Carpet, care 255 Combination switch, see Turn Break-in 196 Catalytic converter, see Hot signals 83 Brightness of Control Dis‐ exhaust system 197 Combination switch, see play 31 CBS Condition Based Serv‐ Wiper system 84 Bulb replacement 241 ice 239 Comfort Access 51 Bulb replacement, front 242 Center armrest 191 Comfort entry 47 Bulb replacement, LED head‐ Center console 16 COMFORT program, driving lights 242 Central Information Display dynamics 146 Bulb replacement, rear 243 (CID), see Control Dis‐ Compartments in the Bulbs and lights 241 play 18 doors 191 Button, RES 151 Central locking system 51 Compass 182 Button, Start/Stop 79 Central screen, see Control Compressor 223 Bypassing, see Jump-start‐ Display 18 Computer, see Onboard ing 248 Changes, technical, see For Computer 105 Your Own Safety 7 Condensation on win‐ C Changing parts 241 dows 177 Changing wheels 227 Condensation under the vehi‐ California Proposition 65 Changing wheels/tires 221 cle 198 Warning 8 Chassis number, see Vehicle Condition Based Service Calling up mirror adjust‐ identification number 10 CBS 239 ment 57 Check Control 96 Configuring driving pro‐ Calling up seat adjust‐ Checking the oil level elec‐ gram 146 ment 57 tronically 233 Confirmation signal 57 Camera-based assistance Children, seating position 75 ConnectedDrive 6 systems, see Intelligent Children, transporting ConnectedDrive Services 6 Safety 128 safely 75 Connecting device 33 Camera lenses, care 255 Child restraint fixing system Connecting mobile phone 33 Camera, rearview cam‐ LATCH 77 Connecting smartphone 33 era 161 Child restraint system 75 Connecting telephone 33 Camera, Side View 164 Child restraint systems, Connections 33 Camera, Top View 165 mounting 76 Container for washer fluid 87 Can holder, see Cup hold‐ Child seat, mounting 76 Continued driving with a flat ers 192 Child seats 75 tire 124, 128 Care, displays 255 Chrome parts, care 254 Control Display 18 Care, vehicle 253 Cigarette lighter 184 Control Display, settings 29 Care, washing the vehi‐ City light braking function Controller 19 cle 252 warning with braking func‐ Control systems, driving sta‐ Cargo 199 tion 132 bility 142 Cargo area 188 Cleaning, displays 255
263 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 264
Reference Everything from A to Z
Convenient closing with the Date display 101 Driving instructions, break- remote control 47 Daytime running lights 113 in 196 Convenient opening with the Defrosting, see defrosting the Driving instructions, ECO remote control 47 windows 173 PRO 204 Convertible mode, automatic Defrosting, see Windows, de‐ Driving mode 144 climate control 172, 176 frosting 177 Driving notes, general 196 Convertible program, auto‐ Defrosting the windows 173 Driving on racetracks 198 matic climate con‐ Dehumidifying, air 172, 175 Driving stability control sys‐ trol 172, 176 Deleting personal data 32 tems 142 Convertible top, see Hard‐ Deletion of personal data 32 Driving style analysis 206 top 60 Destination distance 106 Driving tips 196 Coolant 237 Device list 33 DSC Dynamic Stability Con‐ Coolant level 237 Digital clock 101 trol 142 Coolant temperature 100 Digital compass 182 DTC Dynamic Traction Con‐ Cooling, maximum 175 Dimensions 258 trol 143 Cooling system 237 Dimmable exterior mirrors 73 Dynamic Damping Con‐ Cornering light 113 Dimmable interior mirror 73 trol 144 Corrosion on brake discs 198 Direction indicator, see Turn Dynamic Stability Control Cosmetic mirror 184 signals 83 DSC 142 Coupling, see Pairing 33 Display in windshield 108 Dynamic Traction Control Courtesy lights during un‐ Display lighting, see Instru‐ DTC 143 locking 47 ment lighting 115 Courtesy lights with the vehi‐ Displays 93 E cle locked 48 Displays, care 255 Cruise control 154 Disposal, coolant 238 ECO PRO 202 Cruise control, active with Disposal, vehicle battery 244 ECO PRO bonus range 204 Stop&Go function 148 Distance control, see ECO PRO display 202 Cruise control with distance PDC 157 ECO PRO driving mode 202 control, see active cruise Distance to destination 106 ECO PRO driving style analy‐ control, ACC 148 Divided screen view, split sis 206 Cruise control without dis‐ screen 23 ECO PRO mode 202 tance control, see cruise Drive-off assistant 146 ECO PRO tips 204 control 154 Drive-off assistant, see Efficiency display, ECO Cruising range 101 DSC 142 PRO 204 Cup holders 192 Driver assistance, see Intelli‐ Efficient driving 204 Current fuel consump‐ gent Safety 128 EfficientDynamics informa‐ tion 101 Driver profiles 54 tion 205 Driver profiles, exporting pro‐ Electronic oil measure‐ D files 55 ment 233 Driver profiles, importing pro‐ Electronic Stability Program Damage, tires 220 files 55 ESP, see DSC 142 Damping control, dy‐ Driving Assistant, see Intelli‐ Emergency release, fuel filler namic 144 gent Safety 128 flap 211 Data protection, settings 32 Driving Dynamics Con‐ Emergency Request 246 Data, technical 258 trol 144 Emergency service, see Date 30 Roadside Assistance 247
264 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 265
Everything from A to Z Reference
Emergency unlocking, tail‐ External temperature dis‐ Front-seat passenger airbags, gate 53 play 100 automatic deactivation 119 Emergency unlocking, trans‐ External temperature warn‐ Front-seat passenger airbags, mission lock 91 ing 100 indicator lamp 119 Energy Control 101 FTM Flat Tire Monitor 126 Energy recovery 102 F Fuel 212 Engine, automatic Start/Stop Fuel cap 210 function 81 Failure message, see Check Fuel consumption his‐ Engine, automatic switch- Control 96 tory 205 off 81 False alarm, see Unintentional Fuel consumption, see Aver‐ Engine compartment 231 alarm 58 age fuel consumption 106 Engine compartment, work‐ Fan, see Air flow 173, 176 Fuel filler flap 210 ing in 232 Filler neck for engine oil 234 Fuel gauge 100 Engine coolant 237 Fine wood, care 254 Fuel quality 212 Engine idling when driving, First-aid kit 247 Fuel recommendation 212 coasting 205 Flat tire, changing Fuel, tank capacity 260 Engine oil 233 wheels 227 Fuse 244 Engine oil, adding 234 Flat tire message, FTM 127 Engine oil additives 235 Flat tire message, TPM 124 G Engine oil change 236 Flat Tire Monitor FTM 126 Engine oil filler neck 234 Flat tire, repairing 222 Garage door opener, see Uni‐ Engine oil temperature 100 Flat tire, Tire Pressure Moni‐ versal Integrated Remote Engine oil types, alterna‐ tor TPM 121 Control 180 tive 235 Flat tire warning light, Gasoline 212 Engine oil types, suitable 235 FTM 127 Gear shift indicator 103 Engine start, jump-start‐ Flat tire warning light, General driving notes 196 ing 248 TPM 124 General settings 29 Engine start, see Starting the Flooding 197 Glare shield 184 engine 80 Floor carpet, care 255 Glove compartment 190 Engine stop 80 Floor mats, care 255 GPS geolocation, vehicle po‐ Engine temperature 100 Fogged up windows 173 sition 30 Entering a vehicle wash 252 Fold-away position, wiper 86 Gross vehicle weight, ap‐ Equipment, interior 180 Fold back rear seat back‐ proved 259 Error displays, see Check rests 188 Control 96 Foot brake 197 H ESP Electronic Stability Pro‐ For Your Own Safety 7 gram, see DSC 142 Front airbags 117 Handbrake, see parking Exchanging wheels/tires 221 Front-end collision warning brake 83 Exhaust system 197 with City Braking func‐ Hand-held transmitter, alter‐ Exiting a vehicle wash 252 tion 129 nating code 181 Exterior mirror, automatic Front fog lights 114 Hardtop 60 dimming feature 73 Front fog lights, halogen, bulb Hardtop, cargo area parti‐ Exterior mirrors 72 replacement 242 tion 62 Exterior mirrors, malfunc‐ Front fog lights, LED, bulb re‐ Hardtop, rollover protection tion 72 placement 243 system 120 External start 248 Front lights 242 Hazard warning flashers 246
265 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 266
Reference Everything from A to Z
Headlamps 242 Indicator/warning lights, see Interval display, service re‐ Headlight control, auto‐ Check Control 96 quirements 102 matic 112 Indicator light, see Check Interval mode 85 Headlight courtesy delay fea‐ Control 96 In the vicinity of the center ture 112 Individual air distribu‐ console 16 Headlight flasher 84 tion 173, 176 In the vicinity of the roof‐ Headlight glass 242 Individual settings, see driver liner 17 Headlights, care 253 profiles 54 In the vicinity of the steering Head restraints, front 70 Inflation pressure, tires 214 wheel 14 Head-up Display 108 Inflation pressure warning Head-up Display, care 255 FTM, tires 126 J Head-up Display, see Mem‐ Info Display, see Onboard ory function 71 Computer 105 Jacking points for the vehicle Heating, neck 67 Information 6 jack 228 Heavy cargo, stowing Initialize, Tire Pressure Moni‐ Jump-starting 248 cargo 200 tor TPM 122 Height, vehicle 258 Initializing, Flat Tire Monitor K High-beam Assistant 114 FTM 126 High beams 84 Instrument cluster 93 Keyless Go, see Comfort Ac‐ High beams/low beams, see Instrument display, multifunc‐ cess 51 High-beam Assistant 114 tional 93 Key, mechanical 50 Hills 198 Instrument lighting 115 Key, see Remote control 46 Hill start assistant, see Drive- Integrated key 50 Kickdown, Steptronic trans‐ off assistant 146 Integrated Owner's Manual in mission 89 Holder for beverages 192 the vehicle 41 Knee airbag 117 Homepage 6 Intelligent emergency Hood 232 call 246 L Horn 14 Intelligent Safety 128 Hot exhaust system 197 Intended use 7 Label on recommended HUD Head-up Display 108 Intensity, AUTO pro‐ tires 221 Hydroplaning 197 gram 176 Lamp replacement, front 242 Interior equipment 180 Lamp replacement, rear 243 I Interior lights 115 Lane departure warning 137 Interior lights during unlock‐ Lane margin, warning 137 Ice warning, see External ing 47 Language, on the Control temperature warning 100 Interior lights with the vehicle Display 29 Icy roads, see External tem‐ locked 48 LATCH child restraint fixing perature warning 100 Interior mirror, automatic dim‐ system 77 Identification marks, tires 218 ming feature 73 Launch Control 92 Identification number, see Ve‐ Interior mirror, compass 182 Leather, care 254 hicle identification num‐ Interior mirror, manually dim‐ LED light, bulb replace‐ ber 10 mable 73 ment 242 iDrive 18 Interior motion sensor 58 LEDs, light-emitting di‐ Ignition off 79 Internet connection 36 odes 242 Ignition on 79 Internet hotspot 36 Length, vehicle 258 Internet page 6 Light 111
266 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 267
Everything from A to Z Reference
Light-alloy wheels, care 254 Manual operation, rearview Neck restraints, front, see Light control 113 camera 161 Head restraints 70 Light-emitting diodes, Manual operation, Side Neutral cleaner, see Wheel LEDs 242 View 164 cleaner 254 Lighting 111 Manual operation, Top New wheels and tires 221 Light in the exterior mirror, View 166 see Active Blind Spot De‐ Marking, run-flat tires 222 O tection 138 Matte finish 254 Light replacement 241 Maximum cooling 175 OBD Onboard Diagnosis 240 Lights and bulbs 241 Maximum speed, display 103 OBD, see OBD Onboard Di‐ Light switch 111 Maximum speed, winter agnosis 240 List of all messages 31 tires 222 Obstacle marking, rearview Load 200 Measurement, units of 30 camera 162 Loading 199 Medical kit 247 Octane rating, see Recom‐ Loading aid 186 Memory function 71 mended fuel grade 213 Loading, see Interior equip‐ Menu in instrument clus‐ Odometer 100 ment 186 ter 104 Office 6 Location, vehicle position 30 Menus 20 Oil 233 Locking, automatic 57 Menus, operating, iDrive 18 Oil, adding 234 Locking, settings 56 Messages 31 Oil additives 235 Low beams 111 Messages, see Check Con‐ Oil change 236 Low beams, automatic, see trol 96 Oil change interval, service High-beam Assistant 114 Microfilter 173, 177 requirements 102 Lower back support 66 Minimum tread, tires 220 Oil filler neck 234 Lumbar support 66 Mirror 72 Oil types, alternative 235 Mirror, see Memory func‐ Oil types, suitable 235 M tion 71 Old batteries, disposal 244 Mobile communication devi‐ Onboard Computer 105 Maintenance 239 ces in the vehicle 197 Onboard vehicle tool kit 241 Maintenance require‐ Mobility System 223 Opening and closing 46 ments 239 Modifications, technical, see Operating concept, iDrive 18 Maintenance, service require‐ For Your Own Safety 7 Operating via iDrive 20 ments 102 Moisture in headlight 242 Operating with the Control‐ Maintenance system, Monitor, see Control Dis‐ ler 20 BMW 239 play 18 Optional equipment 7 Make-up mirror 184 Mounting of child restraint Outside air, see Automatic re‐ Malfunction displays, see systems 76 circulated-air control 176 Check Control 96 Multifunctional instrument Overheating of engine, see Manual air distribu‐ display 93 Coolant temperature 100 tion 173, 176 Multifunction steering wheel, Manual air flow 173, 176 buttons 14 P Manual operation, fuel filler Multimedia 6 flap 211 Paint, vehicle 253 Manual operation, PDC Park N Panic alarm, see Panic Distance Control 158 mode 58 Navigation 6 Panic mode 58
267 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 268
Reference Everything from A to Z
Parallel parking assistant 167 Radio-operated remote con‐ Rolling code hand-held trans‐ Park Distance Control trol, opening/closing 46 mitter 181 PDC 157 Radio-ready state 79 Rollover protection sys‐ Parked-car ventilation 178 Rain sensor 85 tem 120 Parked vehicle, condensa‐ Rear lights 243 RON recommended fuel tion 198 Rear socket 186 grade 213 Parking aid, see PDC 157 Rear turn signal, bulb replace‐ Roofliner 17 Parking assistant 167 ment 243 Roof, see Hardtop 60 Parking brake 83 Rearview camera 160 RSC Run Flat System Com‐ Parking lights 111 Rearview mirror 72 ponent, see Run-flat Parts and accessories 8 Rear window de‐ tires 222 Passenger's side mirror, tilt‐ froster 173, 177 Rubber components, ing downward 72 Recirculated-air filter 177 care 254 Pathway lines, rearview cam‐ Recirculated-air Run-flat tires 222 era 162 mode 173, 176 PDC Park Distance Con‐ Recommended fuel S trol 157 grade 213 Personal profile, see driver Recommended tire Safe braking 197 profiles 54 brands 221 Safety belt reminder for driv‐ Person warning with City light Refueling 210 er's seat and front passen‐ braking function 135 Remaining range 101 ger seat 70 Pinch protection system, win‐ Remote control, additional 49 Safety belts 68 dows 60 Remote control, integrated Safety belts, care 255 Plastic, care 254 key 50 Safety belts, see Safety Power failure 244 Remote control, loss 49 belts 68 Power windows 59 Remote control, malfunc‐ Safety systems, airbags 117 Prescribed engine oil tion 49 Saving fuel 201 types 235 Remote control, opening/ Screen, see Control Dis‐ Pressure, tire air pres‐ closing 46 play 18 sure 214 Remote control, univer‐ Screwdriver, see Onboard ve‐ Pressure warning FTM, sal 180 hicle tool kit 241 tires 126 Replacing parts 241 Sealant 223 Profiles, see driver profiles 54 Replacing wheels/tires 221 Seat heating, front 67 Programmable memory but‐ Reporting safety malfunc‐ Seating position for chil‐ tons, iDrive 24 tions 10 dren 75 Protective function, win‐ RES button 151 Seat, see Memory func‐ dows 60 RES button, see Active tion 71 Push-and-turn reel, see Con‐ Cruise Control, ACC 148 Securing cargo 200 troller 19 RES button, see Cruise con‐ Selection list in instrument trol 154 cluster 104 R Reserve warning, see Selector lever, see Steptronic Range 101 transmission 88 Racetrack operation 198 Reset, Tire Pressure Monitor Sensors, care 255 Radiator fluid 237 TPM 122 Service and warranty 8 Radio 6 Retreaded tires 221 Roadside parking lights 111
268 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 269
Everything from A to Z Reference
Service requirements, Condi‐ Sport displays, torque dis‐ Symbols in the status field 24 tion Based Service play, performance dis‐ CBS 239 play 107 T Service requirements, dis‐ SPORT program, driving dy‐ play 102 namics 145 Tachometer 100 Service, Roadside Assis‐ Sport steering, variable 144 Tailgate closing 53 tance 247 Stability control systems 142 Tailgate, emergency unlock‐ Services, ConnectedDrive 6 Standard equipment 7 ing 53 Servotronic 147 Start/stop, automatic func‐ Tailgate opening 53 SET button, see Active tion 81 Tailgate via remote con‐ Cruise Control, ACC 148 Start/Stop button 79 trol 48 SET button, see Cruise con‐ Starting the engine 80 Tail lamps 243 trol 154 Status control display, Technical changes, see For Settings, locking/unlock‐ tires 122 Your Own Safety 7 ing 56 Status information, iDrive 24 Technical data 258 Settings on the Control Dis‐ Status of Owner's Manual 7 Telephone 6 play 29 Status, vehicle 109 Temperature, automatic cli‐ Shifting, Steptronic transmis‐ Steering assistance 147 mate control 172, 174 sion 88 Steering wheel, adjusting 74 Temperature display for ex‐ Shift paddles on the steering Steering wheel heating 74 ternal temperature 100 wheel 90 Steptronic Sport transmis‐ Temperature, engine oil 100 Shift point indicator 95 sion, see Steptronic trans‐ Terminal, starting aid 248 Side airbags 117 mission 88 Theft alarm system, see Side View 163 Steptronic transmission 88 Alarm system 57 Signaling, horn 14 Stopping the engine 80 Thigh support 66 Signals when unlocking 57 Storage compartment in the Through-loading system 188 Sitting safely 65 rear 192 Tilt alarm sensor 58 Size 258 Storage compartments 190 Time 29 Smallest turning radius 258 Storage compartments, loca‐ Time of arrival 106 SMS text message, supple‐ tions 190 Tire damage 220 mentary 99 Storage, tires 222 Tire identification marks 218 Snow chains 226 Storing the vehicle 255 Tire inflation pressure 214 Socket 185 Stowing and securing Tire inflation pressure moni‐ Socket, OBD Onboard Diag‐ cargo 200 tor, see FTM 126 nostics 240 Suitable devices 34 Tire Pressure Monitor Software update 38 Suitable engine oil types 235 TPM 121 SOS button 246 Suitable mobile phones 34 Tire repair kit, see Mobility Speed, average 106 Summer tires, tread 220 System 223 Speed Limit Info 103 Sun visor 184 Tires, changing 221 Speed Limit Info, Onboard Supplementary SMS text Tire sealant, see Mobility Computer 106 message 99 System 223 Speed limits, display 103 Surround View 160 Tires, everything on wheels Speed warning 107 Switch for driving dynam‐ and tires 214 Split screen 23 ics 144 Tires, run-flat tires 222 SPORT+ - program, driving Switch, see Cockpit 14 Tire tread 220 dynamics 145 Symbols 6 Tone 6
269 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 270
Reference Everything from A to Z
Tool 241 USB interface, position in ve‐ Washer fluid 87 Top View 164 hicle 186 Washer nozzles, wind‐ Total vehicle weight 259 USB port, see USB inter‐ shield 86 Touchpad 22 face 186 Washer system 84 Towing 249 Use, intended 7 Washing the vehicle 252 Tow-starting 249 Water on roads 197 TPM Tire Pressure Moni‐ V Weights 259 tor 121 Welcome lamps 112 Traction control 143 Vanity mirror 184 Welcome lights during un‐ TRACTION, driving dynam‐ Variable sport steering 144 locking 47 ics 143 Vehicle battery 243 Wheel base, vehicle 258 Transmission lock, electronic Vehicle battery, replac‐ Wheel cleaner 254 unlocking 91 ing 243 Wheels, changing 221 Transmission, Steptronic Vehicle, break-in 196 Wheels, everything on wheels transmission 88 Vehicle care 253 and tires 214 Transporting children Vehicle care products 253 Wheels, Flat Tire Monitor safely 75 Vehicle features and op‐ FTM 126 Tread, tires 220 tions 7 Wheels, Tire Pressure Moni‐ Trip computer 106 Vehicle identification num‐ tor TPM 121 Triple turn signal activa‐ ber 10 Width, vehicle 258 tion 84 Vehicle jack 228 WiFi connection 36 Trip odometer 100 Vehicle paint 253 Wind deflector 62 Trip recorder, see Trip odom‐ Vehicle position, vehicle loca‐ Window defroster, eter 100 tion 30 rear 173, 177 Trunk, cargo area partition 62 Vehicle status 109 Windows, powered 59 Trunk, emergency unlock‐ Vehicle storage 255 Windshield washer fluid 87 ing 53 Vehicle wash 252 Windshield washer noz‐ Turning circle 258 Vehicle, washing 252 zles 86 Turning radius lines, rearview Ventilation 177 Windshield washer sys‐ camera 162 Ventilation, see Parked-car tem 84 Turn signals, operation 83 ventilation 178 Windshield washer system, VIN, see Vehicle identification see Washer/wiper sys‐ U number 10 tem 84 Voice activation system 26 Windshield wiper, see Wiper Unintentional alarm 58 system 84 Units of measurement 30 W Winter storage, care 255 Universal remote control 180 Winter tires, suitable Unlock button, see Steptronic Warning displays, see Check tires 221 transmission 88 Control 96 Winter tires, tread 220 Unlocking, automatic 57 Warning light in the exterior Wiper 84 Unlocking, settings 56 mirror, see Active Blind Spot Wiper blades, replacing 241 Updates made after the edito‐ Detection 138 Wiper fluid 87 rial deadline 7 Warning messages, see Wiper, fold-away position 86 Upholstery care 254 Check Control 96 Wiper system 84 USB connection 35 Warning triangle 247 Wood, care 254 Warranty 8
270 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17 Seite 271
Everything from A to Z Reference
Word match concept, naviga‐ tion 22 Wrench, see Onboard vehicle tool kit 241 X
xDrive 144
271 Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17
More about BMW
The Ultimate bmwusa.com Driving Machine® 01402978162 ue 01402978162
*BL2978162005*
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17